SECTION 5 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ERECTION OF 33/11KV SUB-STATIONS WITH CONNECTED 33KV & 11KV LINES

Section-5 : Technical Specification

1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 5 MVA POWER TRANSFORMERS FOR 33/11KV SUBSTATIONS: 1.0 Scope: This specification covers the design manufacture, testing, supply, delivery at site according to the following specifications of the following transformer. 3Ph, 33/11KV, 5000KVA/8000KVA Power Transformer with on load tap changer (OLTC) The material should be guaranteed for Five (5) years from the date of commissioning of Power Transformer. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder's guarantee, in a manner acceptable to APEPDCL, who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which, in his judgment is not in accordance there with. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such, components shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order or not. Standards: The transformers shall conform in all respects to IS-2026/1977 (with latest Amendments) / IEC 600 76 –1993 (with latest Amendments if any). Except where specified otherwise. Equipment meeting any other authoritative standard, which ensures an equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above will also, is acceptable. In such a case, a copy of standard (English version) followed should be enclosed with the tender. The finished Power Transformer, oil, bushings, tap changer etc., that are used in manufacturing of transformer shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications / IEC Standards, with latest amendments as indicated below. Indian Standard Title IS-2026/1977 IS : 335/1993 IS-3347 and IS 2099/1986 IS 8468-1977 2.1 International & Internationally recognized standard Power IEC – 600 76 –1993 – Power Transformers – Part 1 to 5. Electrical IEC 60 071

Specification for transformers Part I to IV New insulating oils Clearances Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V. Specification for Tap changer

CONFLICT OF STANDARDS: Equipment conforming to other internationally accepted standards, which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above would also be acceptable. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the other standards, salient points

Section-5 : Technical Specification

2

of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer. In case of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS (ii) IEC (iii) Other standards. In case of any difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification, the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS : As noted in clause No.23 service conditions of GCC, the Power Transformer to be supplied against this Specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) Location Max. ambient air temperature (deg.C) Min. ambient air temperature (deg.C) Average daily ambient air temperature (deg.C) Max. Relative Humidity (%) Max. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Average Annual rainfall (mm). Max. wind pressure(kg/sq.m.) Isoceraunic level (days per year) Seismic level (Horizontal accn.) At various locations in the state of Andhra Pradesh 50 7.5 35 100 1000 925 200 50 0.3 g.

The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate, conducive to rust and fungus growth. 4.0 4.1.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS : Design and Standardisation: The transformer and accessories shall be designed to facilitate operation, inspection, maintenance and repairs. All apparatus shall also be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under such sudden variations of the load and voltage as may be met with under working conditions on the system, including those due to short circuit. The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment keeping in view the requirements of Indian Electricity Rules. All materials used shall be of the best quality and of the class most suitable for working under the conditions specified and shall withstand the variations of temperature, and atmospheric conditions arising under working conditions without undue distortion or deterioration or the setting up of undue stresses in any part, and also without affecting the strength and suitability of various parts for the work for which they have to perform. Corresponding parts liable for replacement shall be interchangeable. Cast iron shall not be used for chambers of oil filled apparatus or for any part of the equipment, which is in tension or subject to impact stresses. This clause is not intended
3

4.1.2

4.1.3

4.1.4 4.1.5

Section-5 : Technical Specification

to prohibit the use of suitable grades of cast iron for parts where service experience has shown it to be satisfactory e.g. Large valve bodies, unless otherwise specified. 4.1.6 4.1.7 4.1.8 4.1.9 All out-door apparatus, including bushing insulators with their mountings, shall be designed so as to avoid pockets in which water can collect. Means shall be provided for easy lubrication of all bearings and where necessary of any mechanism or moving parts that are not oil immersed. All mechanism where necessary shall be constructed of stainless steel, brass or gun metal to prevent sticking due to rust or corrosion. All taper pins used in any mechanism shall be of the split type complying with IS No. 2393 (latest version) for these items.

4.1.10 All connections and contacts shall be of sample section and surface for carrying continuously the specified currents without undue heating and fixed connections shall be secured with bolts or set screws of ample size, adequately locked. Lock nuts shall be used on stud connections carrying current. 4.1.11 All apparatus shall be designed to minimize the risk or accidental short circuit caused by animals, birds or vermin. 4.2 4.2.1 GALVANISING: Galvanizing shall be applied by hot-dip process or by electro galvanizing process for all parts other than steel wires and shall consist of a thick ness of zinc coating equivalent to not less than 610 gm zinc per square meter of surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth clean and of uniform thickness and free from defects. The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of the coated material. The quality will be established by tests as per IS:2630 (latest version). (Alternatively to galvanizing Aluminizing may also be considered). All drilling, punching, cutting, bending and welding of parts shall be completed and all burrs shall be removed before the galvanizing process is applied. Galvanizing of wires shall be applied by the hot-dip process and shall meet the requirements of the relevant IS. The zinc coating shall be smooth, clean and uniform thickness and free from defects. The preparation for galvanizing and the galvanizing itself shall not adversely affect the mechanical properties of wire. Surfaces, which are in contact with oil, shall not be galvanized. LABLES: Lables shall be provided for all apparatus such as relays, switches, fuses contained in any cubicle or marshaling kiosk. Descriptive lables for mounting indoors or inside cubicles and kiosks shall be of material that will ensure permanence of lettering. A matt or satin finish shall be provided to avoid dazzle from reflected light. Lables mounted on dark surface shall

4.2.2 4.2.3

4.2.4 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2

Section-5 : Technical Specification

4

all external surfaces shall receive a minimum of three coats of paint.5. all un-galvanized parts shall be completely clean and free from rust.2 All plates shall be of incorrosible material.5 4.4 4. On out-door equipment.5 4. Danger notices shall have red lettering on a white back ground.5. If bolts and nuts are placed so that they are in accessible by means of ordinary spanners. nuts and washers in contact with non-ferrous parts which carry current shall be of phosphor bronze where the transfer of current is through the bolt. Nuts. or those can be stuck with araldite also.4. Minimum paint thickness shall be 40 microns. Bolts and nuts external to the transformers shall be provided with double flat washer and one spring washer. The second coat shall be of an oil and weather resisting nature and preferably of a shade or colour easily distinguishable from the primary and final coats shall be applied after the second coat has been touched up where necessary.4. The interior of all transformer tanks and other oil filled chambers and internal structural steel work shall be cleaned of all scale and rust by shot-blasting or other approved method.6 Section-5 : Technical Specification 5 .3 4. which may have to be removed for maintenance purposes. The final coat shall be of a glassy.4 4. All interior surfaces of mechanism chambers and kiosks except those which have received anti-corrosion treatment shall receive three coats of paint applied to the 4. BOLTS & NUTS: Steel bolts and nuts exposed to atmosphere with suitable finishes like cadmium plated or zinc All nuts and pins shall be locked in position with the exception of those external to the transformer.5.1 4.4 4.have white lettering on a black background. bolts and washers. Except for nuts. all bolts. scale and grease and all external rough surface cavities on castings shall be filled by metal deposition. 4.4.4 4. These surfaces shall be painted with hot oil resisting epoxy paint.5. Lables shall be attached to panels with brass screws or with stool screws.3 4.3 4.5. bolts and washers.1 4.5.2 4. which have received rust preventive treatment.4.5.3. which may have to be removed for maintenance purposes shall receive a minimum of one coat of paint after erection. Primer paint shall be readymade zinc chromate as per IS-104 intermediate and final coats of paint shall be as per IS-2932. 631 of IS.3. suitable special spanners shall be provided by the supplier. The primary coat shall be applied immediately after cleaning. oil and weather resisting non-fading paint of shade No. CLEANING AND PAINTING: Before painting or filling with oil in case of Transformer.

7 Any damage to paint work incurred during transport and erection shall be made good by the supplier by thoroughly cleaning the damaged portion and applying the full number of coats of paint that had been applied before the damage was occurred. The important characteristic of the transformer oil after it is filled in the transformer (within 3 months of filling) shall be as follows: Sl. transformers shall be oil immersed and naturally cooled.0 5. 2.1 5.5 CONTINUOUS MAXIMUM RATING AND OVERLOADS: Section-5 : Technical Specification 6 .9 5. 3. 7.5. 5.1 5.thoroughly cleaned metal surface. Oil filled in transformers.1. One coat of additional paint shall be given at site by the supplier.03 mg KOH/gm 50 (max) 4.2 Prevention of Acidity: The design and all materials and process used in the construction of the transformers shall be such as to reduce to a minimum the risk of the development of acidity in the oil.4 Electrical Characteristics and Performance: Type of transformers and operating conditions. shall not be resorted to.8 4.3 Characteristics Electric strength (BDV) (2. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: OIL: The transformers and all associated equipment shall normally be supplied along with the fresh filled oil. 4. 5. core type and shall be suitable for out-door installation.04 N/M (min) 0.5.1.1. The type of cooling shall be as stated in the relevant specifications. such as nitrogen sealing or the use of inhibited oil. and shall be provided with conservator vessels. 6. 4.1. C (min) 0. 5.5mm gap) Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan delta) at 90o C Specific resistance (resistivity) at 27oC (Ohm-cm) Flash point ponsky – Marton Inter facial tension at 27 Deg C Neutralisation value (total acidity) (maximum) Water content PPM Specification 30 KV (minimum) 0.1.02 (max) 1500x1012 (min) 140 Deg.No 1. Supplier shall supply the requisite quantity of paint. 5. The paint work shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of 5 years from the date of receipt of the equipment.5. The oil shall conform as per IS : 335/1993 with latest amendment and it shall be free from moisture and have uniform quality throughout. The final coat shall be of a light coloured anticondensation mixture. Special measures.

2 VOLTAGE RATIO : The voltage between phases on the higher and lower voltage winding of each transformer measured at no load and corresponding to the normal ratio of transformation shall be those stated in the ordering schedule. shall meet the temperature rise limits specified in IS 2026 on all tappings on which the rated current is not more than 95 percent of the maximum rated current on the lowest voltage tapping.R and at any ratio irrespective of the direction of flow of power and with voltage of the untapped winding maintained at the voltage stated in the ordering schedule.1. On other tappings. Any transformer may be directly connected to an underground cable or over Section-5 : Technical Specification 7 . 5.5. Means shall be provided for varying the normal ratio of transformation in accordance with the clause 5. it is to be assumed that the amount of generating plant simultaneously connected is such that normal voltage will be maintained on one side of any transformer when there is a short circuit between phases or phase to earth on the other side. The loading of the transformers. Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers.7 Transformers except where stated below with tapping ranges extending more than 5 percent below the nominal voltage.8 The transformers may be operated without danger on any particular tapping at the rated KVA provided that the voltage does not vary by more than + or –10% of the voltage corresponding to the tapping. 5.5 5.35 voltage control on load type. 5. Transformers having tapping ranges extending not more than 5 percent below the nominal voltage shall operate on the principal / tapping without exceeding the limits laid down in IS-2026 for oil temperature rise and winding temperature rise as measured by resistance. they shall operate continuously without injurious heating.1. 5. Transformers shall be capable of operation continuously in accordance with IS loading guide at their C.M.Transformers shall comply as regards to rating temperature rise and overload with the appropriate requirements of IS 2026 when operating with ONAN cooling..1 DUTY UNDER FAULT CONDITIONS: Except where modified below.4 FREQUENCY: The transformers shall be suitable for continuous operation with frequency variation of + or –3% from normal 50 C/S without exceeding specified temperature rise. Note: Operation of a transformer at rated KVA at reduced voltage may give rise to excessive losses and temperature rise. On the other tappings. is to be in accordance with IS 6600.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: Transformers shall be connected in accordance with the IS group symbol Dy 11. 5. 5. they shall operate continuously without injurious heating.

15% for 5. Losses 5 MVA 8 MVA No load losses 6500 W 8500 W Load losses 34000 W 50000 W Note: The tenderer shall furnish the calculation for the losses quoted by them with core loss curves.5.2 Penalty for excessive losses: During testing if it is found that actual measured losses are more than the values quoted by the bidder penalty shall be recovered from the Bidder at double the loss rate as specified below.0MVA Power Transformers. IV.head transmission line and switched into and out of service together with its associated transmission line.3 : Rs.6.6.2 5. Voltage ratio at principal tapping Impedance voltage at rated current (Principal tapping) No load current III.5% of the declared ratio A percentage of the declared ratio equal to 1/10th of the actual % impedance voltage at rated current. reliability and economical use of material. 2.0 MVA transformers and 8. 28. No load losses Load losses 5.17.6.No Item Total losses Component losses provided that the 1 tolerance for total losses of 10% is not exceeded II. 5.35% for 8. +10% of the declared impedance voltage for that tapping.515 per KW : Rs.6 5.7 REGULATION AND IMPEDANCE: The impedance voltage at normal ratio of transformation and normal rating shall be 7.772 per KW Tolerance 10% of total losses +15% of each component losses.1 All Transformers shall be capable of withstanding without any damage to external short circuit between phases and phase to ground according to IS: 2026 or its latest version. The offers for transformers with higher losses will be rejected. 5. For Fraction of a KW evaluation will be on prorata basis. 5. LOSSES: The maximum loss of each transformer shall be as indicated below: The tolerance on the losses of each transformer shall be in accordance with IS:2026. +3% of the declared no load current. 5.8 TEMPERATURE: Section-5 : Technical Specification 8 . Tolerance: Sl. The fixed losses should be as low as is consistent with normal design. The lower of the following 0.

11 SUPRESSION OF HARMONICS: 5.11.6tesla. 5.5%.10 VIBRATION AND NOISE: 5.10. of each transformer shall be stated.1 Maximum Ambient Temperature 50 Deg C Maximum oil temperature rise by thermometer 40 Deg C Maximum winding temperature rise by winding resistance 50 Deg C measurement FLUX DENSITY: The maximum flux density in any part of the core and yoke.10. 2. Physical inspection. especially the third and fifth. The normal flux density for cold rolled grain oriented steel laminations shall not exceed 1. Bill of landing Bill of entry certificate by custom Description of material. 3. at normal ratio and at normal voltage and frequency.12 CORE: The core shall be constructed from high grade cold rolled non-ageing grain oriented silicon steel laminations. thickness and width of the material. 5. Over fluxing should be limited to 12.2 The manufacturer will ensure that the noise level shall not be more than 5 decibels above he NEMA standard publication TR-1.9. inductive effect loop circulating currents between the neutral points at different transforming stations reaching such a magnitude as to cause interference with communication circuits. Therefore regarding quality control following documents are to be furnished before giving the inspection offer. 5. Only prime quality CRGO sheets should be used in the transformers and no Second/Defective/Scrap CRGO finds way into transformers.2 5. certificate for surface defects.1 The transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of harmonic voltages. For achieving this suppression of harmonics delta connected stabilizing winding should be avoided. M4 or Superior Grade. incase of transformers with variable flux the voltage variation which would affect flux density at every tap shall be kept in view while designing transformers. at normal tap position.The Power Transformers shall be suitable for installation at location where ambient temperature is as indicated below and temperature rise final not to exceed the limit prescribed below: 1. Section-5 : Technical Specification 9 . so as to eliminate wave form distortion and from any possibility of high frequency disturbances.9 5. electrical analysis. However.9. 5. The maximum noise level should be below 45db. Invoices of supplier Mill’s test certificate Packing list. 5.1 Every care shall be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of all transformers and auxiliary plant shall be such as to reduce noise and vibration to the level of that obtained in good modern practice.

3 Each lamination shall be insulated with a material that will not deteriorate due to pressure and the action of hot oil. treatment and handling of core steel to ensure that as practicable the laminations are flat and the finally assembled core is free from distortion. The winding structure and major insulation shall not obstruct the free flow of oil through such ducts. 5. Core clamping bolts shall be effectively insulated with craft paper and fibre glass tubes. 5.1 The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges.14. Any non-magnetic or high resistance alloy used shall be of established quality. 5.3 Adequate filaments shall be provided to enable the core and windings to be lifted.4 Oil ducts shall be provided where necessary to ensure adequate cooling.2 All structural members of the assembled cores shall be of steel.25mm thick tinned copper strip brazing pieces shall be inserted to maintain electrical continuity between pockets.14. where the magnetic circuit is divided into pockets by cooling ducts parallel to the plane of the laminations or by insulation material above 0.13.4 Suitable provision shall be made for the storage of any removable portions of the lifting tackle on the transformer tank.2 Every care shall be exercised in the selection. 5. 5.14.14. Section-5 : Technical Specification 10 . 5. Adequate core clamping arrangements shall be made to prevent distortion or wavy form of laminations and withstand short circuit forces. All castings shall be fitted and structural steel adequately cleaned and painted before being built into the structure.14.5 Adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of the core and winding relative to the tank during transport and installation or while in service. transport. 5.6 The class and type of insulation used on the core bolts and under the nuts and side plates shall be stated in the guaranteed technical particulars.13. heavy penalty will be imposed or the suppliers will be black listed. development of short circuit paths within itself of to the earthed clamping structure and the production of flux components at right angles to the planes of the laminations which may cause local heating.13. 5. It is to note that. using seconds/defective CRGO sheets or load losses found to be more than stipulated limit.5 The frame work and clamping arrangements shall be earthed.13.13 MAGNETIC CIRCUIT : 5. installation and service. 5.Subjecting to at least 10% of the transformers to routine tests and no load and load loss measurement.13.13. 5.1 All parts of the cores shall be of robust design capable of withstanding any shocks to which they may be subjected during lifting. 5.14 MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION OF CORE 5.

4 The windings shall be designed to reduce to a minimum the out-of-balance forces in the transformer at all voltage ratios.4 If the transformer winding is built up of section of disc coils.15.2 Coil clamping rings. mm 5.10The HV winding shall be arranged so as able to be removed without hindrance to and causing any damage to the LV winding. 5. if provided shall be of steel. 5. 5. 5.16.8 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness. ooze out.3 The transformer shall withstand the power frequency voltage test as per IS:2026.7 The coil clamping arrangement and the finished dimensions of any oil duct shall be such as will not impede the free circulation of oil through the ducts. the clamping arrangements shall be such that equal pressure are applied to all columns of spacers. The windings shall be so designed that all coil assemblies of identical voltage. 5. rating shall be inter changeable. 5.2 Power Transformer shall be designed to withstand the impulse test voltage as per IS 2026.16. 5.15. 5.6 The supporting frame work of the cores shall be so designed as to avoid the presence of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain valve or cause trapping or air during filling.15.15. The maximum allowable current density is 2.16 BRACING OF WINDING : 5. Section-5 : Technical Specification 11 .15. 5.15. 5.15.15 WINDINGS: 5.16. 5.3 Any metal pieces in contact with laminated rings shall be so designed and secured that they do not weaken the electrical or the mechanical properties of the rings. All neutral points shall be insulated for the voltage specified in IS 2026.1 All windings shall be made of electrolytic high conductivity copper. shall be fully insulated as defined in IS:2026.15.6 The stacks of windings shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before final assembly. shrink or collapse during service.5.5 The insulation of transformer windings and connection shall be free from insulating composition liable to soften.15. 5.15.5 sq.14. separated by spacers. 5.1 The windings and connections of all transformers shall be braced to withstand shocks which may occur during transport or due to switching and other transport condition during service.9 The conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals in order to minimise eddy currents and equalize the distribution of currents and temperature along the windings.16.

18 EARTHING OF MAGNETIC CIRCUIT: 5.2 EARTHING OF CORE CLAMPING STRUCTURE: The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a copper strip. The connection to the link shall be on the same side of the core as the main earth connection. Connections inserted between laminations may have the cross sectional area reduced to 0. rail or water without over straining any joint and without causing subsequent leakage of oil. shall be of suitable material and shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before assembly.4 and the magnetic circuit shall not be regarded as being of sectional construction.17.17 INTERNAL EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS 5. maintained by the weight of the core windings.1 INTERNAL EARTHING GENERAL: All metal parts of the transformer with the exception of the individual core laminations. 5.18. 5.19 EARTHING OF COIL CLAMPING RINGS: Where coil-clamping rings are of metal at earth potential. Section-5 : Technical Specification 12 . core bolts. transported by road.16.21.2 Magnetic circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with a separate link for each individual section where oil ducts or insulating barriers parallel to the plane of the laminations divide the magnetic circuit into two or more electrically separate parts the ducts or barriers shall be bridged in accordance with Clause 5. One or more of the following methods shall earth the bottom clamping structure.5 All such spacers shall be securely located.13. each ring shall be connected to the adjacent core clamping structure on the same side of transformer as the main earth connections.1 The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point only through a link placed in an accessible position beneath an inspection opening in the tank cover.1 Tank Construction: The tanks of all transformers shall be complete with all accessories and shall be designed so as to allow the complete transformer in the tank and filled with oil to be lifted by crane or jacks.2 Sq cm. 5.21 TANK : 5. 5.8 Sq cms.5.20 SIZE OF EARTHING CONNECTIONS: All earthing connections with exception of those from the individual coil clamping rings shall have cross sectional areas of not less than 0. 5. By a connection to the top structure on the same side of core as the main earth connection to the tank. 5. and associated individual clamping plates shall be maintained at some fixed potential. By connection through vertical tie-rods to the top structure By direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base. 5.18.17.

5.21.2 The main tank body excluding tap changing compartments, shall be capable of withstanding a full vacuum of 760 mm of mercury, when empty of oil. 5.21.3 The base of each tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to move the complete transformer unit by skidding in any direction without injury when using rollers, plates or rails. 5.21.4 Normally a detachable under base will be used, but in case transport facilities permit, a fixed under base can be used. 5.21.5 Where the base is of a channel with iron construction, it shall be designed to prevent retention of water. 5.21.6 The base channels for the transformers covered by this specification shall be 200x75/76 mm Transformers. 5.21.7 Tank stiffeners shall be continuously welded to the tank and designed to prevent retention. 5.21.8 Wherever possible the transformer tank and its accessories shall be designed without pockets wherein gas may collect. Where pockets cannot be avoided pipes shall be provided to vent the gas into the main expansion pipe. The vent pipes shall have minimum inside diameter of 15mm except for short branch pipes which may be 6mm minimum inside diameter. 5.21.9 All joints other than these which may have to be broken shall be welded. 5.21 LIFTING AND HAULAGE FACILITIES: Each tank shall be provided with: Lifting lugs suitable for lifting the transformer complete with oil. A minimum of four jacking lugs, in accessible positions to enable the transformers complete with oil to be raised or lowered using hydraulic or screw jacks. The maximum height of the lugs above the base shall be: Transformers upto and including 10 tonnes weight, 800 mm excluding the under base dimensions. Transformers above 10 tonnes weight, 500 mm excluding the under base dimensions. Suitable haulage holes shall be provided. 5.23 TANK COVER :

5.23.1 Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, and shall not distort when lifted. Inspection openings shall be provided as necessary to give easy access to bushings, for

Section-5 : Technical Specification

13

changing ratio or winding connections, or testing the earth connections at the link board. Each inspection opening shall be of suitable size for the purpose for which it is provided and atleast two openings one at each end of the tank shall be provided. 5.23.2 The tank cover and inspection covers shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangements. Unless otherwise approved inspection covers shall not weigh more than 25 kg each. 5.23.3 The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets for a thermometer and for the bulbs of the oil winding temperature indicators, protection shall be provided wherever necessary for each capillary tube. 5.23.4 The thermometer pocket shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent the ingress of water. 5.23.5 The pockets shall be located in the position of maximum oil temperature at CMR and it be possible to remove the instrument bulbs without lowering the oil in the tank (C.M.R Continuous Maximum Rating) 5.24 CONSERVATOR VESSELS, OIL GAUGES AND BREATHERS:

5.24.1 A conservator complete with sump and drain valve shall be provided in such a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the transformer having the capacity between highest and lowest visible levels to meet the requirement of expansion of the total cold oil volume in the transformer and the cooling equipment from the minimum ambient temperature to 90 Deg C the minimum indicated oil level shall be with the lead pipe from the main tank covered with not less than 15mm depth of oil and the indicated range of oil levels shall be from minimum to maximum. 5.24.2 If the sump is formed by extending the foot pipe inside the conservator vessel, this extension shall be for atleast 25mm. The conservator shall be designed so that it can be completely drained by means of the drain valve provided, when mounted as in service. 5.24.3 One end of the conservator shall be bolted into position so that it can be removed for cleaning purpose. -Normally one oil gauge magnetic / prismatic / plain type shall be provided. -The oil level is 10 Deg, 30 Deg and 98 Deg (Max.) shall be marked on the gauge. -Taps or Valves shall not be fitted to oil gauge. -The oil connection from the transformer tank to the conservator vessel shall be arranged at a rising angle of 3 to 9 Degrees to the horizontal upto the Buchholtz relay and shall consists of -For transformers from 1600 to 8000kVA–50mm inside dia. pipes as per IS: 3639. -A valve shall be provided at the conservator to cut off oil supply to the transformer after providing a straight run of pipe for atleast a length of five times the internal diameter of the pipe on the tank side of the gas and oil actuated relay and atleast three times the internal diameter of the pipe on the conservator side of the gas and oil actuated relay. 5.24.4 Each conservator vessel shall be fitted with a breather in which a silica gel is the dehydrating agent and designed so that: -The passage of air is through the silica gel. -The external atmosphere is not continually in contact with the silicagel through provision of an oil seal.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

14

-The moisture absorption indicated by a change in colour of the tinted crystals can be easily observed from distance. -All breathers shall be mounted at approximately 1400 mm above ground level. -The breather shall be poly breather with see-through container for silicagel and with metallic frames with suitable threading to fix the breather to the pipe of the transformer. Plastic frames are not acceptable. The samples of Breather are to be got approved by the AP EPDCL before supply. 5.25
FILTER DRAIN VALVES, SAMPLING DEVICES AND AIR RELEASE PLUG:

-Each transformer shall be fitted with the following: -One drain valve of minimum 50mm shall be provided -One 50 mm valve at the top and one 50 mm valve at the bottom of the tank mounted diagonally opposite to each other for filtration purpose. -A drain valve as specified below shall be fitted to each conservator. -For diameter up to 650 mm, size of the valve 15mm, for diameter above 650mm size of valve 25mm. -A robust oil-sampling device shall be provided at the top and bottom of the main tank. The sampling device shall not be fitted on the filter valve. -One 15 mm air release plug. -All other valves opening to atmosphere shall be fitted with blank flanges. 5.26 5.27 COOLER AND RADIATOR CONNECTIONS: Valves and valve mountings shall be provided as specified under cooling plant section 40. VALVES:

5.27.1 All valves shall be of gun metal or cast steel or may have cast iron bodies with gun metal fittings. They shall be of way type with internal screw and shall be opened by turning counter clock wise when facing the hand-wheel. The valves shall be of robust construction and it should be possible to operate the valves without application of much force. 5.27.2 Means shall be provided for pad locking the bottom valves in the open and close positions. This is required for the valves where opening device like hand-wheel, keys etc are the integral part. 5.27.3 Every valve shall be provided with an indicator to show clearly the position of the valves. All valves shall be provided with flanges having machined faces. The drilling of valve flanges shall comply with the requirements of IS: 3639. 5.28 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE:

5.28.1 The pressure relief device shall be provided of sufficient size for rapid release of pressure that may be generated within the tank, and which might result in damage to the equipment. The device shall operate at static pressure of less than the hydraulic test pressure for transformers tanks. Means shall be provided to prevent the ingress of rain. 5.28.2 Unless otherwise approved the relief device shall be mounted on the main tank, if on the cover, shall be fitted with skirt projecting 25mm inside the tank and of such a design to prevent gas accumulation. 5.28.3 Two diaphrams of suitable design and material shall be used one at the base and the other at the mouth of the vent pipe.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

15

5.28.4 An oil gauge is required on the stand pipe for indicating fracture of diaphragm. 5.28.5 One of the following methods shall be used for relieving or equalizing the pressures in the pressure relief devices. 5.28.6 An equalizer pipe connecting the pressure relief device to the conservator. 5.28.7 The fitting of silica gel breather to the pressure relief device breather being mounted in a suitable position for access at ground level. 5.29 EARTHING TERMINAL: Two earthing terminals capable of carrying for a second, full lower voltage short circuit current of the transformer shall be provided. Provisions shall be made at positions close to each of the bottom two corners of the tank for bolting the earthing terminals to the tank structure to suit local conditions. RATING AND DIAGRAM AND PROPERTY PLATES: The following plates shall be fixed to the transformer tank at an average height of about 1750 mm above ground level. A rating plate bearing the data specified in the appropriate clauses of IS : 2026. A diagram plate showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector relationship of the several windings in accordance with IS : 2026 and in addition a plain view of the transformer giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals. When links are provided in accordance with clause –5.2 (voltage ratio) for changing the transformer ratio, than approved means shall be provided for clearly indicating ratio for which the transformer is connected, no load voltage shall be indicated for each tap. A plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release corks or plugs. This plate shall also warn operators to refer to the maintenance instructions before applying the vacuum treatment for drying. The above plates shall be of material capable of withstanding continuous outdoor service. 5.31 JOINTS AND GASKETS:

5.30

All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of proven material such as granulated cork bonded with neoprene rubber unless otherwise specified, and samples shall be got approved by the Engineer. 5.32 COOLING PLANT: General: 5.32.1 Radiators and Coolers shall be so designed as to avoid pockets in which moisture may collect and shall withstand the pressure tests. 5.32.2 Unless the pipe work is shielded by adequate earth metal the clearance between all pipe work and live parts shall be more than the clearance for live parts to earth.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

16

25% for 5MVA/8MVA PTR. 5. Operation from local/ remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only. 5MVA/8MVA transformers voltage control equipment shall be of on load changing type on the HV side for HV variation of +5% to –15% in the equal steps of 1. 5.1 The equipment for local electrical and local manual operation shall be provided and shall comply with the following conditions.36 VOLTAGE CONTROL OFF LOAD: 5. VOLTAGE CONTROL (On load type): The OLTC shall confirm to IS: 8468 – 1977.36.33.34 5.25 mm. Removable blanking plates to permit the blanking off the main oil connection of each cooler.1 Radiators connected directly to the tank shall be detachable and shall be provided with machined or ground flanged inlet and outlet branches.5. 19mm drain plug shall be provided at the bottom and 19mm air release plug shall be provided at the top of each radiator for draining and filling. 5.33.33.3 Valves shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to the tank. A drain valve of 25mm at the lowest point of each bank of cooler. 5.2 The radiator fins shall be manufactured from a steel sheet with a thickness of not less than 1. Air release plug 15 mm All radiator groups shall be provided with belting /by 50x50x6mm MS angle. The oil circuits of oil coolers shall be provided with the following: A valve at each point of connection to the transformers tank. varying its effective transformation ratio while the transformers are on-load and without producing phase displacement. These valves shall have neoprene rubber gaskets 6mm thick on either side. Section-5 : Technical Specification 17 . a) b) It shall not be possible for any two electric controls to be in operation at the same time.33 RADIATORS MOUNTED DIRECTLY TO THE TANK/BANKED : 5. These two plugs shall have neoprene rubber gaskets only.35 OIL PIPING AND FLANGES: Drain valves / plugs shall be provided in order that each section of pipe work can be drained independently. It shall not be possible to operate the electric work drive when the manual operating gear is in use.

3 All relays and operated devices shall operate correctly at a voltage between the limits specified in the relevant Indian standards. all contractor relay coils or other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion or deterioration due to condensation. The equipment shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change has been commenced it shall be completed independently of the operation of the control relays or switches. 5.7 The oil in those compartments of the main tap changing apparatus which do not contain contacts used for making or breaking current shall be maintained under conservator head by means of pipe connection from the highest point of the chamber to the conservator.36. 5.36.36.36.36. The guide rods shall be so designed as to take support of the associated tank when in the fully lowered position. 5.2 Suitable apparatus shall be provided for each transformer to give indications as follows: A mechanical indication of the number of tapping position shall be provided to the OLTC gear of the transformer.8 It shall not be possible for the oil in those compartments of the tap change equipment which contain contacts used for making or breaking current to mix with the oil in the compartments containing contracts not used for making or breaking current. The local control switches shall be mounted in the marshalling box or driving gear housing. 5. If a failure of the auxiliary supply during tap changing or any other contingency would result in that movement not being completed adequate means shall be provided to safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary equipment.6 The location of OLTC tank as viewed from the 33 KV side shall be on left side of the transformer.4 The tap changing switches and mechanism shall be mounted in oil tanks or compartments mounted at an accessible position on the transformer tank.36. fungi etc.11The alternating supply for electrical operation of the control and indicating gear shall Section-5 : Technical Specification 18 . Lifting gear fitted to DROP DOWN tanks shall include suitable device to prevent run away during lifting and lowering operations.5 Any enclosed compartment not oil filled shall be adequately ventilated.10Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall be provided with a suitable direct reading oil guage. 5. This connection shall be controlled by suitable valve and shall be arranged so that any gas leaving the chamber will pass into the gas and oil actuated relay. A separate Bucholtz relay / oil surge relay shall be provided for the on load tap changer chamber.36.c) d) e) All electrical control switches and the local operating gear shall be clearly labeled in a suitable manner to indicate the direction of the tap changing. 5.36. 5. Metal clad heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism chamber and in the marshalling box.36. 5. 5. 5.9 Any DROP DOWN tanks with tap changing apparatus shall be fitted with guide rods to control the movement during lifting or lowering operations.36.

5. fuses etc.be standard 415 volts. three phase.The following shall constitute the routine tests a) Mechanical test b) Auxiliary circuits insulation tests c) Dielectric tests.17 A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism chamber.36. 5.16 A five digit counter shall be fitted to the tap changing mechanism to indicate the number of operations completed by the equipment. 5. 5. 5. including frequent operation.1 The following type and routine tests shall be carried out on on-load tap changer and motor drive mechanism in accordance with IS 8468-1977 or its latest version.36.36.2 MOTOR DRIVE MECHANISM Type Tests: The following shall constitute the type tests: Mechanical Tests Auxiliary circuits insulation test Section-5 : Technical Specification 19 ..37. The following shall constitute the type tests.15The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving satisfactory service without undue maintenance under the conditions to be met in service. 5. shall be mounted in the marshalling box or driving gear housing and shall be clearly marked for purposes of identification. 5. Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor provided that a mechanical declutching mechanism is incorporated. switches.12Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over running of the mechanism and except where modified in clause shall be directly connected in the circuit of the operating motor.37 ON LOAD TAP CHANGER 5. 50 Hz. 4 wire. All relays. Type Test:a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Type tests shall be performed on the samples of the relevant tap changers or components after their final development.36. 5.14The control circuits shall operate at 110 V single phase to be supplied from a transformer having a ratio of 240/55-0-55V with the centre point earthed through a removable link mounted in the marshalling box or tap changer drive.36. In addition a mechanical stop or other approved device shall be provided to prevent over running of the mechanism under any conditions. Mechanical test Auxiliary circuits insulation tests Test for temperature rise of contracts Switching tests Short circuit current tests Transition impedance tests Mechanical life test Dielectric test Routine Tests:.13Thermal devices or other means shall be provided to protect the motor and control circuits.36.37.

5.38.38.6 Any stress shield shall be considered as integral part of the bushing assembly.1 Transformers shall be fitted with bushing insulators. and such other mark as may be required to assist in the representative allocation of batches for the purposes of the samples tests.11The bushing turrets shall be provided with vent pipes which shall be connected to route any gas collection through the Bucholtz relay.38. and paper bushing shall have marked upon it the manufactures identification mark. INSULATORS AND TERMINALS: 5.8 Each porcelain bushing or insulator.38. 11 kV 33 kV Test Voltage impulse KV P 75 kV P 170 kV P Clearances Phase to phase Phase to earth mm mm 280 mm 205 mm 350 mm 320 mm Section-5 : Technical Specification 20 . assembly. The surface of all paper insulations shall be finished with non-hydro scopic varnish which cannot be damaged easily. transport and erection. 5.38. 5.3 TRANSFORMERS WITH REMOTE ON LOAD TAP CHANGER PROVISION: In the wiring diagram of local control switch provision shall be made for connecting a remote control panel suitable for remote operation.38. 5.9 Clamps and fittings made of steel or malleable iron shall be galvanised.10The bushing flanges shall not be of re-entrant shape which may trap air. Mechanical test Auxiliary circuit insulation test 5.38.38. Routine Tests: The following shall constitute the routine tests. 5.3 Bushing insulators for 33 KV shall be provided with arcing horns except for neutral bushings.38. 5.38 BUSHINGS. 5. 5.2 The electrical characteristics of bushings and bushing rods shall be in accordance with IS 3347 and IS 2099. if necessary in future for OLTC operation.38.5 The rod gap shall be adjustable type to enable a coordination of insulation level with surge diverters.37. All bolts threads shall be greased before erection.38. 5.Mechanical load test Over run test Protection of motor drive cubicles. 5.38.12The clearances in air between live conductive parts and live conductive part to earthed structures shall be as follows: Nominal system voltage KV rms.7 Special precautions shall be taken to exclude moisture from paper insulation during manufacture.4 Clamps with double nuts and spring washers shall be provided for the “Bushing Rods”. 5. 5.

5. Section-5 : Technical Specification 21 .39.5. 5. 5. 5. A suitable earth strip shall also be provided for each LA and it should be brought out separately to the ground insulation from the tank.13Necessary features on transformer tank for mounting LAS on both HV and LV sides shall be provided. 5. C and both shall reopen when the temperature has fallen by about 10 Deg.5 The design of the relay mounting arrangements. 5. C and 120 Deg.40 GAS AND OIL ACTUATED RELAYS: 5. nor shall it be tied into or connected through a pressure relief vent.25mts above ground level.40.39 TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICES AND ALARM: 5. 5.40. the associated pipe work and the cooling plant shall be such that mal operation of the relays shall not take place under normal service conditions. 5. where it shall be terminated by a cock.39. 5.2 Each gas and oil actuated relay shall be provided with a test cock and a flexible pipe connection for checking the operation of the relay. the temperature indicators shall be housed in the marshalling box.3 Where specified to allow gas to be collected at ground level a pipe approximately 5mm inside diameter shall be connected to the gas release cock of the gas and oil actuated relay and brought down to a point approximately 1. 5.40.6 The pipe work shall be so arranged that oil and gas arising from the transformer shall pass into oil actuated relays. They should be detachable type and not to be welded.39. These samples of temperature indicator shall be got approved before supply. C. 5.39.6 Connections shall be brought from the device to terminals placed inside the marshalling box.5 The temperature indicators shall be so designed that it shall be possible to check the operation of the contacts and associated equipment. Winding temperature indicators are to be provided for 3.40. 5.4 A machined surface shall be provided on the top of each relay to facilitate the setting of the relays and to check the mounting angle in the pipe and the cross level of the relay.40.38. C and alarm contacts to close between 50 Deg.15 MVA and above transformers.40.3 The tripping contacts of winding temperature indicators shall be adjustable to close between 60 Deg.39.7 When a transformer is provided with two conservators the gas and oil actuated relays shall be arranged as follows.1 Transformer shall be provided with Temperature indications for measuring Transformer oil temperature and Transformer winding temperature.40.4 All contacts shall be adjustable on a scale and shall be accessible on removal of the cover. sharp bends in the pipe work shall be avoided. C and 100 Deg.39.1 Each transformer shall be fitted with gas and oil actuated relay [Buchholtz Relay] equipment having contacts which close following oil surge or low oil level conditions. 5. The oil circuit through the relay shall not form delivery path in parallel with any circulation oil pipe.2 Except where outdoor types of indicators are supplied.

40.8 If the two conservators are connected to the transformer by common oil pipe one relay shall be installed in the common pipe. with ventilated and weather proof marshaling box (as per IP55) of a suitable construction shall be provided for the transformer ancillary apparatus.41.1 The sheet steel vermin proof. TERMINAL BOARDS & FUSES 5.5. 5. 5.4 The temperature indicators shall be so mounted that the dials are not more than 1600 mm ground level and the door(s) to adequate size.10Adequate clearances between all pipe work and live metal shall be provided.41. Ventilation levels shall be provided. 5. shall accommodate the following equipments.40. 5. one in each pipe connection. Section-5 : Technical Specification 22 . Any wiring liable to be in contact with oil shall have oil resisting insulation and the bared ends of stranded wire shall be sweated together to prevent creepage of oil along the wire. if the same cannot be accommodated in the motor driving gear housing and Terminal board and gland plates for incoming and out going cables.2 There shall be no possibility of oil entering.2 The marshalling box. 5.41.42. 5. The box shall have sloping roof and the interior and exterior painting shall be in accordance with relevant clause of cleaning and painting. 5.7 Undrilled gland plate shall be provided for accommodating glands for incoming and outgoing cables.41 MARSHALLING BOX: 5. The gland plate and associated compartment shall be sealed in suitable manner to prevent the ingress of moisture form the cable trench.40. wherever provided.1 All wiring connections.6 All incoming cables shall enter the kiosk form the bottom and gland plate shall be not less than 450mm from the base of box.8 If the two conservators are piped separately to the transformer two relays shall be installed.41. Alternative weather proof instruments can be mounted out door.41.5 To prevent internal condensation an approved type of metal clad heater shall be provided controlled by suitable switch. 5.41. Temperature indicators Control and protection equipment for the local electrical control of tap changer. connection boxes used for cables or wiring. 5. 5. terminal boards. 5.41.42 CONTROL CONNECTIONS AND INSTRUMENT WIRING.3 All the above equipments except (c) shall be mounted on panels and back of panel wiring shall be used for inter connection. fuses and links shall be suitable for tropical atmosphere.42.

10Ferrules shall be of white insulating material shall be provided with glassy finish to prevent the addition of dirt. 5. and lowest parts of the run shall be external to the boxes.4 Where conduits are used.14Where apparatus is mounted on panels all metal cases shall be separately earthed by means of copper wire or strip having a cross section of not less than 2 sq. Where strip is used.5 When 415 volts connections are taken through junction boxes or marshalling boxes they shall be adequately screened and 415 ‘VOLTS DANGER’ notices must be affixed to the outside of the junction boxes or marshaling boxes. 5.42. All wiring shall be of a stranded copper of 660 V grade and size not less than 4.5. the joints shall be sweated.9 The same ferrule number shall not be used on wires in different circuits on the same panels. They shall be clearly and durably marked in block and shall not be affected by damp or oil. 5.42. The change of numbering shall be shown on the appropriate diagram of the equipment. Wiring shall in general be accommodated in the sides of the box and the wires for each circuit shall be separately grouped. 5. which bear the same number at both ends. 5.42. where a change of number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire. 5. 5. The size of the washers shall be suited to the size of the wire terminated.7 All wires of panels and all multi core cables shall have ferrules. All wiring to a panel shall be taken from suitable terminal boards. mm.42.42.42.13Wherever practicable circuits in which the voltage exceeds 125 volts.42. All instruments and panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non rusting metal cleats of the limits compression type.11Stranded wires shall be terminated with crimped tubular lugs. 5.3 Panel connections shall be neatly and squarely fixed to the panel.8 At these ends of inter connection between the wiring carried out by separate contractors. 5.5 sq mm for other connections.42. 5. All conduits runs shall be adequately drained and ventilated. The function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal boards. shall be kept physically separated from the remaining wiring. Section-5 : Technical Specification 23 . Back of the panel wiring shall be arranged so that access to the connecting stems of relays and other apparatus is not impeded.12Wires shall not be jointed or tied between terminal points 5.42.00 sq mm for CT leads and not less than 2. Conduits shall not be run at or below ground level.42. Separate washers shall be used for each wire.42.42. the runs shall be laid with suitable falls.6 All box wiring shall be in accordance with relevant IS.

All diagrams shall show which view is employed. while allowing easy access to terminals.21Terminal board shall have pairs of terminals for incoming and outgoing wires. 5. Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent connections. acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture. 5. the height of the barriers and the spacing between terminals such as to give adequate protection.18All terminal boards shall be mounted towards the rear doors to give easy access to obliquely and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without difficulty.17The screens of screen pairs of multi core cables shall be earthed at one end of the cable only.5.42.16Multi core cable tails shall be so bound that each wire may be traced without difficulty to its cables.2 TESTS: TYPE TESTS: The type. shall be carried out on the transformer as per the provisions of IS 2026. 5. 5. whichever is more stringent for that particular test.22 No live metal shall be exposed at the back of the terminal boards. Test certificate of not more than three years old.3 Note: 6. from a recognized national laboratory with NABL accreditation shall be furnished. 5.42. a) Impulse voltage withstand test.0 6.4 Type test as listed below shall be performed on the transformer as specified in IS:2026. 6.24 Fuses and links shall be labeled.1 6.1. The bidder shall furnish two sets of type test reports as per relevant standards along with the bid. the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by the supplier in the proforma for “Guaranteed Technical Particulars” furnished in this specification or acceptance value specified in this specification. 5.1 6.42.19Terminal boards rows should be spaced adequately not less than 100 mm apart to permit convenient access to wires and terminations.20Terminal boards shall be so placed with respect to the cable gland (at the minimum distance of 200 mm) as to permit satisfactory arrangements of multi core cable tails.15All wiring diagram for control and relay panel shall preferably be drawn as viewed from the back and shall show the terminals boards arranged as in service. BIDS WITHOUT THE FOLLOWING TYPE TEST REPORTS WILL BE TREATED AS NON-RESPONSIVE.42.1.1. The terminals shall be adequately protected with insulating dust proof covers.42.1. Section-5 : Technical Specification 24 . 5.42. 6.23 All fuses shall be of the cartridge type and shall conform to relevant IS 5. The position of earthing connections shall be shown clearly on the diagrams.42.42.42.42. 5. For all type and acceptance tests.

at site.2 Section-5 : Technical Specification 25 . For any change in the design/type already tested and design/type offered against this specification.2 Induced over voltage withstand test. frame and tank connected together and to earth shall be measured by standard megger and the values shall not be less than the values indicated below. or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type. e) Measurement of no load and no load current. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the bought out items to pass tests.1. 6.2 6.Ohms 400 M Ohms At 40 Deg C 250 M.2. tested unit will not be accepted for supply to the AP EPDCL. ADDITIONAL TESTS: SPECIAL TEST: Special tests as specified in IEC 60 076 – 1993 in clause 10.Ohms 200 M Ohms At 50 Deg C 125 M. f) Measurement of insulation resistance.3.b) c) d) 6.2. core. The insulation resistance of each winding in turn to all the other windings.6 6. general arrangement drawings.Ohms 100 M Ohms At 60 Deg C 65 M. The short circuit withstand test report must accompany the active part. Resistances 33 kV to earth 11 kV to earth g) h) At 30oC 500 M. The purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidders premises. polarity and phase relationship c) Measurement of impedance voltage d) Measurement of load loss. The separate source voltage withstand test.3 shall also be undertaken with an agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.1 All acceptance and routine tests stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by the supplier in presence of purchaser’s representative. acceptance and routine tests.1.5 Dielectric type tests. The S. Tests during manufacture: The Bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the equipment to be supplied.1. the AP EPDCL reserves the right to demand repetition of the tests without any extra cost.3. to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.C.3 6. ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS : a) Measurement of winding resistance b) Measurement of ratio.Ohms 50 M Ohms 6. duly inspected and certified by testing agency. 6. The type test reports including short circuit withstand test report and impulse test report must accompany the offer. Temperature rise test. The expenses to be incurred towards the tests shall be to their account.1 6. Short circuit.

6.5.5 6. This pressure shall be maintained for a period of not less than 12 hours for oil and 1 hour for air. TESTS REPORTS ON THE ANALYSIS OF RAW MATERIALS : The tender shall indicate the source of raw material and enclose test certificates and report on the analysis of electrolytic copper used for the winding and the steel used for the core. NOTE : The Meters used for conducting tests shall be calibrated periodically at reputed Government Accredited Test Laboratories and test certificates shall be available at works for verification by purchasers representative.1 TEST FACILITIES: The tests shall be carried out as per relevant Standards and test certificates shall be furnished for approval. Manufacture shall submit the calculations to confirm the thermal ability as per clause No.in) measured at the base of the tank. 335 at an ambient temperature and subjected to a pressure equal to the normal pressure plus 35 KN/m2(5lb/sq.6.4 6. 9. Test certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the Bidder.3. electrical steel laminations constructional steel etc. insulating oil. conductor. No delivery extension shall be given for this additional testing. He shall indicate the name of the supplier and make of meters.5. Tests as per applicable standards should be carried out in respect of porcelain bushings. The Bidder shall indicate the details of the equipment available with him for carrying out the various tests as per relevant Standards. The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price. relays and meters. insulation materials as also bought out items from sub-suppliers. The bidder shall indicate the sources of all materials.4 6.4 6. TANKS Routine tests: Oil leakage test : All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness by being completely filled with air/oil of a viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil as per IS. relays.5.3 6.7 a) b) Section-5 : Technical Specification 26 . These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the purchaser. galvanization.2 6.5. Type Tests: 6.3.6 6. during which time no leakage shall occur. without any extra cost to the purchaser.3 In case of failure in any type test.1 of IS-2026 part –I of 1977. the supplier is required to modify the design of the material and the material shall be type tested again for the modified design. TEST REPORTS / TEST CERTIFICATES: Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic inspection by the purchaser’s representative.

at all times. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested. unless the inspection is waived off. testing and operation & maintenance in batches. raw materials and process of manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.in) whichever is lower measured at the base of the tank and will be maintained for one hour.5 1251 to 1750 8 1751 to 2000 9. You shall provide necessary facilities during training period specified by AP EPDCL Manufacturer authorized representative shall be present at the time of commissioning of Power Transformer. assembly. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the excess pressure has been released shall not exceed the figure specified above. The Bidder shall keep the purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the progress of manufacture of the offered equipment in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for inspection. conservator vessel and other fitting shall be subjected to a pressure corresponding to twice the normal head of oil or to the normal pressure plus 35 KN/m2 (5 lb/sq.1 7. be entitled to have access to the works and at all places of manufacture where equipment offered shall be manufactured and the representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the bidder’s works. manufacture.2 7.33 KN/m2 ( 25 mm of Hg) for one hour. Horizontal length of flat plate (in mm) Permanent deflection (in mm) Upto and including 750 5 751 to 1250 6. by the employer in writing.5 2501 to 3000 16 Above 3000 19 Pressure Test: One transformer tank of each size together with its radiators. INSPECTION: The purchaser’s representative shall. Training of DISCOM PERSONNEL: AP EPDCL reserves the right to depute AP EPDCL’s personnel for training at your works relating to design.i) Vacuum Test: One transformer tank of each size shall be subjected to the specified vacuum shall be tested at an internal pressure of 3.9 7. ii) 6.4 Section-5 : Technical Specification 27 .3 7.8 6. The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released shall not exceed the value specified below without affecting the performance of the transformer.0 7.5 2001 to 2250 11 1151 to 2500 12. The supplier shall give 15days advance intimation to enable the employer to depute his representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests.

04 N/m 140 deg. The bidder shall indicate the name(s) of reputed inspection agencies and the inspection charges clearly for each lot. 12.) Pour Point (Max. 4.) At 27 deg. as per ASTM D-1934-1978 Specific resistance(Resistivity) Particulars as per ISS:335/93 The oil shall be clear & transparent & free from suspended matter or sediments. ANNEXURE – I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR OILS 7.) Neutralization value : Total acidity (Max.) Inorganic acidity / alkalinity Corrosive sulphur Electric strength (break down voltage) (Min. 13.) Specific resistance (Resistivity) At 90 deg. 11.5 The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification. 2. Section-5 : Technical Specification 28 .) New un-filtered oil After filtration Dielectric dissipation factor (Tan Delta at 90 deg. if it feels necessary.6 7. 6.7. Pensky-Marten (Closed) (Min. No. C (Max.40 mg KOH/g 0. after oxidation (Max.8 Sl. The APEPDCL reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance routine testing of the bought out items. 3. C -6 deg. If a 2nd time inspection becomes necessary the inspection charges shall be borne by you. 0. 8.) Flash point. APEPDCL may its option get the materials inspected stage wise by the 3rd party on each unit/units offered for inspection along with a APEPDCL’s representative.) Kinematics viscosity at 27 deg.) Oxidation stability Neutralisation value after oxidation (Max.) Total sludge.7 7. C (Max.002 35 x 1012 ohms – cm 1500 x 1012ohms – cm 0.) Agening characteristics after accelerating ageing (Open Breaker Method with copper catalyst) for 96 Hrs. However the employer reserves the right to appoint at its cost any inspection agency to carry out the inspection. 7. The inspection charges will be borne by the purchaser.89 g/cm3 27 CST 0. 5. and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.5 deg. C) (max.) Interfacial tension at 27 deg. C (Max. C 0.10% by Wt. 1. Characteristics Appearance Density at 29. C (Min. 9.03 NIL Non – corrosive 30 kV (rms) 60 kV (rms) 0. 10. C (Min.

20 x 1012 0hms – cm 0. Connections. C (Max. Description AS per section –IV Schedule of Materials Item – I Item . SCHEDULE OF DETAILED PRICES OF TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS FOR 33/11KV 5MVA/8MVA DELTA/STAR POWER TRANSFORMERS Sl No. Name of the Manufacturer 2. C (Min.05 NIL 50 ppm 14.) ANNEXURE – I-A Particulars as per ISS:335/93 2. STANDARD FORM OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: 1. C (Min. No. C Temperature rise by resistance/ winding of deg. 15.Rated KVA Rated Voltage of HV/LV KV Temperature rise in oil deg.5 x 1012 ohms – cm 0. Service 3.) Total sludge value (Max.) Presence of oxidation inhibitor Water content (Max.) Dielectric dissipation factor Tan Delta at 90 deg. Gross Weight Kgs. Number of Phases 5.) ii)At 90 deg. C Rated frequency : c/s 4. Characteristics i)At 27 deg.Sl. Delivery to destination Stores in weeks Remarks ANNEXURE – I-B GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS TO BE FURNISHED BY THE MANUFACTURER I. Ratings : .High Voltage Section-5 : Technical Specification 29 .20 0.II Qty Nos.) Total acidity (Max.05 0. FADS Price Rs.

Maximum efficiency 5. 16. 10.8 Power factor lagging % No load current at rated voltage and frequency Approximate weights : KG Core KG Windings KG Core with frame KG Tank and fittings KG Oil(Excluding OLTCG Oil) KG Total weight KG Approximate quantity of oil Ltrs. 7. 19. 13. 14. . 9. Load at which maximum efficiency occur (full load) % 4.C at unity power Factor At full load % At ¾ full load % At ½ full load % Regulation at full load at 75 deg. Impulse levels with 1/50 ms wave High voltage kV Low voltage kV Section-5 : Technical Specification 30 . 15.High Voltage % Low Voltage % No load loss at rated voltage kW Load loss at rated current at 75 deg.High Voltage Low Voltage Reference standard Remarks II ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: 1. flux density at rated Vol. 12.Vector group of reference Tappings. 17. Efficiencies at 75 deg. Approximate Max.Low Voltage . At 75 deg.C at 0.C Reactance at rated current and frequency % Efficiencies at 75 deg.6. (including OLTC – OIL) Approximate overall dimensions.Length mm Breadth mm Height mm Terminal arrangements .8 Power Factor lagging At full load % At ¾ full load % At ½ full load % 3. 8. 18. & Frequency CGS Lines/cm2 2.C(kW) %Impedance at rated current and freq. 11.C At unity power factor % At 0.

10. 8. Discharge voltage kV Section-5 : Technical Specification 31 .6. 7.Parts detached for transport Approximate weight of heaviest package (Kg) Approximate dimensions of largest package Length (mm) Breadth (mm) Height (mm) DETAILS OF AUXILIARY WINDINGS: Rating Rated KVA Rated voltage kV Connections Tappings Impedance at 75 deg/C/rated current at With respect to high voltage % With respect to low voltage % III 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IV 1. Visible power freq. 3. a) b) No load loss at 110% rated voltage and rated frequency kW No load current at 110% rated voltage and rated frequency A Type of windings High voltage Low voltage Insulation materials Turn insulation high voltage Turn insulation low voltage Insulation core to low voltage Insulation high voltage to low voltage Clearances Minimum clearance between phases In oil mm Out of oil mm Minimum clearance high voltage to(mm) Earth in oil Minimum clearance high voltage to tank(mm) in oil Details of tank: Length x Breadth x Height mm Approximate thickness of sides mm Approximate thickness of top mm Approximate thickness of bottom mm Approximate thickness of tube mm Radiators Minimum clearance height for lifting core and windings from tank (mm) Shipping details . Type 2. V DETAILS OF BUSHINGS: 1. 2. Momentary Power Freq. dry withstand voltage kV 3. 4. 9.

Make 2. Protective devices 10. overall dimensions (mm) 12. Voltage control 7. -Schematic control and wiring diagram for all auxiliary equipment. Type 3. voltage kV One minute wet withstand power freq. -Assembly drawings and weights of main component parts -Tap changing and rare plate diagrams. cooling pipe etc. overall quantity of oil (Ltrs) DOCUMENTATION : All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organisation (ISO) `A’ series of drawings sheet/India Standards Specifications IS:656. winding details shall be furnished along with the tender as under. Outline dimensional drawings of transformer and accessories including LA mounting arrangement the tank with necessary clearances between the tank and HV/LV side LA’s as per IS 2026.0 10. Approx. Approx. longitudinal and cross sectional views showing the duct sizes. steps 4. Control 5. Section-5 : Technical Specification 32 .Units. 7. -Schematic diagram showing the flow of oil in the cooling system as well as each limb and winding. 10. overall weight Kg 11. 8. Approx. for transformer/ heat exchanger drawn to scale shall be furnished.4. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro filming. All dimensions and data shall be in S. Parallel operation 9. Auxiliary supply details 6. Line drop compensation 8. Rating MVA Rated voltage kV Rated current A Step voltage V No. 9. 10. voltage kV Full wave withstand impulse voltage kV Under oil flashover or puncture withstand voltage kV Creepage distance in air (mm) Recommended gap setting (mm) Weight of assembled bushing (Kg) DETAILS OF ON LOAD TAP CHANGING GEAR: 1. VI One minute dry withstand power freq.I. 6. 5.2 LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS: Four sets of complete dimensioned drawings showing the general arrangements. fitting details clearance.

2. heat exchanger. The successful Bidder shall.4 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. maintenance and erection manuals and approved drawings in English language shall be supplied along with each circuit breaker. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbol. in his judgment is not in full accordance therewith.0 PACKING & FORWARDING: The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case may be. The supplier shall within two weeks. within 2 weeks of placement of order. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within four weeks.2. Wherever necessary. such as lifting hooks etc. rules and codes of practices. proper arrangement for lifting. 11. if necessary. shall accompany the dispatch consignment. winding bushing. shall be provided.. shall be submitted by the supplier for distribution before commencement of supply. 10. 10.5 Two set of nicely printed bound volumes of operation.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied with a detailed packing list containing the following information. in addition to the five sets to be sent directly to the purchaser.2. 11.-Large scale drawing of high and low tension winding of the transformer showing the nature and arrangement of insulation and terminal connections. duly approved by the purchaser. 10. modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for their approval. design. Section-5 : Technical Specification 33 . The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit. submit three sets of final versions of all the above said drawings for purchaser’s approval. 10. submit 23 prints and two good quality report copies of the approved drawings for purchaser’s use. The supplier shall. Details of consignment. tap changing gear etc.2. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier’s risk. and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering.3 Six sets of the type test reports. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test certificates.. duly approved by the purchaser. Supplier without any extra cost shall supply any material found short inside the packing cases immediately.6 Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of application standards. workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have to power to reject any work or materials which. -Six copies of instruction books erection manual and operation and maintenance manuals and spare part bulletins for each consignee.2 Descriptive literature and data on transformer construction. 10.2. due to improper and inadequate packing. a) b) Name of the consignee.

Rating and diagram plate and flow chart Oil temperature indicator (dial type with one contact for alarm) Marshaling box Section-5 : Technical Specification 34 . If the centre of gravity is eccentric relating to the track either with or without oil. 60° C and 90° C marking.) Thermometer pockets (2 Nos.4 CENTRE OF GRAVITY: The centre of gravity of the assembled transformers shall be low and as near to the vertical central line as possible. Air release plug Two numbers of earthing terminals with lugs On load tap changing gear with Buchholtz relay / oil surge relay. 12.0 14. he should ensure the packing is such that. Drain valve. .0 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS: The quantity and delivery requirement are indicated in Section -IV 13. Bill of Material indicating contents of each package. The supplier shall ensure that the purchaser before dispatch approves the packing list and bill of material. However.c) d) e) f) 11. Jacking pads Inspection covers (2 Nos.1 MANDATORY SPARES & TOOLS: NECESSORY ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS: Oil conservator with filling hole and gap and drain in cock.3 Destination. The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant standards and shall also contain “APEPDCL –JBIC-II”. filter valve Buchholtz relay (double float) Radiators with valves (size LxBxH) Qty (Nos. The transformer shall be stable with or without oil. its location shall be shown on the outline drawing. 11.0 SUPERVISION SERVICES: The bidder will arrange for unloading of the consignments.) Lifting lugs with fastening holes Four Nos. 14. The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice. Silica gel breather. Oil level guage with 10° C. Total weight of consignment Handling and packing instructions. Rail/Road should not damage the material during transit. 30° C.) Winding temperature indicator with two contacts) Pressure relief device.

free of cost at the ultimate destination. rectification and re-commissioning at site.2 OPTIONAL SPARES:. 14. The contractor shall take over the replaced parts/materials/ equipment at the time of their replacement.1 The general terms and conditions the warranty clause applicable to Power Transformers of this specification is as follows. The period of warranty will be 5 years (five years) from the date of commissioning of PTR. iii) LT bushing. EPDCL reserves the right to claim the financial loss incurred / suffered due to the failure of Power Transformers during the guarantee period.The tender shall quote separately for the following spares. No claim whatsoever shall lie on APEPDCL for the replaced parts/materials/ equipment thereafter.3 15. For Power Transformers: If the PTR failed within the guarantee period. The employer will decide on the actual spares to be ordered on the basis of the list and item prices of spares.0 MVA Necessary features on transformer tank for mounting LAs on both HV & LV shall be provided and they shall be detachable type and not to be welded. Bottom mounting channel (min. ii) HT bushing. i) Set of coils for one limb of the winding. the bidder shall arrange for rectification/replacement within 60days from the date of intimation of the defects.0 WARRANTY: 15.2 15. for HV and 1” dia. size of channel shall be 200x75/76mm for 5. the warranty for the corrected/ replaced material will be extended to a further period of 12 months.HT & LT bushings. iv) Neutral bushing. In the event of 15. The tender shall also quote for any item of spares recommended for 5 years normal operation. For equipments other than Power Transformers: If the bidder shall arrange for rectification/ replacement within 30 days from the date of intimation of the defects. v) One set of gaskets vi) One set of thermometers vii) One oil gauge. The contractor shall take over the replaced parts/materials/ equipment at the time of their replacement. free of cost at the ultimate destination. Explosion vent with diaphragm Valve in equalising pipe Pulling eyes – 8 Nos. Detailed prices of tools and spare parts shall be indicated as per Annexure – I-A 14. No claim whatsoever shall lie on APEPDCL for the replaced parts/materials/ equipment thereafter. Sampling devices (bottom and top) Note: Any other fittings that are necessary for the satisfactory operation of the transformers shall be provided without any extra cost. The bushing rods for all capacities should be of ¾” dia. In the event of any correction of defects or replacement of defective material during the warranty period. for LV or M20 copper size for all capacities Necessary oil for first filling. These bushings shall be provided with bimetallic clamps suitable for panther ACSR Conductor. starting from transporting the PTR from the Site.3 Section-5 : Technical Specification 35 .

TECHNICAL DEVIATIONS: Any deviation in Technical Specification as indicated in Section-V shall be specifically and clearly indicated in the enclosed schedule of deviation format as per Annexure – II. Description of material 3-phase. Delta/Star. 15. who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which. The schedule of quantity and prices shall be indicated as per Price Schedule. The prices of 5MVA/8MVA Power Transformers with OLTC are FIRM. 16. 50Hz Vacuum Circuit Breakers with Current Transformers and Control & Relay Panel and 33kV. Dyn11. assembly. 50 Hz Vacuum Circuit Breakers with Current Transformers and Control & Relay Panel. in a manner acceptable to the purchaser. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering.25% with accessories and with required oil conforming to ISS – 335/83 with latest amendment effective from 1st July 1987. design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder's guarantee. fails to remedy the defects(s) within the above period. 33/11 kV. Schedule of detailed prices of tools and spare parts shall be indicated as per section-V. 3 Pole. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: The Bidder shall furnish the guaranteed Technical Particulars as per Annexure – I-B enclosed and submit the same with the Tender.1 Section-5 : Technical Specification 36 .4 If the bidder. core type. stage testing. oil immersed. in his judgment is not in accordance there with.0 17. at the contractor’s risk and expense duly deducting the expenditure from the subsequent bills/bank guarantee and without prejudice to any other rights which EPDCL may have against the bidder under the contract. inspection and testing before supply and delivery at site of the 11KV. 50 cycles. 5000KVA/8000KVA. Metal oxide lighting arresters (Dis-connector type). 1.0 SCOPE: This specification covers the manufacture.0 SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS Sl. 3Pole. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11KV & 33KV VCB’S WITH CT’S & CR PANEL 1. having been notified. Annexure I-A. No. the warranty for the corrected/ replaced material will be extended to a further period of 12 months. EPDCL may proceed to take such remedial action as may be necessary. outdoor power transformer (double wound with insulated copper wire conductor) conforming to latest IS-2026/77 (WITH AMENDMENTS IF ANY) with ON LOAD TAP CHANGING GEAR on HV side for HV variation of +5% to –15% in 16 equal steps of 1. It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of equipment. naturally self cooled. The offered equipment shall be complete 1.any correction of defects or replacement of defective material during the warranty period.

shall be furnished along with the offer. components shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order or not.2 International & Internationally recognized standard General requirements for Circuit breakers for IEC voltage above 1000V. At various locations in the state of Andhra Pradesh 50 7. In case of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS (ii) IEC (iii) Other standards. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Average Annual rainfall (mm). i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) Location Max. salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. Methods of testing uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles. Relative Humidity (%) Max. the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail. Sl. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations.1 STANDARDS: The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications/ IEC Standards.0 2. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the other standards. 62271-100-1/2001 Current Transformers Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000V.C) Average daily ambient air temperature (deg.with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. 2.C) Max. Electrical relays for power system protection Specification for Ammeters & Voltmeters IEC 71 New insulating oils Electrical Clearances (For oils in CTs) Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage switchgear & control gear Title CONFLICT OF STANDARDS: Equipment conforming to other internationally accepted standards. 3.C) Min. ambient air temperature (deg. ambient air temperature (deg.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The Vacuum Circuit Breakers to be supplied against this Specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions. In case of any difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification. Indian Standard ISS-13118/1991 ISS-2705/1992 ISS-2099/1986 ISS-2633/1964 ISS-3231/1986 ISS-1248/1983 ISS-335/1983 ISS-2147/1962 2.5 35 100 1000 925 Section-5 : Technical Specification 37 . No. Such. which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above would also be acceptable. with latest amendments indicated below.

wind pressure(kg/sq.3 g. The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate. Provision shall be made for slow closing of VCB without spring charging.-CO. 4.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS: 11KV Out door Vacuum Porcelain clad (Outdoor) Three 11/12kV 50 Hz Neutral solidly grounded 75 KVp 28 kV(rms) 2 kV(rms) 630 A 20 kA 20 kA 2. Aluminium suitable for PANTHER conductor The limits of temperature rise shall be in accordance with relevant standard (IEC 62271) The maximum difference between instants of contact touching during closing and the maximum difference between the instant of contacts separation during opening between 3 poles shall not exceed one half cycle of the rated frequency. Motor operated/Manual spring charged. conducive to rust and fungus growth.m.) Rated frequency System of earthing Impulse withstand Voltage Power frequency withstand voltage for 1min Power frequency withstand voltage on Auxiliary circuit: Rated Current Rated breaking Capacity Symmetrical Rated short time withstand current for 3 sec Rating making capacity Total break time Bushing Insulator creepage distance Mounting Operating duty for gang operation. The standard DC voltage for the operating devices shall be 24V DC.vii) viii) ix) Max. CIRCUIT BERAKERS : Service Type No. Operating Mechanism Terminal connector Material (for outdoor) Limits of temperature rise Requirement of simultaneity of poles Section-5 : Technical Specification 38 .55 times Rated breaking Current 5 Cycles(max) Not less than 300mm Steel Structure O-0. of Poles/Phases Rated Voltage (Nominal/Max.3sec. Normally the breaker shall be operated by power and there shall be provision for manual operation.) 200 50 0.) Isoceraunic level (days per year) Seismic level (Horizontal accn.1 A. Operation Voltage for motor spring charging mechanism shall be 240 V AC single phase.-CO-3min. The breaker shall open and close 4.

CIRCUIT BERAKERS: 33 KV Service Type No.1 B. control panel should be provided All angles 65 mm X 65 mm X 6 mm minimum size for breaker structure should be provided Bell is operated 24 V DC 4.5775A Pad locking for both mechanism box. Provision shall be made for slow closing of VCB without spring charging. setting 5% having CTs of ratio 400-200-100 / 1-1A.) Rated frequency System of earthing Impulse withstand Voltage Power frequency withstand voltage for 1min Power frequency withstand voltage on Auxiliary circuit: Rated Current Rated breaking Capacity Symmetrical Rated short time withstand current for 3 sec Rating making capacity Total break time Bushing Insulator creepage distance Mounting Operating duty for gang operation. 24V DC auxiliary relays are to be provided for power transformer protection with 2NO + 2NC contacts & Hand reset type. of Poles/Phases Rated Voltage (Nominal/Max. Section-5 : Technical Specification 39 . iii) Three phase high speed harmonic restraint biased (percentage) differential relay for differential protection of Power Transformers (8MVA and above) for LV control VCBs having CTs of ratio 600-300/1-1-0.55 times Rated breaking Current 5 Cycles(max) Not less than 900mm Steel Structure O-0.Protection simultaneously on all the three phases for fault on any phase and or on all the phases i) The Breakers shall be provided with 3 Over current (3O/L) and one Earth fault (1 E/L) IDMT relay with min. ii) The Breakers shall be provided with 3 Over current (3O/L) and one Earth fault (1 E/L) IDMT relays. Motor operated/Manual spring charged.-CO. Operation Voltage for motor spring charging mechanism shall be 240 V AC single phase. The standard DC voltage for the operating devices shall be 24V DC.-CO-3 min. Operating Mechanism Out door Vacuum Porcelain clad (Outdoor) Three 33/36Kv 50 Hz Neutral solidly grounded 170 KVp 75kV(rms) 2 kV(rms) 1250 A 25 kA 25 kA 2. Normally the breaker shall be operated by power and there shall be provision for manual operation.3 sec. 2 Nos.

2Nos.3 Voltage +10% to -15% : Frequency +/-5% +10% to -20%. 240V single phase-4 wire 50c/s.Terminal connector Material (for outdoor) Limits of temperature rise Requirement of simultaneity of poles Aluminium suitable for 420 Sqmm conductor The limits of temperature rise shall be in accordance with relevant standard (IEC 62271) The maximum difference between instants of contact touching during closing and the maximum difference between the instant of contacts separation during opening between 3 poles shall not exceed one half cycle of the rated frequency.(with different colours for easy identification). AC Supply Single feeder DC Supply Single feeder MCB ( Miniature Circuit Breaker) Shall be provided at the circuit breaker for each incoming AC supply. For DC supply double pole MCB shall be provided. Section-5 : Technical Specification 40 . SUPPLY POINT: Auxiliary power supplies listed above will be made available to each circuit breaker as given below. control panel should be provided All angles 65 mm X 65 mm X 6 mm minimum size for breaker structure should be provided Bell is operated 24 V DC Protection Pad locking for both mechanism box. DC supply 24VDC ungrounded 2wire The above supply voltage may vary as indicated below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over the entire range of voltages. 4. 24V DC auxiliary relays are to be provided for power transformer protection with 2NO+2 NC contacts & Hand reset type for LV control VCBs having CTs of ratio 200-100/1-1-1A. 5% setting with high set Instantaneous elements. control panel should be provided All angles 65 mm X 65 mm X 6 mm minimum size for breaker structure should be provided Bell is operated 24 V DC Note: The relays shall be numerical relays of Alstrom / ABB / ER / L&T makes with IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) characteristics and also with high set instantaneous elements for high fault currents and shall comply with relevant standard. Pad locking for both mechanism box. The accuracy class of relays shall be clearly specified as per IS. The breaker shall open and close simultaneously on all the three phases for fault on any phase and or on all the phases The Breakers shall be provided with 3 Over current (3O/L) and one Earth fault (1 E/L) IDMT relay with min. and Power devices (drive motors) and lighting lighting neutral grounded AC supply.2 Auxiliary Electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following supply system. AC Supply DC Supply 4.

CURRENT TRANSFORMER FOR 33KV BREAKERS Rated Voltage Type Earthing Insulation level Nominal System Voltage Maximum System Voltage Impulse withstand voltage One minute power frequency withstand voltage Frequency Transformation Ratio 33KV Single Phase outdoor oil cooled vacuum impregnated CTs for out door VCBs Solidly earthed 33Kv 36Kv 170kVp 75Kv 50 Hz +/. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS FOR 11KV BREAKERS Rated Voltage 11kV Type Single Phase outdoor oil cooled vacuum impregnated CTs for out door VCBs.5% i) 200-100 / 1-1-1A Section-5 : Technical Specification 41 . Earthing Solidly earthed Insulation level Nominal System Voltage 11kV Maximum System Voltage 12kV Impulse withstand voltage 75kVp One minute power frequency withstand 28kV voltage Frequency 50 Hz +/.4.5775 breakers) Rated Output (VA) Protection 15 Metering 5 Differential protection ---Class of Accuracy Protection (Core-I) 10P Metering (Core-II) 0. Accuracy limit factor 10 for protective core ISF < 5 for metering core Current transformers stand cross bracing should be provided B. protection for LV 0.5% Transformation Ratio 400-200-100/1-1A Transformation Ratio for 11 KV LV VCBs 600-300/1-1-0.5 Differential protection (core-III) PS Short time Thermal current The short time thermal current should suit the breaker rupturing capacity and duration to suit the maximum tripping time.4 A.5775A with differential protection Rated Secondary Current Amps 1A Core-I (Protection) 1A Core-II (Metering) Core-III (Class PS.

humid and tropical atmosphere -The maximum temperature in any part of the equipment at specified rating shall not exceed the permissible limits as stipulated in the relevant standards. Oil : IS 335 4. Dimensions of porcelain Bushings : IS 3347 8.2 PS 40 I (Rct+10).0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: The following technical particulars are common for outdoor/Indoor VCBs except where specifically mentioned. insects and corrosion Section-5 : Technical Specification 42 . Current Transformers : IS 2705 (Part I to IV) 2. I = Rated Current of CT The short time thermal current should suit the breaker rupturing capacity and duration to suit the maximum tripping time. HV Porcelain Bushings : IS 2099 3.Rated Secondary Current Amps Core-I (Protection) Core-II (Metering) Core-III (Class PS. 5. accessories and wiring shall have tropical protection. knee point voltage requirement Short time Thermal current 1A 1A 1A 15 5 ---- 5P 0. Note: The Current Transformer shall be offered with first filling of oil conforming to relevant standards. CIRCUIT BREAKERS: -The equipment will be installed out door in hot. -The equipment shall be capable of withstanding the dynamic and thermal stresses of listed short circuit current without any damage or deterioration. Method of high voltage rating : IS 2071 The tendered shall go through the above IS thoroughly before making his offer. -The safety clearances of all live parts of the equipment shall be as per relevant standards. Insulation coordination : IS 2165 7. Galvanization : IS 2633 5. involving special treatment of metal and insulation against fungus. -All equipment. protection for LV breakers) Rated Output (VA) Protection Metering Differential protection Class of Accuracy Protection (Core-I) Metering (Core-II) Differential protection (core-III) Max. Accuracy limit factor 10 for protective core ISF <5 for metering core Current transformers stand cross bracing should be provided STANDARDS: The equipment shall conform in all respects to the latest version of Relevant IS indicated below as applicable. 1. Primary Terminals : IS 10601 6.

There shall be sufficient clearance between live parts of the circuit breakers and the ground. complete with a gang operated sealed porcelain housing conforming to IP-65 protection conforming to relevant standards. The devices shall be easily accessible and removable for access to the breaker contacts. The trip free operating mechanism. All three poles of circuit breaker shall be linked together electrically/mechanically to ensure simultaneous closing of all poles. The current transformers shall be externally mounted on the supporting structure integrated with circuit Breaker structure.5.1 GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS: The circuit breaker shall have fixed type construction consisting three single identical poles.2 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES: 5.2. 3-pole. 5. The vacuum interrupter assembly used in the circuit breakers shall be interchangeable with indigenously available vacuum interrupters (make and type shall be mentioned). other accessories/materials to ensure complete assembly and proper functioning. Suitable inter . The duty of the circuit breaker shall involve satisfactory interruption of short circuit currents as listed in principal parameters. The breaker shall be capable of interruption of reactive current (lagging/leading) without under /over voltage 5..connection between Circuit Breaker terminals and Current Transformer Terminals are to be provided. Note : Neither the circuit breaker nor any part of the switchgear or its supporting structures shall be permanently strained due to vibration etc. 3 phases inter connection links shall be completely accommodated in the base.2. The circuit breaker shall be completed with operating mechanism.2 MAIN CONTACTS AND ARC QUENCHING CHAMBER: The main contacts shall have adequate area and contact pressure for carrying rated continuous and short time currents without excessive heating liable to cause pitting and welding. The tips of the arcing & main contacts shall be heavily silver plated. The circuit breaker shall be provided with proper standard earthing and with terminal earth bar for earthing connection. vacuum type having internal isolation without any sequential interlock. The arc-quenching device shall be of robust construction and shall not require any critical adjustments. Terminal connectors suitable for Panther conductor should be supplied for Circuit Breakers and Current Transformers. The contacts that are adjustable to allow for wear. Section-5 : Technical Specification 43 . shall be easily replaceable and shall have minimum moveable part and adjustments. The details of any device incorporated in the circuit breakers to limit or control the rate of restriking voltage across the circuit breaking contacts shall be stated.1 TYPE AND DUTY: The 11KV circuit breakers shall be outdoor. when making or breaking the rated short circuit currents.

3 INTERLOCK: All electrical and mechanical interlocks. 5. brown glazed and free from all blemishes. Ferrous metal parts and hardware shall be hot-dip galvanised. Provision shall be made for slow closing of VCB without spring charging. All three poles of the breaker shall operate simultaneously. Shielding rings.2. The auxiliary contacts shall be convertible type so that normally open contacts can be converted into normally close contact and vice verse at site. Insulators shall be wet process porcelain.4 AUXILIARY CONTACTS: Each breaker shall be provided with Four (4) normally open and Four (4) normally closed electrically separate spare Auxiliary contacts in addition to those required for its own operation and indication exclusively for purchaser’s use. Insulator shall have adequate mechanical strength and rigidity to withstand the duty involved. The creepage distance shall correspond to heavily polluted atmosphere. It shall operate in such a way that the closing springs after each closing operation are automatically charged by the motor and locked in the charged position by a latch. Insulation shall be coordinated with basic impulse level of the system. Means shall be provided to charge the springs manually also.2.2. The contact loading spring shall be designed in such a way that the contact bounce is eliminated and it shall be ensured and the opening stroke is commenced only from fully closed position.5. The auxiliary contacts shall be rated for 10A for AC and 5A for DC 5. When operated at maximum system voltage there shall be no electrical discharge. 5.3 OPERATING MECHANISM: The operating mechanism shall be motor operated/ manual operated spring closing with trip free features complete with shunt trip coils. It is intended that before lockout occurs the breaker shall be in trip position. The springs shall get changed within appropriate time to facilitate auto-reclosing operations. All the breakers shall be suitable for manual operation as well as slow closing without spring charging. which are necessary for safe and satisfactory operation of the circuit breaker.5 INSULATORS: Bushing insulator for circuit Breakers shall comply wherever possible with relevant standard for High voltage porcelain bushings. Anti pumping device shall be incorporated. The mechanism to be operated for the reclosing operations should the circuit breaker trip. Section-5 : Technical Specification 44 . shall be furnished. shall be provided. if necessary.

Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal Spare terminals equal in number to 20% active terminal shall be furnished.Operation counter and mechanically operated indicator to show whether the circuit breaker is open or closed shall be provided on the circuit breaker operating mechanism. protection.2 TERMINAL BLOCKS: Terminal blocks shall be 1100 V grade.mm stranded copper conductor. The wiring schematic may conform to relevant standards. shall be wired upto terminal blocks in the control cubicle.5.5 mm thick. box clamp type (Stud type). which must be located on individual poles. Wires shall be spliced between terminals. Wiring shall be done with flexible 1100 V grade. PVC insulated. and removable gland plate at the bottom for cable entry. The cubicle shall have front access door with lock and keys.5 5. All manually operating gear shall be so designed that the circuit breaker can be operated by one movement. monitoring devices and all other accessories except those. Section-5 : Technical Specification 45 . 5.4 CONTROL CUBICLE (MECHANISM BOX) FOR OUTDOOR VCBS: A common control cubicle shall be furnished to house electrical controls. push buttons auxiliary switches etc. All spare contacts of relays. 5.5. 5. The mechanism shall be such that the tripping spring can be charged while the circuit breaker is closed and the closing mechanism when charged shall not be operated by vibration caused by the circuit breaker opening under fault conditions. The mechanism shall be designed for electrical control from remote. Local manual close/trip (lever/button) shall be provided in the mechanism box. monitoring and interlocking schemes. fabricated from sheet steel minimum 2. Wire termination shall be done with crimping type connectors with insulating sleeves. Each wire shall be identified at both ends with permanent markers bearing wire numbers as per wiring diagram. The cubicle shall have IP-55 of gasketed whether proof construction. The spring shall be suitable for 4 short reclosing operations.I Conduits. switchboard wires with 2.5 sq.1 WIRING & TERMINAL BLOCKS: WIRING: Wiring shall be complete in all respects to ensure proper functioning of the control. and Wiring between individual poles and control cubicle shall be routed through G.

earth connections etc. Indication circuit etc. small wiring leads. Rated frequency Rated symmetrical breaking capacity Rated making capacity and Rated short-time current and its duration (which shall be either one or three seconds) P. Width 500mm Depth to be adjusted to accommodate relays & relays instruments but not less than 500mm. The words “APEPDCL-JBIC-II” must be etched on the nameplate. Wiring shall be so arranged that individual wires of an external cable can be connected to constructive terminals. Ventilation louvers shall be provided with GI mesh. The panel should be provided with locking handle with built-in-door lock and the lock shall be provided with duplicate keys. terminal bolts. shall be weather proof and vermin proof and of rust-free pressed steel cubicle type with hinged door and locking device. fuses. & Date and year of supply Note: The word “Rated” need not appear on the nameplate recognized abbreviations may be used to express the above quantities.Terminal blocks shall be located to allow easy access.1 CONTROL & RELAY PANELS: CONSTRUCTION: The Control Panels to house meters.8. The frame shall be made of angle iron or structural steel of sufficient weight and strength to ensure permanent rigidity and alignment. The exterior of the panels shall be epoxy painted with dark admiral Grey colour and interior should be painted with half white colour. 5.) and DC control circuit.6 NAME /RATING PLATE: CIRCUIT BREAKERS : Each circuit-breaker shall be provided with a name plate or plates legibly and indelibly marked with atleast the following information : a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) Name of manufacturer Type designation and serial number Rated voltage and current. When the circuit breaker is fitted with closing and/or tripping devices necessitating an auxiliary supply the nature of the auxiliary supply shall be stated either on the circuit breaker nameplate or in any other acceptable position. The internal wiring Section-5 : Technical Specification 46 . earth bar. multi core cable glands. The panel shall be provided with MCBs for AC circuit fuse units for potential Circuit (potential coil connections to static trivector meters etc.7. 5.O No. from plinth level to live part. 5.7 5. The control panel shall be provided with inter connections. relays and other items as specified in Cl.3. The outdoor panels shall be preferably of the following dimensions: Height 1750 mm.

The necessary flanges. The current transformer shall be suitable for mounting on steel structure or concrete pedestals. Section-5 : Technical Specification 47 . The current transformer tank and other metal parts shall be galvanized. The magnetization curves for secondary cores shall be invariably furnished with the tender specifically marking the point on the curve at which knee point voltage is obtainable and also the corresponding excitation current. The secondary terminals shall be brought into a compartment on one side of current transformer for easy access. The paint shall be guaranteed for 5 years from the date of receipt of material. The secondary terminals shall be provided with short circuiting arrangements. The various ratios of Current Transformers shall be obtained by changing the effective number of turns on the secondary. Wherever control panels are fixed to the breaker structure necessary clearance from the ground to read the meters and to operate the switches shall be maintained. are fixed) and supporting members of the panels shall be of 3mm and for the other members of the panel sheet steel thickness shall be 2mm. etc for the base of current transformer shall be supplied and these shall be galvanized. at both normal and over current. bolts.3 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS 5.1 Construction: The core shall be high-grade non-aging electrical silicon-laminated steel of low hysterisis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy. 5. scale and grease and all external rough surface cavities on casting shall be filled by metal deposition. 5. The interior parts and internal structural steel work shall be cleaned of all scale and rust by sand blasting and given a primary coat and two coats of oil and weather resisting epoxy paint.2 PAINTING: Before painting all ungalvansied parts shall be completely cleaned and made free of rust. The thickness of the sheet steel for the front of the panels (where the meters etc.mm 1100V grade standard copper PVC insulated wiring of reputed make. The secondary taps shall be adequately reinforced to withstand normal handling without damage. All external surfaces shall receive a minimum of 3 coats of paint. The secondary terminals shall be adequately reinforced to withstand normal handling without damage.of the panels shall be with 2. The cables from circuit breakers and current transformers to control panels shall be provided.7.7. The current transformers shall be designed to carry continuously a current of at least 125% of the rated current.7.5 Sq.3.

The purchase order number and date and year of supply and the words “APEPDCLJBIC-II” must be etched on the nameplate. Mechanism box. 5.All windings of Current Transformers shall be made of double paper covering insulation and the manufacturing of the units shall be done in completely closed and airconditioned room.. -Size of control cable is 2. Breaker and from Breaker to control panel 10 core cable of 10 m length. Rated transformation ratio Rated frequency Highest system voltage Insulation level and Rated short time thermal current with the associated rated time and rated dynamic current for CTs. Details of winding and core shall be furnished. total 3 x 5 = 15 m. The current transformers shall be complete in all respect with filling of oil confirming to IS:335 and with oil level indicator with minimum/maximum oil levels. and/or type of designation. 50 x 6 mm Flats) shall be provided on Circuit breaker support structure. Section-5 : Technical Specification 48 .2 MECHANISM BOX CONTAINING: a) b) c) Operating mechanism Mechanical indicator for “ON’’ and “OFF’’ coupled to the circuit breaker operating mechanism. a) b) c) d) e) f) g) Manufacturer’s Name Manufacturer’s Sl. Fiberglass insulation sleeves are to be provided for primary winding. collecting cable from breaker to CTs 6 core cable of 5 m length from each CT i. 5. Note: -Earth strips as per relevant Standards shall be provided for proper earthing of equipment.7.No.8.e.5 Sqmm (armourded stranded copper cable) -Metallic sealing bellows are to be provided at the bottom of the all pole assemblies.1 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT: CIRCUIT BREAKERS: The Circuit breaker complete with suitable epoxy painted steel support structure (with anchor bolts & nuts) for outdoor shall have 1 No. -Earth bar of copper (suitable for termination of 2 Nos. -For HV/LV breakers.8 5.8. 5. Mechanical close and trip ( with protective flap ) lever/push button.4 NAME/RATING PLATE: Each Current Transformer/Potential Transformer shall have the following particulars indelibly marked on it or on a label permanently secured to it or its casing. Vacuum Circuit Breaker . -Connecting cable from breaker to control panel and breaker to CT are to be provided.3 poles. control and relay panels and current transformers.

Section-5 : Technical Specification 49 . CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL FOR 33KV VCB: Weather proof. 2 Nos. Not less than four numbers normally open and four numbers normally close spare auxiliary contacts over and above those required for normal operation. For 11KV VCBs provision for mounting the static trivector meter of standard size. 2 Nos.3 Terminal blocks for control wiring and a spare terminal block (with 20% of he active terminals). 1 No. Terminal connectors for incoming and outgoing connectors for outdoor VCB. spare terminals. vermin proof control and relay panel mounted on the breaker structure having equipped as follows: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) j) Control circuit cables and auxiliary supplies (AC & DC) with suitable dummies. shunt trip coils and 1 No. 2Nos. Stud terminal blocks (Bolt and nut type) for CT and PT control cables suitably wired with 6Nos. Set of fine wiring with ferrules with standard code number of respective terminals and with suitable terminal connectors. “Neutral” and “OFF” positions. vermin proof control and relay panel mounted on the breaker structure having equipped as follows: a) b) c) 3 ½ Digit LED display CT Operated digital AC Ammeter to suit the CT ranges indicated in Section IV. “Y”. cable glands over and above those provided for control cables with suitable dummies. One ammeter selector switch with “R”. One Heavy duty pistol grip type control switch for VCB trip/Neutral/Close positions with spring return to neutral position.d) e) f) g) h) i) j) k) l) m) n) 5. (Schedule of materials) shall be AE/IMP make. “B”. 230V single phase AC Motor / Manual operated spring charging mechanism complete with electrical spring release coil. flush of panel type shall be made. 5. Earth bar ( suitable for termination of 2 Nos. EE/ABB/Jyothi make Anti-pumping relay A.3 B. Operation Counter. closing coil. 50 X 6mm class ) 6 Nos. 240V three pin socket with plug & switch Test terminal block with CT and PT terminals with links for testing ammeter and static trivector meter. Additional locking arrangement to the panel door to be provided. Set of 2 poles MCB’s for AC and DC supply with different colours. 3 ½ Digit LED display digital AC volt meter with selector switch One set alarm bell and push button for acceptance of alarm. AC & DC MCBs for control circuit.8. One suitable copper earth strip of 12x3 mm size with adequate number of holes with suitable nuts and bolts for outdoor VCB. Operating handle for manual charging of springs. The meter will be provided by the purchaser at the time of erection.8. Local . CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL FOR 11KV VCB: Weather proof.Remote selector switch.

k) 3 ½ Digit LED display digital AC volt meter with selector switch for 33KV circuit breakers One set alarm bell and push button for acceptance of alarm. 230 V AC) -1 No. 5.) and CT Terminals (6Nos. s) One suitable copper earth strip of 12x3mm size with adequate number of holes with suitable nuts and bolts for outdoor VCB. The current and potential transformers shall be mounted in such a manner that their secondary terminal connections are accessible for testing and maintenance purposes. Suitable inter connection between circuit breaker terminals and CT terminals are to be provided for Section-5 : Technical Specification 50 . plug point with switch (10 A. Set of fine wiring with ferrules with standard code number of respective terminals and with suitable terminal connectors. -All indicating lamps are of extended LED type only. -1 No. Terminal connectors suitable for Panther conductor for 11KV & 33KV shall be supplied for Circuit Breaker (6Nos. q) For 33KV VCBs provision for mounting the static trivector meter of standard size. o) Stud terminal blocks (Bolt and nut type) for CT and PT control cables suitably wired with 6Nos. 5% setting. Illuminator lamp with switch (40W. --The terminals for CTs shall be provided with shorting links. j) Two Nos.8. g) One amber lamp for auto-trip indication. panel space heater with heater switch thermostat -Complete wiring is to be done with ring type copper lugs with proper crimping.4 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: Three numbers Current Transformers as specified. i) IDMT relays with 3 poles arranged for O/L and one pole for E/L with min. l) 2 Nos. flush of panel type shall be made. r) Additional locking arrangement to the panel door to be provided. m) 240V three pin socket with plug & switch n) Test terminal block with CT and PT terminals with links for testing ammeter and static trivector meter. AC & DC MCBs for control circuit. The relays are to be worked on one amp secondary current of Current Transformers and with DC voltage of 24V. h) Numerical relays shall be EE make/ABB make/ER make/ L&T make with the following features. 230 VAC) -1 No. e) One yellow Lamp for healthy trip indication with push button control. p) One suitable copper earth strip of 12x3 mm size with adequate number of holes with suitable nuts and bolts for outdoor VCB. spare terminals. Note: All the instruments and relays to be provided on control panel shall be flush mounted.d) One Red and one Green indicating lamps for indicating “Close” and “Open” positions respectively. f) One white lamp for spring charged indication.). cable glands over and above those provided for control CT and PT cables. The meter will be provided by the purchaser at the time of erection. control circuit cables and auxiliary supplies (AC & DC) with suitable dummies. push button for trip circuit for healthy check up -1 No.

mm when connected to VCB & CTs and must be bushing type. TYPE TESTS: The circuit breakers and current transformers shall be fully type tested by the bidder as per the relevant standard including the type tests mentioned below in Cl. 6.1.1.2. Special Guarantee: The vacuum bottles shall be guaranteed for satisfactory operation for period of five years from the date of commissioning. Verification of terminal markings and polarity. including vacuum bottles mechanism box and all bushings etc. The type tests must have been conducted on 11KV Vacuum Circuit Breakers and current transformers from recognized NABL accredited test laboratories not earlier than 3 years from the date of bid opening.1.outdoor VCBs. The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed in ISS/IEC mentioned above. BIDS WITHOUT THE FOLLOWING TYPE TEST REPORTS WILL BE TREATED AS NON-RESPONSIVE. I(A) & I(B). 6.1 CIRCUIT BREAKERS: IS13118/IEC62271 a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) a) Temperature rise test for the main circuits. Mechanical endurance tests.0 6.2 6. For all type and acceptance tests. Tests for short time current. Operation tests. Terminal connectors should have contact area of above 300 Sq.1 6. Test certificate of not more than three years old. The bidder shall furnish two sets of type test reports as per relevant standards along with the bid. 6. shall be carried out on the vacuum circuit breaker as per the IEC 62271-100 -2001 and current transformers as per IS 2705 (with latest revision). One minute power frequency voltage dry withstand tests. 6.2 TESTS: The type. Measurement of resistance of the main circuit. Note: Other standard accessories which are not specifically mentioned but supplied with breakers of similar type and rating for efficient and trouble free operation shall be provided. the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by the supplier in the proforma for “Guaranteed Technical Particulars” furnished in this specification or acceptance value specified in this specification.2.3 6. One minute power frequency voltage wet withstand tests. from a recognized national laboratory with NABL accreditation shall be furnished. Guaranteed Technical Particulars: The bidder shall indicate the technical particulars guaranteed in the proforma given in Annexures.2.1 & 6. Impulse voltage tests. Tests for short circuit conditions.1 6.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: IS 2705 Section-5 : Technical Specification 51 .2.2. acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture. whichever is more stringent for that particular test.

or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type. acceptance and routine tests.2.3 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS : 6. The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price.3 6. High voltage power frequency test on secondary windings. to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.3.3 6. TEST REPORTS / TEST CERTIFICATES: Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic inspection by the purchaser’s representative. Short-time current Temperature rise test. In case of failure in any type test. 6. All acceptance and routine tests stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by the supplier in presence of purchaser’s representative.2. the supplier is required to modify the design of the material and the material shall be type tested again for the modified design. High voltage power frequency test on primary windings.3. at site.1 Section-5 : Technical Specification 52 . without any extra cost to the purchaser.b) c) d) e) f) g) h) High voltage power frequency test on primary windings.4 6. Over voltage inter-turn test.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS: a) b) c) d) e) Verification of terminal markings and polarity.1CIRCUIT BREAKERS: a) Measurement of resistance of the main circuits. 6. b) Operation tests. Over voltage inter-turn test.3. High voltage power frequency test on secondary windings.3. c) One minute power frequency voltage dry withstand test on the circuit breakers d) One minute power frequency voltage dry withstand test on auxiliary circuits. Impulse voltage test for current transformers for services in electrically exposed installations.2. 6. 6.2 6. No delivery extension shall be given for this additional testing.3.4. Determination of error according to the requirements of appropriate accuracy class. The employer reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the bought out items to pass tests.3Tests during manufacture: The Bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the equipment to be supplied.2.3. 6. Determination of error according to the requirements of appropriate accuracy class.1 ADDITIONAL TESTS: The purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidders premises.

2 7. The bidder shall indicate the name(s) of reputed inspection agencies and the inspection charges clearly for each lot. However the purchaser reserves the right to appoint at its cost any inspection agency to carry out the inspection. 7. unless the inspection is waived off.0 7. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification.3 7.4 7. APEPDCL may its option get the materials inspected stage wise by the 3rd party on each unit/units offered for inspection along with a APEPDCL’s representative. The inspection charges will be borne by the purchaser. The supplier shall give 15 days advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests. The Bidder shall indicate the details of the equipment available with him for carrying out the various tests as per relevant Standards.1 INSPECTION: The purchaser’s representative shall. Tests as per applicable standards should be carried out in respect of porcelain bushings.5 TEST FACILITIES: The tests shall be carried out as per relevant Standards and test certificates shall be furnished for approval. if it feels necessary. be entitled to have access to the works and at all places of manufacture where equipment offered shall be manufactured and the representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the bidder’s works. He shall indicate the name of the supplier and make of vacuum interrupters. electrical steel laminations constructional steel etc.7 Section-5 : Technical Specification 53 . and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective. 7. relays and meters. 6. relays. If a 2nd time inspection becomes necessary the inspection charges shall be borne by you.5 7. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the purchaser. meters. raw materials and process of manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein. The Bidder shall keep the purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the progress of manufacture of the offered equipment in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for inspection. The bidder shall indicate the sources of all materials.The Bidder shall maintain test certificates of tests conducted during manufacture. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested. by the purchaser in writing. galvanization. insulating oil.6 7. conductor. Note: The Meters used for conducting tests shall be calibrated periodically at reputed Government Accredited Test Laboratories and test certificates shall be available at works for verification by employer’s representative. at all times.

2. shall be submitted by the supplier for distribution before commencement of supply.1 DOCUMENTATION: All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organisation (ISO) `A’ series of drawings sheet/India Standards Specifications IS:656. if necessary. submit three sets of final versions of all the above said drawings for purchaser’s approval. modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for their approval. elevation and end view dimensions. Six sets of the type test reports. The supplier shall within two weeks. Operation manuals.Units.0 The APEPDCL reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance routine testing of the bought out items.0 9. 9. 9. All similar materials are removable parts of similar equipment shall be interchangeable with each other. WARRANTY: The general terms and conditions the warranty clause applicable to Vacuum Circuit Breakers of this specification is as follows.I. The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.2. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test certificates. The supplier shall. LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS: The bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer. shall accompany the dispatch consignment. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro filming. The period of warranty will be 5 years (five years) from the date of commissioning.8 8. leafless literature etc. submit 23 prints and two good quality report copies of the approved drawings for purchaser’s use. assembly and constructional drawings of the equipment. in addition to the five sets to be sent directly to the purchaser. All dimensions and data shall be in S.1 The successful Bidder shall. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within four weeks.2 9. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier’s risk. duly approved by the purchaser. Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of application standards. General outline drawing showing plan.7.2 9. Name plate & schematic drawings.2.3 Section-5 : Technical Specification 54 . 9. maintenance and erection manuals and approved drawings in English language shall be supplied along with each circuit breaker. within 2 weeks of placement of order. duly approved by the purchaser. Two set of nicely printed bound volumes of operation.

A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33KV & 11kV VCB’s ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sl. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering. Whether the special guarantee for vacuum bottles for five years is accepted. workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have to power to reject any work or materials which. No. Class Rated Voltage Rated Insulation level One minute power frequency withstand voltage Impulse withstand voltage One minute power frequency withstand voltage on auxiliary wiring. Closing time. design. Weight of Complete Circuit Breaker : Operating Mechanism of Circuit Breaker and Associated Equipment. Area of contacts. Rated frequency. Section-5 : Technical Specification 55 . 2. in his judgment is not in full accordance therewith. Electrical service life Rated current (times) Rated interruptions current (times) Whether type test reports enclosed. Rated operating sequence.rules and codes of practices. ANNEXURE-I . CHARACTERISTICS ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------(A). The voltage to which the circuit breaker shall be capable of withstanding indefinitely across open contacts. Whether circuit breaker is trip free. Gap between the contacts in vacuum. (B). 3. Rated cable charging current Rated (Single) capacitor breaking current Rated small inductive breaking current Rated short circuit making current Rated duration of short circuit Rated transient recovery current. 1. of Poles Rated Normal current Rated symmetrical short circuit breaking current (kA) Rated short circuit making current Opening time and break time. Degree of Vacuum maintained in the Vacuum chamber. Minimum Clearance in Air: Between poles Between live parts to earth. RATED VALUES AND CHARACTERISTICS No.

ANNEXURE-I-B GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF 33KV & 11KV CT’s -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sl. No. (No. and type of auxiliary contacts. Y Phase live part to body. 7. B Phase live part to body b. -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------i. of spare normally open contacts and No. Whether type test reports for breakers and CTs are enclosed. B Phase between incoming to outgoing terminals. 5. Accuracy Limiting Factor Core –I Core-II 7. Opening Coil Heaters at different locations (240V-50c/s AC) IR values of the pole assembles with 5KV Megger a. R Phase live part to body b. Current Transformers: 1. CHARACTERISTICS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------A. b. R Phase incoming to outgoing terminals. Rated output in VA Core –I Core-II 5. a. Power requirement : Closing Coil. 2. Type Manufacturer’s type and designation Rated Voltage Method of ratio change and secondary connections details and connection diagram Secondary voltage Core –I. Y Phase between incoming to outgoing terminals iii. Core-II. 1. ii. Total Weight Kg 10. of cores (Secondary core details) Core –I Core-II 4. 6. One second short time factor times rated current 8. 3. a. 4. Core-II. Rated primary current 2. of spares normally closed contacts are to be indicated. Rated secondary current Core –I Core-II 3. No.Type of closing mechanism No. Class of Accuracy Core –I Core-II 6.). Weight of oil Kg 9. Rated current dynamic (peak value) Section-5 : Technical Specification 56 . Secondary limiting voltage Core –I. (B).

13. current Transformers of ratio 600-300 / 1-1-0. 630 A. 10. 1. ACRONYMS -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Reference Abbreviations Name and Address Section-5 : Technical Specification 57 . 1250A. Control and Relay panels with 2 O/L & 1 E/L IDMT numerical Relays with auxiliary relays along with 3Nos. 12. 3 Pole. No. Control and Relay panels with 3 O/L & E/L (restricted Earth Fault) IDMT numerical with auxiliary relays & differential Relay for protection of Power Transformer along with 3Nos.20 kA porcelain clad vacuum circuit breakers with outdoor control and relay panels & current transformers with control voltage-24V DC suitable for outdoor installation conforming to IEC 62271-100-1/2001 and as per the technical particulars described in Section-V with the following. 2. 9.50 Hz. Current Transformers of ratio 200-100 / 1-1-1A for HV control VCBs. No. 1. 50 Hz. 25 kA porcelain clad vacuum circuit breakers with Outdoor control and relay panels having 3 O/L & E/L numerical relays with following current transformers ratios with control voltage 24V DC conforming to IEC 62271-100-1/2001 and as per the technical particulars described in Section-V with 3 Nos. Description of Material 33KV. 11. current Transformers of ratio 400-200-100 / 1-1A. Rated continuous thermal current temperature rise over ambient One minute power frequency dry/wet withstand voltage kV(rms) 1/50 micro second impulse withstand test voltage kV (peak) One minute power frequency withstand test voltage on secondaries kV (rms) Magnetisation curve of CT curve Mounting details Overall dimensions IR values of Primary with 5 KV Megger IR values of Secondary with 1 KV Megger ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Schedule of Requirements 33KV VCB with CT’s & CR panel: Sl. 1. Description of Material 11 kV.8.5775A for LV control VCB’s. Control and Relay panels with 3 O/L & E/L IDMT numerical Relays with auxiliary relays along with 3Nos. 3 Pole. current Transformers of ratio 400-200-100 / 1-1A for LV control VCB’s. 11KV VCB with CT’s & CR panel: Sl. 3.

DK-2900.-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------IEC International Electro Technical Commission Bureau Central de la Commission Electro Technique International. Bahadur Shah Zafar Marg. ISS Indian Standard Bureau of Indian Standards. 9. heel prup. Rue de verembe Geneva. New Delhi – 110 002. Danish Board of Standardisation Aurehoegyej-12. DENMARK. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ Section-5 : Technical Specification 58 . INDIA. Nank Bhavan. Switzerland ISO International Organisation for Standardisation.

stage testing inspection and testing before supply and delivery at site of the following: a) b) c) 33 kV 800 A Air Break Switches (Isolators) with solid core insulators 11 kV 400 A Air Break Switches (Isolators) / Horizontal type with post type insulators 11 kV 200 A horizontal type Air Break Switches (Isolators) with solid core insulators. in a manner acceptable to the purchaser. components shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder's supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order or not. IS-1881/1972 IS-2544/1973 IS-5350/1970 Alternating current Isolators (disconnectors) and Earthing Switches Porcelain Post Insulators for systems with normal voltage greater than 1000 V Dimensions of Indoor and Outdoor Porcelain Post Insulators and Post Insulator Units for Systems with nominal Voltage greater than 1000 V Methods of Testing and Uniformity of coating of zinc coated articles Mild steel tubes.0 STANDARDS The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications with latest amendments indicated below.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 kV & 11 kV AB SWITCHES (ISOLATORS) 1. manufacture.0 SCOPE This specification covers design. in his judgment is not in accordance there with. assembly. design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder's guarantee. Indian Standard Title International & Internationally recognized standard IEC – 62 271-102-2001 Alternating Current disconnectors (isolators) for voltages from 1kV to 52kV IS-9920/1985 Part Switches & Switch isolators for Voltages I to IV above 1000 V IS-9921/1985 Alternating Current disconnectors Parts I to IV (isolators) and earthing switches for voltage above 1000 Volts.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of equipment. engineering. tubular & other rod steel fittings and pipe fittings IS-2633/1986 IS-1239/1990 Section-5 : Technical Specification 59 . 1. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. Such. 2. who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which.

S As per B.5 iii) Average daily ambient air temperature (deg. salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the other standards.3 g. Relative Humidity (%) 100 v) Max.C) 7. conducive to rust and fungus growth.I. the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail. In case of any difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification.I. wind pressure(kg/sq.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: The Voltage Transformers to be supplied against this Specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions. 4.2 CONFLICT OF STANDARDS: Equipment conforming to other internationally accepted standards.I.) 0.C) 35 iv) Max.) 200 viii) Isoceraunic level (days per year) 50 ix) Seismic level (Horizontal accn. ambient air temperature (deg.2.S Rated impulse withstand voltage 170 kV 75 kV Rated frequency Rated Current (for isolator only) Rated peak short circuit current Rated short-time withstand current Rated maximum duration of Short circuit Load break capacity 50 Hz +2% -5% 800 A 50 kA 20 KA 1 Sec 40 A 50 Hz +2% -5% 400 A 40 kA 16 kA 1 Sec 20 A 11 kV 12 kV As per B. The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climate. 3. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer. Sl. ambient air temperature (deg.1 PRINCIPAL PARAMETEERS : Ratings: The Air Break Switches shall have the following ratings Nominal System Voltage 33 kV 11 kV Rated Voltage 36 kV 12 kV Insulation levels for isolation As per B.m. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) 1000 vi) Average Annual rainfall (mm).S 75 kV 50 Hz +2% -5% 200 A(Horizontal) 25 kA 10 kA 1 Sec 16 A Section-5 : Technical Specification 60 . Location At various locations in the No. which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above would also be acceptable. state of Andhra Pradesh i) Max.0 4. In case of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS (ii) IEC (iii) Other standards. 925 vii) Max.C) 50 ii) Min.

All Ferrous metal parts. It shall be so constructed that an intimate contact with Section-5 : Technical Specification 61 . without earthing contact blades. The contact end shall be tin or silver coated.3 Blades: 36 kV 1524 mm 12 kV (400 A) 914.1 Construction: Air Break Switches (Isolators) shall be 3 poles.5 Arcing Horns: The AB (Air Break) Switches shall be provided with 3 sets of removable spring controlled rod type arcing horns with Make Before and Break After feature Arcing Horns of GI material. The contacts assembly shall be so designed that while carrying the rated continuous current. Facility shall be provided for lubrication of bearings.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 11kV & 33kV AIR BREAK SWITCHES (ISOLATORS) 5. These shall be capable for carrying rated current continuously and fault current safely. where required shall be made of soft electrolytic grade copper sheet. 1 GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:- 5. The contact shall be self-relevance jaw-type and suitable stainless steel SPRING of sufficient pressure shall be provided to ensure proper contact in the closing position.1. the temperature rise does not increase beyond the value specified in relevant standards. gang operated.4 Fixed Contact: The fixed contact element shall be made of rolled electrolytic grade copper flat and with flexible ends. 5. Bearing housing shall be weather proof. and extruded hollow copper tube of adequate size matching with current capacity.2 Phase separation: The phase separation for the different rated voltages shall be as given below: Rated Voltage Phase separation 5.1. The diameter of the arcing horn rods shall be not less than 6 mm for 11 kV and 10 mm for 33 kV. The finished galvanised surface shall be smooth. for 11KV 400Amps (double break) AB switches and 33 KV-800Amps Air Break Switches.6 Terminal & Connector: The terminal shall be made of rolled/extruded electrolytic grade copper flat having a cross sectional area equal to that of the blade. shall be provided. The contact element shall be tin or silver coated.1. The parts shall be galvanised after machining.4 mm 12 kV (200 A) (Horizontal type) 600 mm The blades shall be made from a single length of rolled/extruded electrolytic grade copper flat for 11 KV-200 Amps. one set for each phase. 5.1.1. except those of stainless steel shall be hot dip galvanised and the uniformity of the Zinc coating shall satisfy the requirements of relevant standard specification. single or double break type.1. 5.5. 5.

1. There should be adequate clearance between HG fuse and AB switches operating handle when the switch is erected on a transformer structure. complete with the operating mechanism should not come out of their own in closed position due to the effect of gravity. the rotating blades shall be connected to the line side through a flexible copper connection of sufficient length so that the strain on the live jumpers is avoided. guide bearing and universal joint in order to ensure smooth operation.the contact elements ensured.13 Bolts and Nuts: The required bolts and nuts (hot dip galvanised) for assembling the complete air-break switch and for fixing the same to the structures shall be supplied with the equipment at no extra cost. Their construction should be such that they do not open under the influence of the short circuit current. These copper connectors shall be made of tinned of braided copper strips. This shall comprise of operating pipe of diameter 32 mm (Nominal Bore) for 11 kV and 40 mm (Nominal Bore) for 33 kV and length 6 m with intermediate coupling and operating handle.9 Operation Mechanism: The operating mechanism shall be suitable for normal operation by one man without undue effort. 5.11 Galvanising: All ferrous parts should invariably be hot dip galvanised except the bolts.1.1.8 Phase Coupling Bar: The bar is required for coupling the rotation of the 3 phases and should be fixed in a manner to permit the smooth movement for operation of the switches. 5. The connector should be suitable for ACSR Conductor up to Panther.12 Locking Arrangements: The Air Break Switches shall be constructed in such a manner to permit pad locking in both open and close position. without affecting the operation and current carrying properties.1. which shall be electro-galvanised. The Section-5 : Technical Specification 62 .1. 5. washers spring washers and split pins.1. The mechanism shall provide adequate mechanical leverage with minimum of loose/lost motion.10 Mechanical strength: The isolating switches shall be capable of withstanding the rated mechanical terminal loads and electromagnetic forces. wind pressure. conforming to relevant IS. vibrations reasonable shocks. The terminal shall preferably be tin or silver coated 5. nuts. 5. 5.7 Bearing: The operating shaft shall be supported with ball bearings.1. Each rotating insulator stack shall have thrust roller bearings and shall rotate into gunmetal bush bearings contained in a suitable weatherproof housing. The housing shall be fitted with the greasing nipple. For single break switches. Bolts and nuts shall be provided with lock washers and lock nuts wherever required. 5. The pipe shall conform to class 'B GI pipe as per relevant standards. with or without earthing blades. The switches. The Aluminum Alloy Connectors shall be supplied for each end and for each phase of the switch.

2.2. Section-5 : Technical Specification 63 . 6.3. without any extra cost to the purchaser.2 The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the bought out items to pass tests.2 The AB SWITCHES (ISOLATORS) shall be fully type tested by the bidder as per the relevant standard including the type tests mentioned in the above standards.0 TESTS FOR 11 kV & 33kV AB SWITCHES (ISOLATORS) : 6. The certificates of type tests already not carried out (not more than 2 years old ) on the day of bid opening by the tenderer in their lab or from any accredited test house on the AB SWITCHES (ISOLATORS) identical in all respects being quoted against this specification must be furnished by the manufacturer along with this quotation as an evidence of compliance of this specification. The type tests must have been conducted on 11kV & 33kV AB SWITCHES (ISOLATORS) from recognized NABL accredited test laboratories.2 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS : 6. 6. BIDS WITHOUT THE FOLLOWING TYPE TEST REPORTS WILL BE TREATED AS NON-RESPONSIVE. 6. The bidder shall furnish two sets of type test reports as per relevant standards along with the bid.3 ADDITIONAL TESTS : 6.1 All acceptance and routine tests stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by the supplier in presence of purchaser’s representative 6. it shall be marked with the earth symbol in delible manner on or adjacent to the terminal 5. No delivery extension shall be given for this additional testing.3. or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type.1.14 Insulators: Solid core Insulators for 33 kV 800 A and 11 kV 200 A (Horizontal type ) AB switches and post type insulator for 11 kV 400 A AB switches conforming to the relevant standards shall be supplied along with equipment. when the insulators are fixed. at site.switches shall be so designed that the leakage current will pass to earth and not between terminals of the same pole or between poles. to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications. A reliable earthing terminal having a clamping bolt of at least 12 mm dia provided on the frame at one end of the isolator. In case the tender is not accompanied by the type test certificate board/power utility reserves the right of cancel/reject the tender.1 The purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidders premises. 6.2.1 The tests indicated in IS : 9920 Part I to IV / IS-9921-1985 Part I to IV / IEC – 62 271102-2001 with latest amendments shall constitute the type tests. the supplier is required to modify the design of the material and the material shall be type tested again for the modified design.3 Tests during manufacture : The Bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the equipment to be supplied.2 In case of failure in any type test.1. 6. acceptance and routine tests. 6.1.

The supplier shall give 15 days (for Group A & B suppliers)/30 days (for Group C Suppliers) advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests. at all times. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the purchaser.3 The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price. 6. The Bidder shall maintain test certificates of tests conducted during manufacture. The bidder shall indicate the sources of all materials.0 INSPECTION : 7. relays. meters. NOTE : The Meters used for conducting tests shall be calibrated periodically at reputed Government Accredited Test Laboratories and test certificates shall be available at works for verification by purchasers representative. The Bidder shall keep the purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the progress of manufacture of the offered equipment in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for inspection. The Bidder shall indicate the details of the equipment available with him for carrying out the various tests as per relevant Standards. and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.4 TEST REPORTS / TEST CERTIFICATES: Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic inspection by the purchaser’s representative. conductor.6. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.3.1 The purchaser’s representative shall. Section-5 : Technical Specification 64 . be entitled to have access to the works and at all places of manufacture where equipment offered shall be manufactured and the representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the bidder’s works. 6. electrical steel laminations constructional steel etc. He shall indicate the name of the supplier and make of vacuum interrupters.5 TEST FACILITIES : The tests shall be carried out as per relevant Standards and test certificates shall be furnished for approval. raw materials and process of manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein. 7. However the purchaser reserves the right to appoint at its cost any inspection agency to carry out the inspection. insulating oil. unless the inspection is waived off. 7. by the purchaser in writing. The inspection charges will be borne by the purchaser.6 NOTE FOR FOREIGN BIDDERS : The bidder shall indicate the name(s) of reputed inspection agencies and the inspection charges clearly for each lot.

I. maintenance and erection manuals and approved drawings in English language shall be supplied along with each circuit breaker.0 PACKING & FORWARDING: 9.3 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro filming.Units. 8. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit. leafless literature etc.1 The successful Bidder shall. Operation manuals. if necessary.1 All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organisation (ISO) ‘A’ series of drawings sheet/India Standards Specifications IS:656.2. The supplier shall.2. due to improper and inadequate packing. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within four weeks. Name plate & schematic drawings. assembly and constructional drawings of the equipment. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier’s risk. 8. The supplier shall within two weeks. workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have to power to reject any work or materials which.2.0 DOCUMENTATION : 8.2 Six sets of the type test reports. shall accompany the dispatch consignment.2 LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS : The bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer: General outline drawing showing plan. in addition to the five sets to be sent directly to the purchaser. All dimensions and data shall be in S. rules and codes of practices.2. modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for their approval.4 Two set of nicely printed bound volumes of operation. shall be submitted by the supplier for distribution before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test certificates. 8.2. 8. and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit.1 The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case may be. 8. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed Section-5 : Technical Specification 65 .5 Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of application standards. 8. in his judgment is not in full accordance therewith.8. duly approved by the purchaser. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering. duly approved by the purchaser. 9. elevation and end view dimensions. design. submit three sets of final versions of all the above said drawings for purchaser’s approval. submit 23 prints and two good quality report copies of the approved drawings for purchaser’s use. within 2 weeks of placement of order.

0 MANDATORY SPARES & TOOLS: The manufacturer shall provide all necessary mandatory spares like fuses. Supplier without any extra cost shall supply any material found short inside the packing cases immediately. enclosed and submit the same with the Tender. Bill of Material indicating contents of each package.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied with a detailed packing list containing the following information. he should ensure the packing is such that. 9.0 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS: The quantity and delivery requirement are indicated in Section-V 11. spanners. 15. 12. etc.5 The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant standards and shall also contain “JBIC”. 10. such as lifting hooks etc. 9. 9. free of cost. Rail/Road should not damage the material during transit. shall be provided.. 13.0 TECHNICAL DEVIATIONS: Any deviation in Technical Specification as indicated in Section-III shall be specifically and clearly indicated in the enclosed Technical deviation format as per Annexure – II or in the schedule of deviation format – Schedule – ‘A’.and marked with the appropriate caution symbol. Name of the consignee.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS The Bidder shall furnish the guaranteed Technical Particulars as per Annexure – I. Total weight of consignment Handling and packing instructions.4 The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice. Details of consignment.3 The supplier shall ensure that the purchaser before dispatch approves the packing list and bill of material. 9. However.0 SUPERVISION SERVICES: The Purchaser will arrange for unloading of the consignments. Wherever necessary. ANNEXURE – I GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR AIR BREAK SWITCHES Section-5 : Technical Specification 66 . proper arrangement for lifting.. Destination.

i. Operating shaft Impulses withstand voltage with 1/50 Micro Sec. Across isolating distance ii. wave positive and negative polarity i.Sl. Max. of poles Voltage rating Frequency Current rating in Amps. Rotating insulator stack ii. To each and between poles One minute power frequency withstand voltage across isolating distance to earth and between poles Insulators Type of Insulator Section-5 : Technical Specification 67 . C over ambient temperature i. Copper contacts with coating ii. diameter and length of operating handle Material of arcing horns Size and length of mounting channel Whether the Air break switch is complete with all accessories Whether dimensional drawing is enclosed with the bid Minimum clearance between phases (The centre distance between the insulators of adjacent phases in assembled position of switch) Centre to centre distance between insulators of the constructive poles of the same phase in the assembled position of switch (in mm) Whether mechanical interlock has been provided for 33 kV 11 kV 11 kV EARTH Switches 800 A 400 A 200A (Horizontal) Type of bearings used in i.No Details Air Break Switches (Isolators) A B C d e f g Guaranteed particulars 33 kV 11 kV 11 kV 800 A 400 A 200A(Horizontal) h i j k l m n o p q r s T U V W X 2 a Name(s) of Manufacturer(s) Whether single break or double break No. Normal ii. Terminal of switches intended to be bolted to the external conductors Whether contracts are silver coated or tin coated along with thickness of coating in mm Voltage drop across terminals of poles Short time current and duration Material of fixed contact Material of moving blade Material of terminal connector Type. with duration Temperature rise of the following at full rated current in Deg.

Wet voltage iii.2 2. Impulse voltage of 1/50 Micro-seconds (-ve) Power frequency puncture withstand voltage of unit Mechanical characteristics Cantilever strength upright Cantilever strength under hand Torsional strength Tensile strength General characteristics Min. creepage distance Weight of complete unit Standard to which insulator conforms Section-5 : Technical Specification 68 .1 a b c d e f 2.Impulse voltage of 1/50 Micro-seconds (+ve) iv. of units per stack Electrical characteristics (for one insulator) Flash over voltage Dry power frequency Wet power frequency Impulse voltage of 1/50 Micro-seconds (+ve) Impulse voltage of 1/50 Micro-seconds (-ve) Withstand voltage i.4 a b 2.5 Name of Manufacturer of insulators Height of the insulators Diameter of the largest shell No.b c d e 2. Dry voltage ii.3 a b c d 2.

2. Such. components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. in a manner acceptable to the purchaser. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer. inspection and testing before supply and delivery at site of 11KV outdoor oil cooled vacuum impregnated (metering) Voltage Transformers. suitable for mounting externally. 1. in his judgment is not in accordance there with.0 CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: Section-5 : Technical Specification 69 . who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which. 11KV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS SCOPE: This specification covers the manufacture.V. components shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder’s supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not. CONFLICT OF STANDARDS: Equipment conforming to other internationally accepted standards. In case the Bidders who wish to offer material conforming to the other standards. with latest amendments indicated below. assembly stage testing. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering. the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail.0 STANDARDS: 2.335/1983 IS 2099 IS 2633 IS 10601 Title International Internationally standard & recognized Specification for Voltage Transformers Specification for New insulating IEC 71 ( For CTs) oils Electrical Clearances Specification for H. In case of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS (ii) IEC (iii) Other standards.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of equipment. which ensure equal or high quality than the standards mentioned above would also be acceptable. 3.2. Porcelain Bushings Specification for Galvanization Specification for Primary Terminals 2. Indian Standard IS 3156 ( Parts I & II) IS. salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 3Ph. design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee. The offered equipment shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation.1. Such. The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specifications / IEC Standards. Incase of any difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification.

Earthed-------Two 4 5 6 4.2. Sl. The PTs shall have adequate protection with fuses on primary and secondary side. Marking on primary and secondary terminals of P.m) Isoceraunic level ( days per year) Seismic level ( Horizontal accn. Relative Humidity (%) Max. shall be clearly marked for different C. wind pressure ( kg.2 0. sq. The equipment shall be for use in moderately hot and humid tropical climatic.No.3 g. 4.C) Max. NOTE:1. ambient air temperature ( deg. At various locations in the state of Andhra Pradesh 50 7. of phases / connection Insulation Level: i) Nominal System voltage ii) Highest System voltage iii) Standard Impulse withstand Voltage iv) One minute Power Frequency withstand Voltage Primary Secondary v)Rated voltage factor and corresponding rated time Rated transformation ratio i) Class of accuracy ii) Rated burden / phase Type of Transformer Number of windings / phase RATING 11kV Three Phase / Star – Star 11kV 12kV 75kV 28kV 3kV 1.C) Min. altitude above mean sea level (Meters) Average Annual rainfall (mm). Voltage transformer shall be capable of carrying without injury continuous burden of 50% above the rated burden in respect of 11kV PTs. conducive to rust and fungus growth.T. 1 2 3 PARAMETERS Rated voltage No. ambient air temperature ( deg.5 35 100 1000 925 200 50 0. Location i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) Max. Section-5 : Technical Specification 70 . Max.The Voltage Transformers to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following climatic conditions.No.T.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS: 4.5 100 VA ------. Ratios.1 The rating of 11kV Voltage Transformers at a frequency 50 Hz shall be as follows: Sl.C) Average daily ambient air temperature ( deg.

The housing shall be made of homogeneous. A provision shall be made to fix the PTs on M.1.) 5.2. Interface between porcelain housing and metal tank’s. Channel with necessary slotted holes on the base of the PTs. A provision for inserting suitable cable shall be made in the secondary cover of the P. so as to avoid leakages of oil. washers in the electric current path shall be made out of stainless steel. INSULATING OIL:Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformers shall be covered in tenderer scope of supply.T. 5. 6. The thickness of tank should be specified clearly.The metal tank shall be fabricated from mild steel having thickness of minimum 3.2. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: Porcelain Housing:The porcelain housing shall be of single piece construction without any joint. Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain pressure release valve and primary / secondary terminals shall be brought out in the offer. 5. Cover of the secondary terminal box. Glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown colour with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rainwater or condensed water particles ( fog.15 mm for sides and 5mm for top and bottom.2. All the ferrous hardware.1.1. In this connection the arrangement provided by tenderer at various locations including the following ones shall be supported by sectional drawings. vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength. The top cover of the PT shall be made such that no rain be stocked on the surface and no entry of rain water in to the PT. Section-5 : Technical Specification 71 .0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 11kV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 5. 4. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition of IS 335.1. Use of other insulating material such as quartz sand is not permitted. exposed to atmosphere. 3. shall be hot dip galvanized.3. The clear height of porcelain housing for 33kV instrument transformers shall be at least 430mm.2. Only copper winding shall be used. All other fixing nuts. 5.2. The voltage transformer shall be offered with first filling of oil conforming to relevant standards. bolts. OIL IMMERSED EQUIPMENTS:5. PREVENTION OF OIL LEAKAGES & ENTRY OF MOISTURE:The tenderer shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformers is properly achieved.S. The metal tanks shall be coated with at least two coats of zinc rich epoxy paint externally and inside shall be painted with oil resistant white enamel paint. 5. Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.

. If gasketed joints are used. Each Voltage Transformer shall have the following particulars indelibly marked on it or on a label permanently secured to it or its casing. primary terminals or the tanks during the process of lifting for installation / transport.5.1.3. The general arrangement drawing shall show clearly the lifting arrangements provided such as lifting eye guide etc. Oil filling and / or oil sampling cocks if provided to facilitate factory processing shall be permanently sealed before despatch of the instrument transformers. nitrite butyle rubber gaskets shall be used. Manufacturer’s Name Manufacturer’s Sl.3.D. Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for taking out terminals shall be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain. with one plane washer and one nut for connection to station earth-mat. 5. 5. The earth terminal shall be marked with sign for identification. Rated transformation ratio Rated frequency Highest system voltage Insulation level and Section-5 : Technical Specification 72 .1.3.3. Each Instrument Transformer shall be provided with prismatic type oil sight window at suitable location so that oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level.2.3.6. LIFTING ARRANGEMENT:Instrument transformers shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift the entire unit. The units shall be vaccum filled with oil after processing and thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate air and moisture from entering the tank.2. Rubber diaphragms shall not be permitted for this purpose. No. and / or type of designation. NAME / RATING PLATE: 5. Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall positioned in such a way so as avoid any damage to the porcelain housing. OIL LEVEL INDICATORS: 5. EARTHING: Metal tank of the instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing terminals of size 16mm dia x 30mm length H.G. For compensation of variation in volume of the oil due to temperature variation nitrogen cushion or stainless steel bellow’s shall be used. The gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the gasket under compression.

bolts etc. Polarity shall be invariably marked on each primary and secondary terminal.6.1. The terminal box shall be provided with removable gland plate and glands.3.6.7. 5.9. for the base of PT shall be supplied and galvanized.5. PVC Sheathed multicore 6sq. The serial number and code of the supplier shall also be punched on tank on identify the unit case of loss or damage to the rating plate.7. The terminal box shall be dust and vermin proof.Rated short time thermal current with the associated rated time and rated dynamic current for PTs. 5. 5.7. 5. 5. WINDING: All windings shall be insulated high. The terminal connectors suitable for panther ASCR conductors shall be supplied.7. Polyster enamel shall not be used. if used shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with oil. The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive legible plate with the information specified in relevant standards duly engraved punched on it. if used for conductor insulation. The cable glands shall be suitable for 1100/3300 volts glands.7. shall be either polyvinyl acetate type or amide type and shall meet the requirement of IS 4800. Double cotton cover.7.7. The necessary flanges. Enamel. shall be provided with a rating plate with dimensions and markings as per IS – 3156 or equivalent international standards.grade electrolytic copper wire.mm aluminium conductor PVC cable. 5. Conductors used for the primary winding shall be rigid.8. The casting of base. The voltage transformers shall be suitable for mounting on steel structures or concrete pedestals. 5. 5. The P.8. Suitable earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be supplied. 5. The dimensions of the terminal box and its opening shall be adequate to enable easy access and working space with use of normal tools.7. 5. PVA insulated. shall be diecast and tested before assembly to detect cracks and voids if any.2.T. 5. collar etc. The secondary terminals shall be brought out in a weatherproof terminal box.4.2. unavoidable joints in the primary winding shall be welded Section-5 : Technical Specification 73 .7. MOUNTING DETAILS:5. at both normal and over current voltage.CORE: The core shall be high grade non-ageing electrical silicon laminated steel of low hystresis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy.7.mm stranded copper or 10 sq. The markings shall be punched metal photo and not painted.

The horizontal spacing between centers of the adjacent studs shall be atleast 45 mm.13. The Voltage Transformers shall be fully type tested by the bidder as per the relevant standard including the type tests mentioned below clause 6.12. 5.1. The primary terminals shall be heavily tinned electrolytic copper of 99. The type tests must have been conducted on 11kVthree phase Voltage Transformers from recognized NABL accredited test laboratories not earlier than 5 years. The studs.2. TESTS FOR 11kV VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS: 6.9% conductivity. SEALING: Provision for sealing secondary terminal compartment and task effectively such that no fraud etc. nuts and washers shall be of brass.2. The following accessories / fittings shall be supplied along with the instrument transformers.type preferably lap type. The tests indicated in IS : 3156 with latest amendments shall constitute the type tests. 5.10. The certificates of type tests already not carried out ( not more than 5 years old) on the day of bid opening by the tenderer in their lab or from any accredited test house on a Voltage Transformer identical in all respects being quoted against this specification must be furnished by the manufacturer along with this quotation as an evidence of compliance of this specification. 5. SECONDARY TERMINALS:Secondary terminal studs shall be provided with atelast three nuts and two plain and two spring washers for fixing the leads. BIDS WITHOUT THE FOLLOWING TYPE TEST REPORTS WILL BE TREATED AS NON-RESPONSIVE. 5. The bidder shall furnish two sets of type test reports as per relevant standards along with the bid. The holes provided for the sealing provision shall be of adequate size to pass the sealing wire of about 14 SWG. duly nickel – plated. Pressure release device Oil level indicator Lifting lugs 5.1. The minimum thickness of tinning shall be 15 microns. The minimum out side diameter of the studs shall be 6mm.14 The purchase order number and date and year of supply and the words “ APEPDCL JBIC” must be etched on the nameplate. PRIMARY TERMINALS: Primary terminals of PTs to which the line connections are made shall have dimensions as per IS 10601/1983. Section-5 : Technical Specification 74 . The details of such welded joints shall be indicated in the drawings submitted with the offer. such as tampering of circuit ( current) is possible.11. 6. In case the tender is not accompanied by the type test certificate board / power utility reserves the right of cancel / reject the tender.

4.1 The purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidders premises.4. at site. Test certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the Bidder. or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type.4.The bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the equipment to be supplied. 6. Determination of errors according to the requirements of the appropriate accuracy class. The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price. The supplier shall carry out all acceptance and routine tests stipulated in the relevant standards in presence of purchaser’s representative. High voltage power frequency wet withstand voltage test.2.5 TEST REPORTS / TEST CERTIFICATES: 6. Tests during manufacture:. ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTING TESTS: The following tests constitute the acceptance and routine tests: Verification of terminal making and polarity.5. Power frequency dry withstand tests on secondary windings. Determination of errors according to the requirements of the appropriate accuracy class. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/ routing testing of the bought out items to pass tests. No delivery extension shall be given for this additional testing. TYPE TEST: The following tests constitute the type tests: Verification of terminal marking and polarity. Temperature rise test.1 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic inspection by the purchaser’s representative. ADDITIONAL TESTS : 6. the supplier is required to modify the design of the material and the material shall be type tested again for the modified design. 6.6. Power frequency / dry withstand tests on primary windings. to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.2 In case of failure in any type test. Section-5 : Technical Specification 75 . without any extra cost to the purchaser. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the purchaser. 6. Impulse voltage test. Power frequency dry withstand tests on secondary windings. Power frequency dry withstand tests on primary windings. acceptance and routine tests.

The bidder shall indicate the sources of all materials.0 DOCUMENTATION : 8. The inspection charges will be borne by the purchaser.1 The purchaser’s representative shall. relays.Units. 8.1 All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organisation (ISO) `A’ series of drawings sheet/India Standards Specifications IS:656.2. unless the inspection is waived off.3 The supplier shall give 15 days advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests. 8. meters. at all times. raw materials and process of manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification. However the purchaser reserves the right to appoint at its cost any inspection agency to carry out the inspection.I. 7. 7. conductor. 7. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro filming.4 No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested.6 TEST FACILITIES : The tests shall be carried out as per relevant Standards and test certificates shall be furnished for approval. be entitled to have access to the works and at all places of manufacture where equipment offered shall be manufactured and the representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the bidder’s works. 7. LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS : Section-5 : Technical Specification 76 . insulating oil. by the purchaser in writing.6 NOTE FOR FOREIGN BIDDERS : The bidder shall indicate the name(s) of reputed inspection agencies and the inspection charges clearly for each lot. 7.2 The Bidder shall keep the purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the progress of manufacture of the offered equipment in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for inspection. The Bidder shall indicate the details of the equipment available with him for carrying out the various tests as per relevant Standards.0 INSPECTION : 7. electrical steel laminations constructional steel etc.6. He shall indicate the name of the supplier and make of vacuum interrupters. All dimensions and data shall be in S. NOTE : The Meters used for conducting tests shall be calibrated periodically at reputed Government Accredited Test Laboratories and test certificates shall be available at works for verification by purchasers representative. and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective.

9. in his judgment is not in full accordance therewith. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied immediately by supplier without any extra cost. Section-5 : Technical Specification 77 . design. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test certificates.1 The successful Bidder shall. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering. proper arrangement for lifting.1 The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case may be. if necessary.0 PACKING & FORWARDING : 9.5 Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of application standards. and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit. elevation and end view dimensions.2 Six sets of the type test reports. submit three sets of final versions of all the above said drawings for purchser’s approval.2.The bidder shall furnish four sets of following drawings along with his offer.2. 8. 8. duly approved by the purchaser. rules and codes of practices. The supplier shall. such as lifting hooks etc. in addition to the five sets to be sent directly to the purchaser.. shall be provided. assembly and constructional drawings of the equipment. shall be submitted by the supplier for distribution before commencement of supply. shall accompany the dispatch consignment. due to improper and inadequate packing. Name plate & schematic drawings. duly approved by the purchaser. Operation manuals. leafless literature etc. The supplier shall within two weeks. Two set of nicely printed bound volumes of operation. Name of the consignee. workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have to power to reject any work or materials which. The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbol. Wherever necessary. maintenance and erection manuals and approved drawings in English language shall be supplied along with each voltage transformer. General outline drawing showing plan. modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for their approval. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier’s risk.2. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within four weeks. submit 23 prints and two good quality report copies of the approved drawings for purchaser’s use.2 Each consignment shall be accompanied with a detailed packing list containing the following information. 9. within 2 weeks of placement of order. 8.

The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice.0 TECHNICAL DEVIATIONS : Any deviation in Technical Specification as indicated in Section-V shall be specifically and clearly indicated in the enclosed Technical deviation format as per Schedule – VII. Total weight of consignment Handling and packing instructions. Bill of Material indicating contents of each package. the material should not get damaged during transit by Rail/Road. 9. The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant standards and shall also contain “APEPDCL . he should ensure the packing is such that.0 SUPERVISION SERVICES : The Purchaser will arrange for unloading of the consignments.V 11. Breaker cranking handle etc. 14. 12. spanners. However. free of cost. 10.4.JBIC”. 9. particulars 1 Name and address of manufacturer 2 Manufacturer’s type and designation 3 Nature of service Section-5 : Technical Specification 78 .Details of consignment. Destination.3 The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of material are approved by the purchaser before dispatch.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS The Bidder shall furnish the guaranteed Technical Particulars as per Annexure – I.0 MANDATORY SPARES & TOOLS : The manufacturer shall provide all necessary mandatory spares like fuses. 13. ANNEXURE –1 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS 11KV THREE PHASE POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS Sl. Manufacturer’s Guaranteed Description No..0 QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS : The quantity and delivery requirement are indicated in Section . enclosed and Schedules IA to IE shall also be filled and submit the same with the Tender.

1 times rated primary voltage with rated secondary H. EPDCL reserves the right to claim the financial loss incurred / suffered due to the failure of voltage transformer during the guarantee period Section-5 : Technical Specification 79 . Insulation characteristic of porcelain bushing. One minute power frequency withstand test on secondary windings High voltage impulse withstand on primary windings. of phases No. Warranty: The supplier will warrant for the satisfactory functioning of the material / equipment as per specification for a period of Five (5) years from the date of commissioning. of windings per phase Winding connections Type of transformer Rated burden per phase Class of accuracy Polarity Rated voltage factor and time Limits of ration and phase angle error Temperature rise of top oil at 1. Type Make Electrical characteristics Total creepage distance One minute power frequency and wet withstand test on primary windings.4 5 a) b) c) d) e) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 a) b) c) d) 18 19 20 21 a) b) 22 23 24 Type of cooling System Characteristics Rated System Voltage Highest system voltage Rated system frequency Nature of neutral earthing Standard system voltage Rated voltage transformation ratio No. Oil Specification Quantity for first filling Total weight of PT with oil Reference specification to which the equipment conform Outline dimensional drawings on mounting details 15.V.

1.) and the rated operating sequence is 3 Min. Hours at 10 Hour rate to an end voltage of 1.1.1. Section-5 : Technical Specification 80 .-3 Min.25 with a continuous low rate floating charge and shall not be less than 1.0 SCOPE: This specification covers the design. – Co or 0-0. : Sulphuric Acid General requirements and methods of test for lead acid storage batteries. 2. 3. 4. In such cases the copy of the standards ( English version) adopted should be enclosed to the tender.3. Capacity of Batteries : 40 AH (in Amp.75V at the end of the emergency discharge).75V per cell). CLIMATE CONDITIONS: The climate conditions under which the equipment shall operate satisfactorily are as indicated in clause 23. : Water for storage batteries.1 page 13 of General and Financial terms and conditions for supply of materials. Voltage / CELL : 2.2. –Co. Nominal Voltage of the : 24 Volts complete Bank 4.3 Sec.1.1.1. TYPE : Sealed and Maintenance Free Lead Acid Battery 4. manufacture.0 V (The cell Voltage shall not exceed 2. Materials meeting any other equivalent International standards which ensures equal or better quality than the standards mentioned will be acceptable. 11kV SF6/Vac. ( in case of 24V) 11kV Vac/SF6 Circuit Breakers simultaneously for about 25 closing operations on each when used without a charger. Circuit Breakers with auto reclosing feature and for VHF sets. Co-3 Min. STANDARDS i) IS 1885 ( part VIII) ii) IS 1651 – 1991 iii) ID 8320 – 1982 iv) IS 1069/ 1964 : : Electro Technical Secondary cells and batteries Stationery Cells & Batteries Lead Acid Battery with tubular positive plates. The Batteries should have a capacity sufficient to operate 2 Nos. BATTERY : 24 Volts 4. The rating of closing and opening coils is 400 Watts (operating time is 100 ms. testing before dispatch supply and delivery of SMF 24V 40 AH Batteries with chargers suitable for out door applications (with rack). RATINGS of 24V-40AH Batteries 4.4.SPECIFICATION OF 24V 40 AH BATTERY WITH CHARGER (SMF LEAD ACID BATTERIES) 1. 4. The Batteries are intended to be used for operating 33kV.-Co.

All parts particularly removable once shall be interchangeable with each other.3. Float Voltage 4.3.2.2. The separators shall be micro porous absorbent glass material with high porosity. Insulation : Constant Voltage and Current limiting charger : 415V.5.3.2. Boost Voltage 4.2.2. 1 Ph. 3ph. 50 HZ.6. All inter cell and nuts and bolts shall be brass and lead plated.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 5. Meter with suitable range shall form part of the supply.2.S.2. whether specifically mentioned or not. The lead plating shall be adequate and tenacious.2 BATTERY CHARGER: 4. TYPE 4. Section-5 : Technical Specification 81 .C ( at reduced capacities) and in locations where the relative humidity between 12% and 100%.3.2.50HZ.C. The battery shall be supplied complete with all required accessories for their efficient operations and such parts / accessories shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification.3.3.S.C.4.3.7. Battery shall be operated without intentional ground. Efficiency 4. The rating of the Batteries is specified at 27 deg.2. / 240V.2. cell testing center zero volt. It shall be of rugged construction designed for long life and for working satisfactorily under the severest operating conditions and shall conform to the relevant Indian / International standard of latest issue. Charger current 4.3. the battery shall be capable of operating satisfactorily in outdoor applications when it is housed in a Cubicle between 5 deg. Current limit 4.) : + or – 1% :5A : < 2% rms : Not less than 75% at full rated load : 105% of rated load : Not less than 5 mega Ohms. The D. The battery shall be capable of withstanding large discharge currents for operating 11kV SF6/Vaccum Circuit Breakers and for VHF sets.3. Charger output 4.2. : : 27V + or – 5% : 29V + or – 5% ( Max. shall work satisfactorily for voltage range of –30% to + 10% with frequency variation + or – 5%. Input Voltage 4. C and 50 deg.2.C.1.2.4. Between AC input terminals and earth 5. BATTERY: The Batteries required under this specification are for supplying aux. 1 No. However. The cells shall be suitably marked as per I. between DC output terminals and AC input terminals. All connections shall be of lead plated copper. D.1. supply to control circuits of Circuit Breakers. Regulation 4.1.4. Ripple 4.

The indicating instruments shall be of flush mounting type with dust tight covers. input terminals for receiving A. All the external cables to be connected to the charger shall be arranged for bottom / side entry with proper cable glands. “ Boost Charge” lamp indications. A manual and automatic changeover arrangement from quick to trickle and vice versa shall be provided. The contact wiring shall be carried out with 2. supply failure. The charger output current does not exceed the set value. wiring cable. The charger should include AC ON / OFF switch preferably MCB of suitable capacity. “Charger on”. The D.2. terminals. with similar arrangements for A.C. BATTERY CHARGER ( FLOAT CUM BOOST): The battery shall be offered with suitable charger requiring low maintenance. value. A bell to be provided for giving alarm with indication in case or AC supply failure / charging failure. load variation of 0-100% and also when all the three variations occur simultaneously. fuse protection for AC and DC. The make of the Ammeters. Such parts shall be deemed to be within the scope of this specification whether specifically mentioned or not. In the event of A.C. The instruments shall be approximately 96 mm square with 270 Degree scale or alternatively black numbers and lettering. a dual range moving coil ammeter (with center zero) of show quick / trickle charging currents and discharge current of battery.C. The equipment shall also include a push button. The battery charging equipment shall be complete with all parts that are necessary for their efficient operation.mm copper conductors.C. The charger shall be of full wave semi controlled thyrister bridge rectifier type with automatic voltage regulator unit and with necessary printed circuit boards. The charger shall be provided with a low voltage cut off arrangement. Spike suppressors preferably on both primary & secondary side) and surge arresters are to be provided. for AC mains supply voltage variation of – 10% or – 30% and frequency variation of + or – 5% and D. Suitable vertical terminable blocks shall be provided.C. The charger shall be provided with a regulator to facilitate controlling of the cell voltage and to stabilize the output voltage within + or – 1% of the set D.5.5 Sq. The charger shall be provided with an automatic current limiting facility such that when charger output current exceeds 10% above the rated current. Section-5 : Technical Specification 82 . Terminal connections provided for wiring shall be stud type and not screw type. Screening circuit to be incorporated for reducing transfer surges. with “ Power On”. voltmeters to be provided should be got approved before supply. with facility to receive the battery wires and the load cable. transformer and relays etc. All wiring for external connections shall be brought to 650V grade single piece mounted terminal blocks with barriers. The internal wiring of the charger shall be carried out with PVC insulated 650V grade standard copper conductor. the available battery capacity shall be automatically connected to the DC load. The charger shall have suitable indicators to visually know its mode of operation. when the battery is on boost charge. Battery reverse polarity protection. Peak inverse voltage of all thyristors / diodes shall be rated for minimum of 600V. Provision should be made to vary the charging current of Trickle high charge in manual mode also. output shall be terminated at D.C.C.

TESTS & TEST CERTIFICATES: The batteries and chargers are to be tested as per relevant I.C. PAINTING: Section-5 : Technical Specification 83 . The date of type test shall not be later than 5 years. All the important component of the charger must be easily accessible for maintenance. The cubicle housing trickle charger along with electrical instruments / components in the upper compartment and the battery in the lower compartment. The cubicle shall be made of suitable M.S. DRAWING & LITERTURE: Detailed Drawings. End cell voltage shall be as per relevant I. No. acid resistive paint is to be provided to interior side of the box.1. which are mounted on a suitable angular or tabular structure. Tenders not accompanied by the above are liable for rejections. repair. and the type test certificates are to be furnished for approval. A suitable hood shall be provided to protect the equipment from rain.2. Suitable provision shall be made for the escape of flames emanating from the cells and heat from charger components. 6. Circuit details and technical literature of batteries shall be enclosed to the offer. SYSTEM BOX ( FOR 24V BATTERY AND CHARGER) The 24V Battery and charger shall be housed in self supporting outdoor cubicle designed with good ventilation to cool the components so as to take care of the temperature effects. 7.S. supply as far as possible. Angles and sheets of not less than 16 SWG to withstand the weight of charger and battery cells and shall be of robust construction. 8. Suitable anti corrosive. shall be completely wheather proof & vermin proof. The door covering the entire unit shall be provided in the front facilitating reading of instruments inspection / service and maintenance of battery cell and charger components periodically. Trouble shooting charts shall be supplied with each unit to trace faults in the charger with voltage and resistances to be measured at various test joists.The service manuals with component details & ckt diagrams are to be supplied with each charger.S. A copy of the test certificates issued by any National Laboratory shall accompany the tender. 2 copies of these drawings circuit details and literature are to be supplied along with each unit in the event of order. The units will be located in OUTDOOR YARD by the side of vaccum circuit breaker. 5. Cell testing center zero voltmeter with suitable range shall form part of the supply. replacement in case of trouble without giving interruption to the total D. The door shall be fixed using screws so as to observe all meter readings and indications without opening the door through a prospect sheet.

to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. Amphere hour capacity at 10 Hrs. 40AH battery with charger of this specification is as follows. ANNEXURE GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS For 24V – 40 AH Batteries. All routine tests and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and purchaser at the time of purchase. that is occasioned during transportation by rail / road. EPDCL reserves the right to claim the financial loss incurred / suffered due to the failure of 24. Manufacturer’s type designation 3. 4. 9. 12. Type of Designation as per ISS 2. Anticorrosive / Acid resistant paint is to be provided for interior side of the system box. scale and grease and all external rough surface cavities and casting shall be filled by metal deposition.75V. without charge. Although the method of packing is left to the discretion of the manufacturer. of plates per cell 5. 9. All external surfaces shall received a minimum of 3 coats of paint. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: The guaranteed technical particulars shall be furnished by the bidder as per Section V Annexure. rate of discharge to 1.Before painting. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities. INSPECTION: 9.1. A) TENDERS: 1. Total No. 40AH battery with charger during the guarantee period.2. The interior parts and internal structural steel work shall be cleaned of all scale and rust by sand blasting or other approved method. all ungalvanised parts shall be completely cleaned and made free from rust. it should be robust for rough handling. The paint shall be guarantee by 5 years from the date of receipt of material. 11.0 WARRANTY: The general terms and conditions the warranty clause applicable to 24. The period of warranty will be 5 years (five years) from the date of commissioning. 10. Nominal cell voltage (Volts) : : : : : Section-5 : Technical Specification 84 . PACKING: The equipment shall be delivered suitably packed. The purchaser has the right to have tests carried out to suppliers cost by an independent agency wherever there is a dispute regarding the quality of supply.

2 Hrs. 30 Min. Short Circuit current (Amps) : 12. Cell discharge rate in Amperes : ( from rated voltage to final discharge voltage) 5 Hrs. Discharge rate in Amp. against time for the type of battery offered) 11. 1 Sec. (Please furnish a graph showing Amps. 10 Min. Internal resistance for each Cell ( micro ohms) 9.mm : 15. i) Ampere hour efficiency % : ii) Watt hour efficiency % 16. Discharge rate in Amp. i) Max. i) Material of Cell containers : ii) Material used for battery box : 13. charging current / Cell : ii) Nominal charging rate : 19. 21.6. Discharge rate in Amp. Type of intercell connection and whether : they are covered with plastic sleeves. i) Dimensions of each 12V Block / Cell : Length mm: Width mm: Height mm: Thickness of container mm: ii) Net weight of the cell complete : Section-5 : Technical Specification 85 . 30 Sec. No. Discharge rate in Amp. Resistance of the battery including interconnection between the Cells (ohms) : : : : 10. Thickness. Discharge rate in Amp. Discharge rate in Amp. i) Whether explosion provisions or vent : plugs provided ii) Whether vent is spill proof : 20. i) Recommended float charge : current and voltage ii) Recommended float charge current and : voltage 17. 1 Min. of spare cells if any in each bank 8. No. Discharge rate in Amp. type and material of separators: 14. Constructional Details and Dimensions : i) Positive plate : ii) Negative Plate : iii) Surface area of placed sq. 1 Hr. Discharge rate in Amp. Time required for boost charging from : from discharged condition 18. of Cells in each bank 7.

C. Output voltage regulation from No load to full load (Volts) : : : : : : : : : : : 9. No. Output Current (Amps) : 8.C. Load limiting feature 15. Special conditions if any B. Maximum permissible temperature rise : over an ambient temperature of 50 degree C. of units 3. Output (KW) 6. Output Voltage (Voltage) 7. 13. Manufacturers type Designation – 1 4. Supply 5.C. Protection over voltage. Accessories provided 24. For CHARGERS: 1. Unit dimensions i) Width ii) Height iii) Depth 16.C. i) Charger Type ii) Type of Rectifier 2.with acid 12V block (Kg. Expected life span of battery 23. D. 12. A. Changeover from boost to trickle : ( Automatic / Manual) 11. provided. Recommended spares C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : Section-5 : Technical Specification 86 . Rated D. Unit shipping weight 17. Rated D. Overall efficiency 14.C. SYSTEM BOX / RACK i) SYSTEM BOX a) Dimension of box b) Weight of box c) Guage of material d) Painting details ii ) RACK a) Dimension & Weight b) Description c) Material D. Rated D. Maximum ripple current : 10.) 22. under voltage : protection reverse polarity protection etc.

C.a) Double Pole Rotary Switch for Incoming : D. Supply b) HRC Fuses for the above : c) Double Pole 10A ON / OFF : Rotary switches d) HRC Fuses for the above Section-5 : Technical Specification 87 .

International and Internationally recognized standards to which these standards generally correspond are also listed below: Indian Standard No. manufacture. Such.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 63 KVA CONVENTIONAL CRGO DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS OF 11/0. 1. ISS-1180 Title Outdoor Distribution Transformer upto and including 100 KVA BS 148. which shall mean latest revisions. However. 1934 IEC Pub 296-1969 IEC Pub 296-1969 DIN 42531 to 33 ASTM B-49 ASTM B-233 IEC 60 099-1 IEC 60 076 IEC-554 IEC-641 International & Internationally Recognized Standard 1SS-335/1993 REC specification Specification for Oil 39/1993 ISS-2099/1973 ISS-7421/1976 ISS-3347 ISS-12444 ISS-5484 ISS-1747/1973 ISS-3070/1974 ISS-5/1961 No.1 The materials shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian/International Standards specifications. The material offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free operation.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design and construction of material. unless otherwise specified herein before.0 STANDARDS: 2. In case the Bidders who Section-5 : Technical Specification 88 . components shall be deemed to be within the scope of bidder’s supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and / or the commercial order or not. the material shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering. amendments/changes adopted and published. which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above would also be acceptable. inspection and testing before supply and delivery at site of 11 KV /433V 63 KVA CRGO Conventional Distribution Transformers. ASTM D1275.433 KV CLASS 1.0 SCOPE: This specification covers design.632 ISS-6600/1972 ISS-9335 ISS-1576 Specification for High Voltage Porcelain bushings Specification for Low Voltage Bushings Specification for Outdoor Bushings Specification for Cu wire rods Specification for Al wire rods Specification for commercial grade Nitrogen Specification for metal Oxide Lightning Arrestors Specification for colors for ready mixed paints Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers Specification for Insulating Kraft paper Specification for Insulating press board Material conforming to other internationally accepted standards. 2. assembly stage testing. D-1473. who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation in a manner acceptable to the purchaser. D-1533. engineering.

255/140-------75/40------- 4.0 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: 4. C. Incase of conflict the order of precedence shall be (i) IS (ii) IEC (iii) Other standards. 11 KV system in which the neutral is effectively earthed and they should be suitable for service under fluctuations in supply voltage upto + 20 % to –30%. C 45 Deg.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS: The Transformers shall be suitable for outdoor installation with three phase.306A 84.1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Item Continuous rated capacity System Voltage (max. 50 c/s.As per IS-1180 latest as per latest---. the provisions contained in this specification shall prevail. LOSSES : The bidder should quote maximum losses at rated voltage and rated frequency permitted at 75 deg. C ---.wish to offer material conforming to the other standards.1. 3. The transformer shall conform to the following specific parameters Sl. of phases Connection HV Connection LV Vector group Type of cooling Tap changing arrangement Over fluxing limit Noise level at rated voltage and frequency Permissible temperature rise over ambient i) Of top oil measured by thermometer ii) Of winding measured by resistance Minimum clearances in air 17 i)HV phase to phase/Phase to earth(mm) ii) LV phase to phase/Phase to earth(mm) Specification 63 KVA 12 KV 11 KV 433V-250V 3. In case of any difference between provisions of these standards and provisions of this specification. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations shall be furnished along with the offer. No load Voltage ratio Full load losses in watts CORE losses in watts KVA rating (V) (Max) (Max) Section-5 : Technical Specification 89 .) Rated Voltage HV Rated Voltage LV Line current HV Line current LV Frequency No.0A 50 c/s +/.5% 45 db 40 Deg. salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule.1 DESIGN PARAMETERS: 4.No.5% Three Delta Star (Neutral brought out) Dyn-11 ONAN Not applicable 12.

4. 4.6. PENALTY FOR EXCESSIVE LOSSES: During testing.772 per KW For fraction of a KW. if the temperature rise exceeds the guaranteed values.3.5.1 of IEC 641-3-2.1. C Bids not meeting the above limits of temperature rise will be treated as NON-RESPONSIVE. All spacers .axial wedges/runners used in windings shall be made of pre-compressed Pressboard. All spacers shall be properly Section-5 : Technical Specification 90 . The delivery as per contract will be counted when the manufacturer provides the new transformer as per specification. proportionate penalty will be recovered.28.5% Bids not meeting the limits indicated above will be treated as NON-RESPONSIVE 4.4.solid.2. Load losses: Rs. TEMPERATURE RISE: The temperature rise over ambient shall not exceed the limits described below: Top oil temperature rise measured by thermometer : 40 deg. INSULATION MATERIAL & CLEARANCES: Materials: Electrical grade insulation Kraft paper of standard make and Press Board of standard make or shall be used in manufacturing transformers. if the impedance values differ from the guaranteed values including tolerance Purchaser also reserves the right to retain the rejected transformer and take it into service until the Bidder replaces it with a new transformer at no extra cost.1. 4.2. No load losses: 2. if it is found that the actual measured losses are more than the values quoted by the bidder penalty shall be recovered from the bidder at double the loss rate as specified below: 1.1.1. Percentage Impedance: The percentage impedance at rated frequency is given below: KVA Rating 63 Percentage Impedance (Subject to tolerance as per IS-2026) 4. conforming to type B 3. C Winding temperature rise measured by resistance : 45 deg.1. Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s works.17. TRANSFORMERS WITH TEMPERATURE RISE AND IMPEDENCE BEYOND GUARANTEED VALUES: Purchaser reserves the right to reject any transformer during the test at supplier’s works.515 per KW Rs.11000/433 11000/433 63 63 CRGO Amorphous 180 W 45 W (No positive allowed) 1235 W 968 W tolerance 4.

4.cutting milling and punching operations shall be carried out in such a way. CRGO Core a) Material : The core shall be generally of high grade cold rolled grain oriented annealed steel lamination having low loss and good grain properties. All axial wedges/ runners shall be properly milled to dovetail shape so that they pass through the designed spacers freely. Section-5 : Technical Specification 91 . between HV coils viii) No. that there should not be any burr and dimensional variations c) Clearances: i) Radial Clearance of LV coil : Not less than 3. of axial wedges between : Shall be 8 (min) LV & HV winding equi-spaced ix) Tap lead insulation : 1.5% without injurious heating at full load conditions and shall not get saturated. The complete design of core must ensure permanency of the core losses with continuous working of the transformers.7. CONSTRUCTION: 4. The bidder should furnish necessary design data in support of this. Manufacturing drawing showing various clearances shall be got approved before commencement of supplies. The value of the maximum flux density allowed in the design and grade of lamination used shall be clearly stated in the offer. Insulation shearing . The transformers shall suitable for loading as per IS-6600/1972.sheared and dovetail punched to ensure proper locking.2. coated with hot oil proof insulation.2. All core clamping bolts shall be effectively insulated. The design calculations with reference to guaranteed values along with watt loss curves/tables shall be furnished along with the Bid.1.0 mm iii) Phase to phase clearance between HV : Not less than 10 mm for 11 KV with a conductors minimum of 2x1 mm press board to cover the tie rods iv) The minimum electrical clearance : Not less than 30 mm between the winding and body of the tank (between inside surface of the tank and outside edge of the winding) v) Minimum end Insulation to earth : Not less than 25 mm vi) (a) No. of coils HV/Phase : 4 (min) vii) Thickness of locking spacers : 10 mm (min).5 mm to core (bare conductor) ii) Radial Clearance between HV & LV : Not less than 11. 4. b) The transformer core shall be suitable for over fluxing (due to combined effect of voltage and frequency) upto 12. bolted together and to the frames firmly to prevent vibration or noise. OVER LOAD CAPACITY : The tenderer should state clearly the percentage overload the transformers can take for a continuous period of 1 hour.1.5 mm thick with paper (minimum) Note: 1. 2.

g) Core Clamping: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) MS channel (75 mm x 40 mm) of adequate size shall be used on top and bottom.2. cn voltages will be carried out. electrical analysis. of 12 mm diameter size of high tensile steel rods shall be effectively insulated. Flat or cut channels will not be accepted. High tensile bolts of 2 x 12 mm to be used in parallel at each end. heavy penalty will be imposed or the suppliers will be black listed. WINDINGS: Section-5 : Technical Specification 92 . bn.mm .c) The operating flux density shall be such that there is a clear safe margin over the over fluxing limit of 12. It is to note that. Channel on LV side to be reinforced at equidistance. Tie-rods : 4 Nos. 50 c/s on the secondary. Subjecting to at least 10% of the transformers to routine tests and no load and load loss measurement. thickness and width of the material. Number of steps of core shall be minimum of 5 Nos.2.55 weber/meter² (Tesla). d) Flux density should not be more than 1. certificate for surfacedefects. Physical inspection. Invoices of supplier Mill’s test certificate Packing list. Note: The tenderer shall furnish the design details of the core construction along with their offer with references to the losses quoted. Diameter of core should not be less than 100 mm . f) Only prime quality CRGO sheets should be used in the transformers and no Second/Defective/Scrap CRGO finds way into transformers. MS channels shall be painted with varnish or oil-resistant paint. Increase of voltage of 433 volts by 12. Therefore regarding quality control following documents are to be furnished before giving the inspection offer. Bill of landing Bill of entry certificate by custom Description of material. if holes/cutting is done for LT lead in order to avoid bending of channel.5%.5% shall not increase the no load current by maximum 6% of fulload current. b) Core base and bottom yoke shall be supported with MS channel (75 x 40 mm) with proper bolting. e) No load current shall not exceed 3% of full load current upto 63 KVA and will be measured by energizing the transformer at 433 Volts. 4. using seconds/defective CRGO sheets or load losses found to be more than stipulated limit. Effectiveness of core area should not be less than 70 sq. a) All top and bottom yoke nuts & bolts and tie rods shall be painted with oil and corrosion resistant paint before use. Test for magnetic balance by connecting the LV phase by phase to rated phase voltage and measurement of an.

The jumper wire should pass through resin bonded paper cylinders and fiber glass sleeves.3.5A/Sq.mm for Aluminium Conductor. LV cross section shall not be less than 56 sq. The HT jumpers from winding to the HT bushing (fuse link) inside the transformer should be provided with lugs to bolts and nuts. This shall be done with ferrules and crimping. Necessary resin bonded paper insulation tubes or backlight bits may be used through.No.mm. Formation of Delta on HV side shall be with 13 SWG super enameled copper wire with multi layered (not less than 13 layers) paper insulation. LV winding shall be in even layers so that neutral formation will be at top. Dimensions tolerance for winding coils shall be within limits as specified in GTP 4. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Characteristic Electric strength (breakdown voltage) Electric dissipation factor (tan delta) at 90 degree C Specific resistance (resistivity) at 27 degree C Specific resistance (resistivity) at 90 degree C Flash point (PM closed) Interfacial tension at 27 degree C Neutralisation value (total acidity) Water content Specified value 30 KV (rms) (min) 0. The characteristics of the oil shall be as follows: Sl. Dimensions of winding coils are very critical. OIL: The transformer shall be supplied complete with first filling of oil and the same shall comply with ISS-335/1983.a) b) c) d) e) Material: Double paper covered insulated electrolytic Aluminum Current density for HV and LV should not be more than 1.2.01 (max) 1500 x 10¹² ohm-cm (min) 35 x 10¹² ohm-cm (min) 140 degree C 0.mm.2 mm shall be provided at 50% turns of the HV coils Inter layer insulation shall be Epoxy dotted Kraft paper.539 sq. Vertical ducts and spacers shall be provided within each coil for HV & LV windings. Dovetail spacers shall be used in between HV coils and they shall be fixed to the vertical ducts which are provided between HV & LV. iv) f) g) h) Wedges of 3. Proper bonding of inter layer insulation with the conductor shall be ensured.05Mg KOH/g (max) 35 PPM (max) Section-5 : Technical Specification 93 .03N/m (min) 0. Test for binding strength conducted. HV cross section shall not be less than 1.

k) Pulling lugs: 4 Nos.76 to 0. e) ‘U’ shaped pressure relief vent of 2” diameter pipe with 0.2. in Kgs. The tank design shall be such that the core and windings can be lifted freely. welded heavy duty lifting lugs of MS Flat 8 mm thick (min. 6 mm continuous (without any joints) Neoprene Nitrile rubber gaskets conforming to IS 4352 Part-II Section-5 : Technical Specification 94 . 12 mm diameter spaced at 100 mm apart. Rating KVA Core Lamination min. The cooling tubes shall not be provided underneath the LV bushing to avoid puncturing of the tubes due to falling down of LV lead on them. The diaphragm shall burst at pressure of 0.mt. Inside of tank shall be painted with varnish. The tank plate shall be of such strength that the complete transformer when filled with oil may be lifted bodily by means of lifting lugs provided. The other end of the vent pipe shall be guarded with wire mesh for preventing the entry of worms and nesting.I.) suitably reinforced by vertical supporting flat welded edgewise below the lug on the side wall. i) Side walls : 3. Winding with insulation Min in Kgs. i) Total minimum weights Sl. 250 Watts/Sq. f) The tank shall be fitted with round cooling tubes minimum of 38 mm outer dia and 1.it shall facilitate easy lifting of core with coils from the tank without dismantling LV bushings. 1 63 KVA 145 55 j) Lifting lugs: 4 Nos. of welded heavy duty pulling lugs of MS plate 8 mm thick (min.25 mm thick bent and directly welded on both sides i.0 mm thickness b) The internal clearance of tank shall such that .Test report for each batch of oil shall be submitted 4.No. Tenderer shall submit the calculation sheets.e.4. l) Top cover fixing bolts of G. for cooling tubes the transformers shall be capable of giving continuous rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise. TANK : a) The transformer tank shall be of robust construction rectangular in shape and shall be built up of tested MS sheets of the following minimum thickness.025 mm copper shim sheet as diaphragm shall be provided on the top of the cover of the tank such that the pressure released should be directed to the ground.15 mm thickness ii) Top and bottom plates : 5.) shall be provided to pull the transformer horizontally.cm.mt upto the oil level. Inside and outside of the tank. c)Manufacturer should carry out all welding operations operations as per the relevant relavant ASME standards and submit a copy of the welding procedure qualifications and welder performance qualification certificate to the customer.mt above oil level and 300W/Sq.95 kg/sq. A minimum of 4 tubes shall be provided for each transformer Or The Transformer tank can be with radiator fins or made of corrugated panels g) Heat dissipation by tank walls excluding top and bottom should be limited to 500W/Sq. d) All joints of tank and fittings shall be oil tight and no bulging should occur during service.

according to the capacity of the transformer. Particular attention shall be paid to the following: a) Proper storage to avoid exposure as well as extremes of temperature. The pipe from conservator tank connecting to main tank shall be of 30mm to 50mm dia.2. Dimension of the conservator shall be indicated in the General Arrangement Drawings. Normally 3% quantity of the total oil will be contained in the conservator.. The conservator shall be provided with the drain plug and a filing hole (30 mm dia) with cover). The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank shall be within 30 mm to 50 mm according to the capacity of the transformer and it should project into the conservator in such a way that its end is approximately 20mm above the bottom of the conservator so as to create a sump for collection of impurities. Accordingly sealing washers for items like drain plug etc are to be provided. The minimum oil level corresponding to (-) 5 Degree C. The cover of the main tank shall be provided with air release plug to enable trapped air to be released unless the conservator is so located as to eliminate the possibility of air being trapped within the main tank. CONSERVATOR The total volume of conservator shall be such as to contain 10% of total quantity of oil. All paints shall be applied in accordance with the paint manufacturer’s recommendations. should be above the sump level.will be placed between tank and cover. SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING GENERAL 4. The bolts outside tank shall have 2 flat washers & one spring washer. n) Sand blasting or chemical treatment method shall be used inside of the tank before tanking. Oil level indicator with minimum oil level marking shall be provided on the side which will be with fully covered detachable flange with single gasket and tightened with MS nut-bolt. o) Gaskets & Sealing washers: 5mm thick oil and heat resistant Neoprene rubberized cork sheets. IS-4253 will be placed between the tank and cover plate. Section-5 : Technical Specification 95 .5 1. conforming to type B/C/ Part-II. m) All transformers shall be capable of giving their continuous rated output without exceeding the specified temperature rise.

6 Cleaning and Surface preparation 4. Sight glasses.2. scale..2. sags. forming and welding has been completed.2 All paints. wrinkles.1 After all machining. scraping and steel wire brushing using manual or power driven tools cannot remove firmly adherent mill-scale shall only be used where blast cleaning is impractical. For external surface one coat of Thermo Setting paint or 1 coat of Zinc chromate primer followed by 2 coats of Polyurethane base paint.Paint Material Followings are the types of pain that may be suitably used for the items to be painted at shop and supply of matching paint to site: 4.7 Protective Coating As soon as all items have been cleaned and within 4 hours of the subsequent drying .6.2 Steel surfaces shall be prepared by Sand / Shot blast cleaning or Chemical cleaning by Seven Tank process including Phosphating to the appropriate quality.2. light fittings and similar such items. 4.4 Chipping. prior to protect nameplates.2.1.2. The paint shall be applied by airless spray according to manufacturer’s recommendations. 4.3. when applied in a normal full coat. 4.The color of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray conforming to No. 4.8.2.b) Surface preparation prior to painting.. conventional spray be used with prior approval of purchase.2. These paints can be either air drying or stoving. e) Shelf life for storage. welding slag or spatter and other contamination prior to any painting. 632 of IS –5 of 1961. 4. where ever airless spray is not possible. 4.8.8.3 All primers shall be well marked into the surface.2.3 The pressure and volume of the compressed air supply for blast cleaning shall meet the work requirements and shall be sufficiently free from all water contamination to ensure that the cleaning process is not impaired.2.5. 4. brush marks or other defects.2. Section-5 : Technical Specification 96 . patchiness. 4.5. Manufacturer to explain such areas in his technical offer clearly. Heat resistant paint (Hot oil proof) / Varnish for inside surface. 4.6.2. all steel work surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust. lettering gauges. c) Mixing and thinning d) Application of paints and the recommended limit on time intervals between coats.6. shall be free from runs. However.8 . particularly in areas where painting is evident.they shall be given suitable anti-corrosion protection 4.6.2.4 The Supplier shall. 4. and the first priming coat shall be applied as soon as possible after clearing.2.5.2.

The paint shall only be applied in the manner detailed by the manufacturer e. Any damaged paint work shall be made good as follows: The damaged area.. Section-5 : Technical Specification 97 . Damaged paintwork 4.5.2.11 Dry Film Thickness 4. unstained and undamaged.. All paints in any one particular system. runs. such coatings may or may not be of contrasting colours.9. brush. 4. This shall be obtained by carefully chamfering the paint edges before and after priming. whether shop or site applied. mud cracking or general softness) the Supplier shall remove the unsatisfactory paid coating and apply another.3.9..10.. Any damage occurring to any part of a painting scheme shall be made good to the same standard of corrosion protection and appearance as that originally employed. leaving the surface clean.9. 4. thinning and pot life. 4.2. shall be cleaned down to bare metal. mixing.11.10. 4.2.2.9. together with an area extending 25 mm around its boundary. A priming coat shall be immediately applied.1.2. The different coast may or may not be of the same colour.2. 4. conventional or airless spray and shall be applied under the manufacturer’s recommended condition. Minimum and maximum time intervals between coats shall be closely followed. Paint applied to items that are not be painted shall be removed at supplier’s expense.1.2. All painting shall be carried out in conformity with both specification and with the paint manufacturer’s recommendation. All prepared steel surfaces should be primed before visible re-rusting occurs or within 4 hours.9.1To the maximum extent practicable the coats shall be applied as a continuous film of uniform thickness and free of pores.10. Particular attention shall be paid to the manufacturer’s instructions on storage.2. In all instances where two or more coats of the same paid are specified. Painting procedure 4.10.g. The repainted surface shall present a smooth surface.4.2. As a general rule. roller. shall originate from one paint manufacturer.2.4. 4.10. whichever is sooner. sags and drips should be avoided. dry film thickness should not exceed the specified minimum dry film thickness by more than 25%.11. 4.2 Each coat of paint shall be allowed to harden before the next is applied as per manufacturer’s recommendation. Where the quality of film is impaired by excess film thickness (wrinkling.9. 4. Overspray.10.2. skips. Chemical treated steel surfaces shall be primed as soon as the surface is dry and while the surface is till warm. followed by a full paint finish equal to that originally applied and extending 50 mm around the perimeter of the original damage.

3KV and above) bushings shall be obtained with the bushing mounted on the transformer.10. No.12.12.10.10.2/50 micro seconds positive wave) b) For 11 KV. 1 2 Paint type Thermo setting paint.10. of coats 01 01 01 02 01 Total Dry film thickness 9min.1 BUSHINGS: a) The porcelain portion of HT and LT bushings shall be of standard make and confirm to IS-2099/1973 (HV).11. The tests as per IS-2099/1962 shall be conducted on the transformer bushings as detailed below.) 20 microns 60 microns 30 microns 25 microns each 35 / 10 microns Liquid paint Zinc chromate (primer) outside Polyurethene (Finish coat) outside Hot oil paint / Varnish inside 4. 4.2The painted surface shall pass the Cross Hatch Adhesion test. 4. “Specification for High voltage porcelain bushings” and IS-7421/1976 for LV IS-3347 shall be outdoor with a minimum creepage distance of 270 mm. 17. Bushings of plain sheds as per IS-3347 shall be mounted on the side of the Tank and not on top cover. 1. Dry flashover voltage Wet flashover voltage Dry I min. Salt spray test and hardness test as per the relevant ASTM standards.3 Particular attention must be paid to full film thickness at edges.5 KV class bushings shall be used and for 0.12.1 KV class bushings shall be used.433 KV.11. Area to be painted inside outside No.1 KV bushing) and 255 mm for HV (3. c) Dimensions of the bushings of the voltage class shall conform to the standards mentioned below: A minimum phase-to-phase clearance of 75 mm for LV (upto 1. The bushing rods and nuts shall be made of brass material 12 mm diameter for both HT & LT.10.4The requirements for the dry film thickness (DFT) of paint and the materials to be used shall be as given below: Sl.4. withstand voltage Impulse withstand voltage (1.1 The painted surface shall be tested for paint thickness. The bushings shall be fixed to the transformers on sides with straight pockets and in the same plane. withstand voltage Wet half min. Section-5 : Technical Specification 98 . NOTE: Supplier shall guarantee the painting performance requirement for a period of not less than 5 years 5. Tests 4.

7. All other tests as per relevant standards shall be applicable. between stem of the internal and external bushings. For aluminum. 5kA metal Oxide Lightning Arrester with minimum creepage distance of 270 mm and with disconnector as per IS-3070/Part-I/1974 and IEC-99-1 (latest version). The terminal arrangement shall not require a separate oil chamber not connected oil in the main tank. 1V. either in the windings or some other part of the transformer. Arcing horns shall not be provided and instead brass caps shall be provided. one number per phase shall be fitted with the HV bushings with GI earth strip of 25 x 4 mm connected to the body of the transformer with necessary clamping arrangements. High voltage phase windings shall be marked both in the terminal boards inside the tank and on the outside with capital letters 1U. i) The bushings shall be of reputed make supplied by those manufacturers who are having manufacturing and testing facilities for manufacture of HT insulators. This fuse is mounted normally inside of the primary bushing for all three phases and is connected to the high voltage winding through a terminal block.10.d) The bushings shall be fixed on side with pockets in the same plane. The metal oxide lighting arresters with disconnector shall be reputed make. Standard make Aluminium Brazing rods shall be used. e) Brazing of all inter connections.e. k) The LV bushing and HV bushing stems shall be provided with suitable non detachable terminal connectors so as to connect the jumper without disturbing the bushing stem. This has to protect that part of the electrical distribution system which is ahead of the distribution transformer from faults which occur inside the distribution transformer i. l) Internal HV fuses on the HT side of transformer: Specification for the HT fuses : Expulsion/any other suitable type of fuse placed in series with the primary winding.2 LIGHTNING ARRESTERS: 9KV. g) The LV bushings shall be so located that even under the hottest conditions the level of the transformer oil shall be below the opening meant for fixing the LV bushings. f) In the case of LV bushing. The neutral point terminal shall be indicated by the letter 2n. 2w.1 of IS 2029. It shall be ensured that this fuse does not blow for faults on the secondary side (LT side) of the transformer m) The Name plate with vector diagram shall clearly indicated the method adopted for marking the terminals both outside and interior.1 of IS – 1180 part I and creepage distance as per clause No. h) The design of the internal bushing for LV shall be such as to provide adequate earth clearance as stipulated in clause No. 2. Section-5 : Technical Specification 99 . 1W and low voltage winding for the same phase marked by corresponding small letters 2u. 2v. The LV jumpers and bushing materials shall be selected and designed for this condition. jumpers from winding to bushing shall have cross section larger than the winding conductor. 5. the internal busing shall be made of tough insulating material like epoxy and shall have embedded stem and a strong coupling connection (screwed) properly secured with a split pin shall be used.

screw threads. Rating and terminal marking plates non-detachable – 1 No. except when otherwise approved for terminal board studs or relay stems. Lifting lugs – 4 Nos.4 MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT: The under base of all transformers shall be provided with two 75 x 40 mm channels 460 mm long as shown in REC specification 2/73 with holes to make them suitable for fixing on a platform or plinth. studs. shall be provided) Disconnector type Metal oxide lightning Arrestors (3 Nos. with bimetallic terminal connectors. except high tensile steel bolts and spring washers which shall be electro-galvanized / plated.2 Nos. 5. for Top cover.3 FASTENERS: All bolts. Each bolt or stud shall project at least one thread but not more than three threads through the nut. earth strip 25x4 mm of 12 feet length. Protective washers of suitable material shall be provided front and back or the securing screws. & length may be mentioned (minimum 4 Nos. All nuts and pints shall be adequately locked.5. The length of the screwed portion of the bolts shall be such that no screw thread may form part of a shear plane between members. ‘U’ shaped Pressure relief vent to direct the oil to the ground with 0.025 mm copper diaphragm on the top of the top cover for breaking at a pressure of 0. Wherever possible bolts shall be fitted in such a manner that in the event of failure of locking resulting in the nuts working loose and falling off.95 kg. Pulling lugs – 4 Nos. Cooling tubes No. Bolts or studs shall not be less than 6 mm in diameter except when used for small wiring terminals.) with G. HV bushing – 3 Nos. with bimetallic terminal connectors. All ferrous bolts. If bolts nuts are placed so that they are inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners. FITTINGS: The following standard fittings shall be provided. Base channel 75x40 mm Rating plate indicting I)Tank & over all dimensions II)Wt content of (a) Core (b) Windings (c) Tank & fittings (d) Wt/Qty. by hot dip galvanizing. of oil (e) overall Weight 5 years guarantee embossed plate welded below name plate Section-5 : Technical Specification 100 . Appropriate precautions shall be taken to prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals. nuts and washers placed in outdoor positions shall be treated to prevent corrosion. Taper washers shall be provided where necessary. the bolt will remain in position. for main tank & 2 Nos. LV bushings – 4 Nos. Earthing terminals with lugs .I. or the technical equivalent. Stiffener angle minimum 40 x 40 x 5 mm and vertical strip of 50 x 5 mm flat. HT fuse links – 3 Nos. bolt heads and nuts shall comply with the appropriate Indian Standards for metric threads. pipe threads. Thermometer pocket with cap – 1 No. special spanners shall be provided.76 to 0.

6. The following routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with the details specified in IS:1180 (Part-I) and IS:2026 or as agreed upon between the EPDCL and the manufacturer. 6. 6.1. The following type tests must have been conducted on the material offered as per the relevant IS in recognized laboratory as per the latest revision of the Technical Specification and the date of type test will not be later than 3 years. C) 30 deg.2.) ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TEST: All transformers shall be subjected to routine tests at the manufacturer’s works. 19)Silicagel breather. the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by the supplier in the proforma for “Guaranteed Technical Particulars” furnished in this specification or acceptance value specified in this specification.) Permissible flux density and over fluxing ( IS-1180/Part-I/1989.1. (Note: The terminal connector arrangement can also be integral part of bushing rod) The bidder shall furnish cost analysis for each rating of transformer.1. 6. C Max (90 deg.16)Oil filling provision 17)Oil level gauge indicating the positions of oil marked as follows Min (-5 Deg. For all type and acceptance tests. The type. acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture. TESTS: 6. Measurement of winding resistance (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of voltage ratio and check of voltage vector relation ship (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of Impedance voltage/short circuit impendence and load loss (IS 2026 (part-I) : 1977) Measurement of No Load loss and current (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of Insulation resistance (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of over voltage with stand test(IS 2026 (part-3) :1981) Separate source voltage withstand test(IS 2026 (part-3) :1981) Impulse voltage test: (IS-2026 (Part-III)/1981 Temperature rise tests(IS 2026 (part-II) :1977) Short Circuit test (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Air pressure test ( IS-1180/Part-I/1989.1. shall be carried out on the Distribution Transformers as per the IS-2026 and IS-1180 latest revision.2 TYPE TESTS: The bidder will furnish Type Test Results. whichever is more stringent for that particular test. The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed in ISS mentioned above. Measurement of winding resistance (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of voltage ratio and check of voltage vector relation ship (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of Impedance voltage/short circuit impendence and load loss (IS 2026 (part-I) : 1977) Section-5 : Technical Specification 101 . C) 18)Drain cum sampling valve. The Bids received without type test reports will be treated as Non-Responsive.

1 SPECIAL TEST : Special tests as specified in IEC 60 076 – 1993 in clause 10. 6. acceptance and routine tests. Measurement of no load current at 112. to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications. Tests during manufacture: The Bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the Distribution Transformers to be supplied. 6.5 TEST REPORTS: 6.4. 9. No delivery extension shaft be given for this additional testing.4. or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid type. the supplier is required to modify the design of the material and the material shall be type tested again for the modified design. Checking of name plate and marking on the tank. The purchaser reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the bought out items. Section-5 : Technical Specification 102 . TESTS AT SITE: The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all tests on Transformer after arrival at site and the manufacturer shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service conditions.4 ADDITIONAL TESTS: The purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other tests (s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidders premises. oil quantity.5% of rated voltage. Physical verification of core coil assembly and measurement of flux density of one unit of each rating. Checking of di-electric strength of transformer oil. at site. The supplier shall give 15 days for local supply/30 days in case of foreign supply advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing the acceptance and routine tests. dimensions fittings and accessories. finish and workmanship as per purchaser order and contract drawings. 6.. material.5. 6. in every inspection with reference to short circuit test report.4.Measurement of No Load loss and current (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of Insulation resistance (IS 2026 (part-I) :1977) Measurement of Induced over voltage with stand test(IS 2026 (part-3) :1981) Separate source voltage withstand test(IS 2026 (part-3) :1981) 8.1 Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic inspection by the purchaser’s representative.41. 10.1.3 The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price. 6. tank thickness. If the losses measured at site are found more than the guaranteed losses penalty will be levied on all the transformers of the purchase order as per clause number 4. 12.3 shall also be undertaken with an agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. without any extra cost to the purchaser.2 In case of failure in any type test. Checking of weights. 11.

The supplier shall get one transformer tested for impulse and short circuit tests for every 100 transformers supplied or part thereof. fittings. No. area of conductor bare and with insulation. Resistance of windings cold (at or near the test bed temp. Ratio.2 The Bidder shall maintain test certificates of tests conducted during manufacture. The transformer to be tested in a batch of 100 transformers will be randomly selected by APEPDCL. 6. distance of core centers. clearances and winding details shall accompany the tender. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiral gray confirming to No.9 FINISHING: The exterior of the transformer and other ferrous fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned. position of internal. shall have access to you or your sub-contractor’s works at any time/stage during working hours for the purpose of inspecting the materials during manufacturing of the plant and equipment as well as active part inspection during acceptance tests for testing and may select test samples from the materials going into plant and equipment. core area grade of laminations.P. Section-5 : Technical Specification 103 . of coils.5. Load losses at rated current and normal frequency. 7. No. 6. Tank dimensions.0 INSPECTION: APEPDCL shall arrange 3rd party agency at EPDCL’s cost for inspecting each unit/units offered for inspection.632 of IS 5 of 1961 colour for ready mixed paints. clearances between leads within the transformer.C. NOTE: The Meters used for conducting tests shall be calibrated periodically at reputed Government Test Laboratories and test certificates shall be available at works for verification by purchasers representative. 3rd party inspecting agency of A. fixing details of the core and coils should also indicated.. Impedance Voltage test. 6.P.8 TOLERANCES: unless otherwise specified herein the test value of the transformers supplied should be within the tolerance permitted in the IS: 2026 on the guarantee values. Drawings of internal constructional details.D.L. Separate source voltage withstand test. shall also be furnished with tender. scraped and given a primary coat and the two finishing coats of durable oil and weather resisting paint of enamel.7 DRAWINGS & LITERATURE: a) Completely dimensioned drawings indicating general arrangements and details of fittings.E. 6. Induced over voltage withstand test.) Insulation resistance. No load current and losses at service voltage and normal frequency. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the purchaser.6. polarity and phase sequence & winding resistance.6 TEST FACILITIES: The following test facilities shall be available at bidders works. of turns per coils material of bushing metal parts conservator details heat dissipation calculations etc.

Wherever necessary. Each consignment shall be accompanied with a detailed packing list containing the following information. However. As soon as the materials are ready. The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant standards and shall also contain “APEPDCL” – JBIC Section-5 : Technical Specification 104 . DOCUMENTATION: All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organization (ISO) ‘A” series of drawings sheet/India Standards Specifications IS:656. so that arrangements can be made for inspection.D.C. accredited representative of APEPDCL to A. you shall duly advise APEPDCL with the routine test certificates along with all particulars in proof of satisfying the clause No.P.You shall provide the facilities for testing such samples at any time.E. The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice. and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit.. The despatches shall be made only after the inspection is completed by 3rd party inspecting agency.P. 10% of the offered quantity for inspection will be inspected at the premises of the supplier by 3rd party inspecting agency. The easily damageable materials shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbol.L. The A.C. Rail/Road should not damage the material during transit. The supplier shall ensure that the purchaser before despatch approves the packing list and bill of material.E.0 Quality Assurance Plan to carryout the tests before 3rd party inspecting agency of APEPDCL. The supplier shall keep this office informed 15 days in advance about the manufacturing programme. Details of consignment Destination.D. shall be provided. such as lifting hooks etc. Name of the consignee. he should ensure the packing is such that. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit. Total weight of consignment Handling and packing instructions.8. proper arrangement for lifting.’s satisfaction.P. All dimensions and data shall be in S.L. 5. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for microfilming.12 regarding CRGO core laminations and clause No. due to improper and inadequate packing. Supplier without any extra cost shall supply any material found short inside the packing cases immediately. reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance of routine tests of the bought out items. Units. Bill of material indicating contents of each package.I.P. PACKING & FOR WARDING: The equipment shall be packed in creates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case may be.

L. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: The tenderer shall furnished Annexures of IA.55 weber/sq. The period of warranty will be 5 years (five years) from the date of commissioning. 12. TECHNICAL DEVIATIONS: Technical deviations to Section-V Technical specification shall be specifically and clearly indicated.) Maximum temperature rise of a) Windings by resistance method b) Core by Thermometer c) Oil by Thermometer Magnetising (No load) current at Normal Voltage Maximum Voltage Core loss in watts at 75 deg.2 45ºC Max. over an ambient of 45ºC Shall be furnished 40ºC Max. Max.do 11000V/433 – 250V 6 7 8 9 10 11 Section-5 : Technical Specification 105 . WARRANTY: The general terms and conditions the warranty clause applicable to Distribution Transformers of this specification is as follows. EPDCL reserves the right to claim the financial loss incurred / suffered due to the failure of DTR during the guarantee period. 13.5% Shall be furnished 0. ANNEXURE – IA GUARANTEED & OTHER PARTICULARS FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS (To be furnished by the Manufacturer) Sl.11. C 63KVA Shall be M-4/ superior grade Not more than 1. IB.mm Not more than 12. 1 2 3 4 5 Description Make & Manufacturer Place of Manufacture Voltage Ratio Voltage per turn (Volts) Rating in KVA Core Material used and Grade Flux density Over fluxing without saturation (Curve to be furnished by the Manufacturer in support of his claim) Thickness of core plates Power factor of magnetizing current (lag. current Shall be furnished 63 KVA To be furnished by the manufacturer . II & III. No. over an ambient of 45ºC Not to exceed 3% of F.

C Full load current HV : LV : Current density used for HV winding LV winding Clearances Core & LV LV & HV HV Phase to phase (with a min.mm 1.mm with 5% tolerance 3.25 mm thickness(min) Shall be furnished 20 Shall be furnished 21 Shall be furnished Shall be furnished Shall be furnished 22 23 24 Section-5 : Technical Specification 106 . C Radiation: 1) Heat dissipation by tank walls exclusive top & bottom 2) Heat dissipation by cooling tube 3) Dia & thickness of cooling tube 4) Whether calculation sheet enclosed for selecting cooling and area to ensure that the transformer is capable of giving continuous rated output without exceeding temperature rise is enclosed. No. 63 KVA 180 W for CRGO/45 W Amorphous Shall be furnished Shall be furnished To be furnished 1235 W for Amorphous 3. Inter layer insulation provided in design for 1) Top & Bottom layer 2) In between all layer 3) Details of end insulation 4) Whether 3.5 CRGO/968W for for 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Shall be furnished. Description Normal Voltage Maximum Voltage Resistance of windings at 20 Deg.2 mm wedges are provided at 50% turn of the HV coil Insulation materials provided For Conductors (1) HV (2) LV For Core Particulars of metal oxide Lightning arrestor Medium of free space above oil level. 38 mm Dia 1.5 A/ sq.306 A 84 A 1.5 mm 11 mm 10 mm 25 mm 30 mm 4. C (with 5% tolerance) HV Winding (ohms) LV winding (ohms) Reactance of winding/phase % of end turn reinforcement Full load losses (watts) at 75 Deg. of 2 x 1 mm press board to cover tie rods) End insulation clearance to Earth Any point of winding to tank % Impedance at 75 Deg.5 A/sq.Sl.

8 P. 7 8 9 10 Make & Manufacturer To be furnished by the manufacturer Place of Manufacture .ANNEXURE – I B GUARANTEE & OTHER PARTICULARS FOR DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORER (To be furnished by the Manufacturer) Sl. 100% load 75% load 50% load 25% load Regulation at Unity P. C Shall be furnished Unity P. obtain maximum efficiency at 75% 125% load load. & The transformer shall be designed to 0. Shall be furnished Tank & Fittings Shall be furnished Oil in litres Shall be furnished Total Weight Section-5 : Technical Specification 107 .do Voltage Ratio 11000V/433 – 250V Rating in KVA 63 KVA Efficiency at 75 Deg.F. at Deg. Shall be furnished 0.F. for CRGO/ Shall be furnished for Amorphous Windings 55 Kgs.F. F. No.8 P. 1 2 3 4 Description 63 KVA 5 6. C Flash Test Shall be confirmed HV 28 kV/50Hz for 1 minute LV 3 kV/50Hz for 1 minute Over potential Test Double Voltage & Double Shall be confirmed frequency for 1 minute Impulse test AS per IS to be confirmed Weight content of Core lamination 145 Kgs.

of conductors in parallel c) Total area of cross section (sq. Core (minimum 145 Kgs) Section-5 : Technical Specification 108 .) Tesla Wt.) 2) Grade of oil used 63 KVA Shall be furnished EHV grade confirming to latest version IS 335 (Grade shall be furnished) Shall be furnished Shall be furnished 11 3) Maker’s name 4) BDV at the time of filling Transformer 1) Overall length x breadth x height 2) Tank length x breadth x height 3) Thickness of plates for Side plate (min.55 Tesla max.5 Amp/sq.mm) 2) LV a) Strip size b) No. for first filling (min.S. No. Description Oil Data 1) Qty.15 5 13 Size of the wire used 1) HV a) SWG/mm b) Dia Area (sq. No. 4) Dry flash over voltage kV at 50 C/s 5) Wet flash over voltage kV at 50 C/s Shall be furnished HT Fuse links ANNEXURE – II ADDITIONAL DETAILS Sl.mm) Shall be furnished (current density for HV & LV should not be more than 1.) 12 Shall be furnished Shall be furnished 3.) Top & bottom plate (min.mm (with a tolerance of 5% for LV) 14 15 16 Is the name plate gives all particulars are required in Shall be furnished tender Particulars of Bushings HV/LV Shall be furnished 1) Maker’s name 2) Type IS-3347/IS-1180 3) Rating as per I. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description 63 KVA Core Grade Core diameter (Should not be less than 100 mm) Mm Gross Core area Net core area (Effective ness of core area should not cm be less than70 sq. mm) Flux density (1.Sl.

of HV coils/phase (minimum 4 Nos. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm % Mm mm ANNEXURE – III SOURCE OF MATERIALS/PLACES OF MANUFACTURE.) Height of LV Winding Height of HV winding ID/OD of LV winding ID/OD of HV winding Size of the duct in LV winding Size of the duct between HV & LV HV winding to LV clearance (minimum 11 mm) HV winding to tank clearance (minimum 30 mm) Calculated impedance (4. of LV Turns No.) No. Kg. 1. TESTING AND INSPECTION Sl. of LV coils/phase (Wt. of parallels Current density of LV winding (Max. both for HV & LV wdg.7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Loss per Kg. No. of core at the specified Flux Density Core window height Center to center distance of the core No.mm with 5% tolerance) Current density of HV winding (max 1. Of the HV winding for transformers No. of HV Turns Size of LV conductor bare/covered Size of HV conductor bare/covered No.mm) Wt.5A/sq.5%) HV to earth creepage distance LV to earth creepage distance Watts mm mm mm Kg. 1 2 3 4 Item Laminations Aluminium Core plates Steel Castings/sections Source Material of Place Manufacture of Place of testing and inspection Section-5 : Technical Specification 109 .5A/sq. Of the LV winding for transformers Wt. Should not be less than 55 Kgs.

025 mm Cu diaphragm pressure relief vent generally conforming to IS-1180/part-I & II of 1979 & IS-2026/1977 latest versions where specified otherwise with first filling of oil generally as per IS-335/1983 (latest version) and as per specification. outdoor type. No. Description of Material 11KV/433 – 250V 63 KVA Oil immersed naturally cooled three phase. 50 Hz double wound. CRGO core Conventional Distribution Transformers top cover fixed with nut and bolt and neoprene gasket arrangement with double paper covered aluminium winding. 1 Section-5 : Technical Specification 110 . with 0.5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Tank Insulating Cylinders HT Fuse Links Bushing HV/LV Oil Insulated winding wire Las SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT Sl.

When subject to tension up to 50% of the ultimate strength of the conductor. 5. The conductors shall be constructed of heat treated Aluminium-Magnesium Silicon alloy wires containing approximately 0. STANDARD The conductors shall comply in all respects with the latest version of REC 33/84 R (1991) specification and IS 398 (Part-IV) 1994.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS SCOPE: This specification provides for the manufacture.C v) Maximum relative humidity 100 % vi) Average number of thunderstorm days per annum 50 vii) Average number of dust storms 10 viii) Average number of rainy days per annum 90 ix) Average rainfall per annum 925 mm x) Number of months of tropical monsoon conditions 4 months xi) Maximum wind pressure 260 kg/sqm. testing before despatch.5% Magnesium and o. sharpedges. The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as spills and splits.C ii) Maximum average ambient temperature over a 24 Hour period in shade 40 deg. 70 deg. SIZE AND PROPERTIES: The sizes and properties of Aluminium Alloy Conductors of various sizes shall be as given in Appendix –I and Appendix –II enclosed which also indicates the values of resistance and weights. The surface shall not depart from the cylindrical form nor any part of the component parts or strains move relative to each other in such a way as to get out of place and disturb the longitudinal smoothness of the conductor. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS: i) Peak ambient temperature in shade 50 deg. The surface of conductor shall be free from points. xii) Altitude not exceeding 100 meters above MSL MATERIALS: The material offered shall be of best quality and workmanship. supply and delivery of All Aluminium Alloy (Aluminium + Magnesium +Silicon) Standard Conductors for overhead Power Transmission purposes.5 deg.C iii) Maximum temperature attainable by an object exposed to sun. Section-5 : Technical Specification 111 . abrasions or other departures from smoothness on uniformity of surface contour that would increase radio interference and corona losses.5% Silicon and having the mechanical and electrical properties specified in Appendix I enclosed.C iv) Minimum ambient temperature 7.

6324 x 10-6 Kg/Sq.1 The conductor shall be wound in non-returnable reels or drums conforming to IS: 1961 “ Specification for reels and drums for bare wire” or the latest version thereof. The lay of the stranding shall be right handed. The conductor shall be properly lagged on the drums and the method of lagging to be employed may be clearly stated in the tender. of wires in conductors 7 PACKING AND MARKING: 11. 6 wire layer Min. if any: Drum number on identification number Size of conductor Number and lengths of piece of conductor in each drum Gross mass of the packing Net mass of conductor 11.1 percent 7. The reels shall be such construction as to ensure delivery of conductor in the field free from displacement and damage and should be able to withstand all stresses due to handling and the stringing operation so that conductor surface is not dented. JOINT IN WIRES: No joints are permitted in seven strand conductors. a) The Co-efficient of linear expansion per deg.1. LAY-RATIO: The lay ratio of different layers shall be within the limits given below:No. scratched or damaged in any way during manufacture.C shall be 23. The wires used in construction of a stranded All Aluminium Alloy Conductor (AAAC) shall. 10 14 Section-5 : Technical Specification 112 . Lagging shall not be nailed or bolted in place. The lay ratio shall be within the limits given under Col. before stranding. The wires shall be evenly and closely stranded. transport and erection. The drums shall be marked with the following:Manufacturer’s Name: Trade Mark.2.mm 8.10 below:9. satisfy all requirements of REC 33/84 (R_1991) and IS 398 (Part-IV) 1994 with latest amendment thereof. It should be notched to suit the reel and held in place by steel strapping.TOLERANCE: The following tolerances shall be permitted on nominal diameter of Tolerance on nominal diameter of aluminium alloy wires . Max. STRANDING: 9.0x10-6 b) Final modulus of elasticity (Practical) 0.2.

11.3. The conductor drum should be suitable for wheel mounting. Before reeling, the cardboard or other suitable materials shall be secured to the drum and inside flanges of the drums. After reeling the conductor the exposed surfaces should be wrapped with suitable soft material to protect the conductor from dirt and grit. 11.4. The gross weight of each package shall not exceed the following limits, subject to a tolerance of + 10%. For 100 sq.mm Al.Alloy area (7/4.26mm AAAC) 2000 Kg. For 55 sq.mm Al.Alloy area (7/3.15mm AAAC) 1500 Kg. 11.5.The standard length for AAAC shall be as noted below. Longer length shall be acceptable. Short lengths of not less than 50% of the standard length shall be acceptable to the maximum extent of 10% of the quantity ordered for each size. 100 sq.mm 55 sq.mm TESTS: The following tests shall be carried out on wires used for AAAC as per detailed procedures given in the IS 398 Part-IV/1994. i) ii) iii) Breaking load test Elongation test Resistance Conductor Conductor 1.1 KM 1.7 KM

The rejection and retest procedure shall be followed as stipulated in IS: 398/Part-IV 1994, or any other later amendments there of. 13. INSPECTION:

All tests and inspection shall made at the place of manufacturer unless otherwise specifically agreed up on by the purchaser. The manufacturers shall afford the Inspector representing the purchaser all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material is being furnished in accordance with this specification. The purchaser has the right to have the tests carried out at his own cost by an Independent agency whenever in dispute regarding the quality of supply. CHECKING AND VERIFICATION OF LENGTH OF CONDUCTORS: The supplier/manufacturer of conductor should arrange for the inspection by the representative of the purchaser specially authorized for this purpose. Atleast 5% of the total number of drums of conductors taken at random should be checked to ascertain the length of conductor adopting the following method. the drum with the AAA conductor shall be weighed, four or five empty reels normally used for winding the AAAC shall also be weighed. Net weight of the AAAC shall be calculated by subtracting average weight of the empty reel from the Gross weight of the drum containing AAAC. Having known the weight of the AAA Conductor and other parameters of the conductor its length can be computed.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

113

ALTERNATIVELY Transfer the AAAC from one reel to the other while at the same time measuring the AAAC so transferred by means of a meter. Arrangements should be made available in the works of the manufacturer for transferring the conductor from one reel to another at the same time measuring the length of conductor so transferred by means of a meter. GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:The Bidder shall furnish the guaranteed technical particulars as per Appendix – III enclosed and submit the same with his tender.

WARRANTY: The general terms and conditions the warranty clause applicable to conductor of this specification is as follows. The period of warranty will be 5 years (five years) from the date of commissioning. EPDCL reserves the right to claim the financial loss incurred / suffered due to the failure of conductor during the guarantee period. APPENDIX –I SIZE AND PROPERTIES OF ALUMINIUM ALLOY WIRES USED IN THE CONSTRUCTION OF STRANDED ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONDUCTOR Diameter Nominal Size Mm 1 Mm 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.26 Min. mm 2 mm 1.98 2.47 3.12 4.22 Max. mm 3 mm 2.02 2.53 3.18 4.30 Cross Sectional Mass area of Nominal Kg./ km diameter 4 5 Sq.mm Kg./Km. KN 3.142 4.909 7.793 14.25 8.482 13.25 21.04 38.48 Minimum breaking load after stranding 6 Resistanc e at 20 deg.C Maximu m 7 ohm/KM 10.653 6.790 4.290 2.345

Standard 8 Ohm/KM 10.344 6.620 4.170 2.280

0.92 1.44 2.29 4.18

Section-5 : Technical Specification

114

APPENDIX –II PROPERTIES OF ALUMINIUM ALLOY STRANDED CONDUCTORS Nominal Aluminiu m area 1 Sq.mm 100 55 34 22 Stranding Sectional and wire area dia 2 Mm 7/4.26 7/3.15 7/2.50 7/2.00 3 Sq.mm 99.77 54.55 34.36 21.99 Approxim Approxim ate over all ate Mass dia 4 Mm 12.78 9.45 7.50 6.16 5 Kg./KM 272.86 149.20 94.00 60.16 Calculated resistance at 20 deg.C standard 6 Ohm/KM 0.3390 0.6210 0.9900 1.541 Approximate calculated breading load 7 KN 29.26 16.03. 10.11 6.45

Section-5 : Technical Specification

115

GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR ALL ALUMINIUM ALLOY CONDUCTORS S.No. 1. 100 Sq.mm Maker’s Name and Address Aluminium alloy rods Complete Alloy Strand Stranding and diameter of Aluminium Alloy Strand Approx. Overall diameter of conductor in mm Standard nominal Aluminium Alloy area in Sq.mm Calculated Aluminium Alloy area in Sq.mm Minimum ultimate tensile strength of Aluminium alloy wire strand in Kg Guaranteed ultimate tensile strength of conductor in Kg Minimum breaking load in Kg For Aluminium Alloy Strand Aluminium Alloy conductor Maximum working tension of conductor Apprx. Weight in kg per KM of Aluminium Alloy conductor Resistance in Ohm per KM at 20 Deg. C Continuous maximum current rating of conductor in still air at 45 deg. C ambient temperature Temperature rise for the above current(Deg.C) Modulus of Elasticity of Aluminium Alloy conductor (Kg./Sq.mm) Co-efficient of linear expansion per degree centigrade for Aluminium Alloy Strand Alloy conductor Standard length of each piece in KM Approx. Dimension of the reel in Cms Gross weight of the reel including weight of the conductor Kg (with tolarance of +10%) Standard according to which the conductor will be manufactured and tested Other particulars 55 Sq.mm

: HINDALCO /BALCO : M/s Arrow Cables Ltd., : 7/4.26 mm 7/3.15 mm : 12.78 : 100 : 99.77 : 30 : 31.30 : : : : 4.40 29.26 746 272.86 9.45 55 54.55 30 32.70 2.41 16.03 409 149.20

2. 3 4. 5 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

: 0.339 0.6210 : As per IS 398 (Part-IV) 1994 : As per IS 398 (Part-IV) 1994 : 0.6324 x 106 0.6324 x 106

13 14

15. 16. 17 18 19.

: : : : :

23.0 x 10-6 23.0 x 10-6 1.2 +/-5% 1200x520x485 755

23.0 x 10-6 23.0 x 10-6 1.8 +/-5% 1200x520x485 700

: IS: 398 (Part IV) 1994 : ---

Section-5 : Technical Specification

116

sand. The contractor shall arrange for tree cuttings or tree branches cutting also.E..0 WAY LEAVES AND TREE CUTTINGS: The contractor shall submit proposals for way leaves and right of way.0 SCOPE: The works of erection of 33KV and 11KV lines is on partial turnkey basis. after inspecting the surveyed route and the revised route map shall be given for final approval by the Engineer in charge in writing to the contractor. erection of the line./280 Kg WL PSCC POLES & ERECTION OF 11KV LINE OVER 8. In the course of surveying by the contractor. as per specification. the deviations must be brought to the notice of the APEPDCL’s Engineer.1Mtr. 3./280Kg PSCC poles with 100Sqmm AAA conductor at an average span of 65Mtrs. Permission will be obtained by the APEPDCL within reasonable time for the contractor shall give which due notices. The scope covers the survey of the proposed route. washers./200 Kg WL PSCC POLES 1. transport of material to the locations./200 Kg PSCC poles with 55Sqmm AAA conductor at an average span of 65Mtrs. The width of tree clearance to be adopted for the lines of various voltages is as detailed below: 11 KV line (Normal Line): Section-5 : Technical Specification 117 . 2. cement. tree clearance wherever necessary. PSCC poles. The 11KV line is to be erected on 8. as given in Annexure-1 (A) are to be procured by the contractor cost of which shall be included in the bid. clamps. testing of the line and handing over to the A. The 33KV line is to be erected on 9. top. water.P. Materials such as steel.E.B. any conspicuous variations in the change and physical feature to those indicated in route map and as actually existing as noticed. cost of bolts and nuts etc. Rules 1956 as amended from time to time and with the Indian Telegraph Act 1889 so that the necessary provisions therein may be followed.P.0 GENERAL: The contractor should be well acquainted with the I.0 SURVEY OF THE ROUTE: The tentative route map of the line to be erected will be furnished by the APEPDCL to he contractor along with the copy of the concluded agreement.0Mtr. metal.0Mtr. earth-wires. 4.L.TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 33 KV & 11 KV LINES ERECTION OF 33 KV LINE OVER 9. The APEPDCL’s Engineer if considered necessary shall make alterations to the route map and communicate the same to the contractor in writing. The contractor is required to carry out the detailed survey of the route of the line and fix up the locations at the average span indicated in the schedule and mark the locations and submit a detailed route map to the Engineer in charge of the work within 30 days for approval. cleats. As such alterations shall be carried out accordingly and the APEPDCL’s Engineer. H.C.D.G.1Mtr.

the excavation may have. crow V-bars and showers although some times earth augers are used. the contractor shall make Section-5 : Technical Specification 118 . All Soils other than hard rock: Hard rock: Hard – Rock will be that which requires drilling and blasting by any method. when the area around the location happens to be an inhabited area consequent to which blasting cannot be restored to. The contractor shall bear the compensation for damage caused by the gangs without prior concurrence of the Engineer concerned.0 EXCAVATION OF POLE /STAY/STRUT/ DP PITS: After the final survey of the line and after marking the pole locations with pegs. the contractor shall shift his gangs to other areas. trees shall be cut until APEPDCL has made necessary arrangement with the authorities concerned and permission is given to the contractor to fell such tree.096 M (20ft) from the centre line of support and all trees which may fail and foul the line. excavation work has to be commenced in accordance to the approved route map. Excavation rates for poles. are not damaged while attending to tree cutting. Excavation is generally done by pick axes. it may not possible for the APEPDCL to arrange right-of-way for excavation of pole pits or erecting the poles of stringing the line..048 Meters (10ft. The rates quoted shall cover all such contingencies and no extra payments shall be claimed for such contingencies.All growth within 4. In the case of beetle leaf garden all growth within 3. The contractor shall arrange to remove the obstacles as soon as possible.) on either side of the line. The contractor shall take all possible steps to see that standing crops etc. Excavation of pole pits in very hard or rocky soil or in rock beds may involve blasting of rock by suitable explosives.P. hammering and splitting or by the process of heating and splitting by sudden cooling. 11/33 KV (trunk lines): All growth within 6. pits shall be quoted by the contractor for the following types of soil including dewatering of pits and shoring and shuttering wherever necessary. struts and D. The cost of drilling and blasting shall be included in the quoted rates. The rate quoted shall take into consideration such contingencies also. When such damage is inevitable the compensation will be borne by the APEPDCL provided the damage is with the prior concurrence of the Engineer. In certain cases. the depth of the foundation to be excavated for pole shall be in accordance with relevant sketch for the erection of pole or strut or D. Whenever blasting is resorted to. At all such times. 5. The pits for the supports are excavated in the direction of the line as this will facilitate the erection of support. No quotation for extra rate for dewatering during excavation and shoring and shuttering will be entertained. to be dug with or by the process of drilling wedging. No At time however. in addition to giving greater lateral stability.P etc.572 M (15ft) on either side from center line of support and all trees that may fall and foul the line.

no extra claim will be accepted.75 meters from the ground level. will not be responsible for any damages or accidents arising out of process of blasting. After the excavation of pits is completed the supports to be erected may be brought to the pit location. the excavation rate shall be including back filling with excavated rock bits and borrowed earth duly reamed after laying the designed rock foundation. For any reasons what so ever. The A. Wooden support may be utilized to facilitate lifting of the pole at the pit locations. b) Fully submerged type: To be used at locations where sub-soil waters is met at less than 0. 1) Wet type: To be used for locations: Where sub-soil waters is wet at 1. a) Partially submerged type: To be used at locations where sub-soils water table is met at more than 0. the subsoil water table and the presence of surface water. Note: For soils other than hard-rock excavation rate to be quoted shall include back filling the pits with excavated soils after concreting wherever necessary.E. 6. the paddy fields. The quoted rates should cover all contingencies during the process of excavation. Then the pole may be erected inside the pit.0Mtr poles as struts are to be used mostly and wherever required stays also can be used. For soils covered by hard rock variety. Which are in surface water for long period with water generation not exceeding one meter below the ground level e. when once excavated.0 ERECTION OF SUPPORTS 8.C. 3) Rocky type: To be used at location where hard rock is met with and where the bond strength between the rock and the concrete will be very high. 7.75 meters from the ground level. four types of foundation designs will be used for each locations classified in the following manner.L.D.0 FOUNDATION: Classification of Foundation: Depending on the type of soils. 2) In black cotton soils. No extra charges shall admissible for the removal of the fallen earth in the pit.5 meters or more below the ground level.g.P.P.adequate arrangements of safety precautions. Section-5 : Technical Specification 119 .

before earth filling. RCC padding may be laid below the pole to increase the surface contact between the pole and the soil. After the poles have been set the temporary anchors are to be removed. Before lifting the pole in the pit. The padding will distribute the density of the pressure due to weight of the pole on the soil. Generally. for angles of deviation more than 200 double pole structures of spacing 8ft may be erected. the poles are to be concreted up-to ground level of the pit. however. the horizontal/cross bracings should be fitted and the supports held in a vertical position with the help of temporary guys of manila rope at least 25 mm dia. concrete padding of not less than 75 mm thickness may be put for the distribution of the load of the support on the soil. are to be provided. The pits are to be excavated as per the bisection of the angle of deviation. using the rope as a temporary anchor. Having satisfied that the verticality and alignment are all right earth filling or concreting is to be done. The D. The supports shall be buried to a depth as per sketch enclosed. After the concreting is done. the pit may be filled with earth after the curing of the concrete is completed. shall be erected as per the sketch enclosed. granite chips of size 20/30 mm mesh and sand in the ratio M400 conforming to ISS is to be done from the bottom of the support to the ground level. Section-5 : Technical Specification 120 .0 ERECTION D. P. The verticality of the poles is to be checked with a spirit level on both transverse and longitudinal directions.P STRUCTURES FOR ANGLE LOCATIONS (11 KV/ 33KV LINES): 8ft(2440mm)/5ft(1500mm) line DP’s for 33/11KV respectively are to be erected one for each Km and AB switch on the DP are to be erected at angle points. Having lifted the pole. two in each direction and two stay/struts along the bisection of the angle of deviation.Before the pole is put into the pit. One AB switch to be erected at every 3 or 4 KM and depending on angle point as per field conditions and as per the direction of the engineer. the same should be kept in a vertical position with the help of manila rope of 25 mm dia. Ensuring that the poles are held in a vertical position (this can be checked with a spirit level) the concreting of the poles with cement. After the poles of DP are erected. Four stays/ or 2 struts & 2 stays along the line. Stay/Strut concreting may be done with M 400 mixture. As the poles are being erected say from the pole already erected to the next location where the pole is being erected the alignment of the poles are to be checked and set right by visual check. In swampy and special locations. 8.

9. (iv) Steep gradient locations to avoid uplift on the poles. (ii) Dead and locations.I. and allowed to set for at least 7 days. the next step would be mount the cross arms on the support.0 ANCHORING AND PROVIDING GUYS FOR SUPPORTS: Guys are to be provided to the supports at the following places (I) Angle locations.0 FIXING OF CROSS ARMS AND INSULATORS After the erection of supports and providing guys. filled with concrete. No guy insulator shall be located less than 2. 10. thimble. The turn buckle shall be mounted at the pole end of the stay and guy wire so fixed that the eye bolt turn buckle is half way in the working position thus giving the maximum movement for tightening or loosening. All the materials required should be lifted or lowered by means of the hand line. thimble protects the loop where it hears on the anchor rod. The anchoring and providing guys for supports (Single guy Bow guy an fly guy) shall be done as per sketch 3 enclosed. of about 2Mtrs. Where the existence of guy wire proves hazardous. The marking of the guy pit for excavation. it should be protected with suitable asbestos pipe. The stay rod should be placed in the position such that the angle of inclination of the rod with the vertical face of the pit is as the case may be. Back Clamps: 10.1 Section-5 : Technical Specification 121 . the excavation of pits and setting of the anchor rod must be carefully carried out.6Mtrs. The fixing of 33 KV and 11 KV cross arms shall be in accordance to spacing detailed in Sketch G. In no case. Bow guy and fly guy shall have to be provided as per the field conditions. through a pulley till the cross arm reaches the linemen. length above the ground level. (iii) Tee-off points. The concreting of the stay at the bottom should then be carried out. duly painted with white and black stripes so that it may be visible at night. bent back parallel to the main portion of the guy and bound after inserting the G.I. The cross arm is to be mounted after the support is erected.I. The free end of the guy wire is passed through the eye of the anchor rod. Guy insulators are placed to prevent the lower part of the guy from becoming electrically energized by a contact of the guy when the conductors snap and fall on them or due to leakage. from the ground. The ground man should station himself well to one side so that if any material drops from the top of the pole it may not strike him. The lineman should climb the support having requisite tools with him and the cross arm is then tied to a hand line and pulled up by the ground man. The G. the material or the tools should be dropped or thrown from the pole top. The back filling and ramming must be well done thereafter. Fastening guy wire to the support. The installation of guy will involve the following works: Excavation of pit and fixing of stay rod. Tightening guy wire and fastening to the anchor. bolts and nuts and spring washers of good quality only shall be used which have to be procured by the contractor.

Note: The insulators shall be cleaned and examined for defects before fixing. Don’ts: -Do not handle conductors without proper tools at any stage. -Use a twisting wrench for twisting the joints. It shall be ensured that all the current carrying parts are smooth and without dirt. Section-5 : Technical Specification 122 . -Use skids. 12. The nut of straps is so tightened that the strap can move freely in horizontal direction. -Grip all strands while pulling out the conductor. -Examine reel before unreeling for presence of nails or any other object. In the case of strain or angle supports. -Do not pull conductors without ensuring that there is no obstruction on the ground. on strap of the strain fittings is placed over the cross arm before placing the bolts in the hole of the cross arms. as this is necessary to fix the strain insulator.Flat for 33 KV and 50 X 6 mm M. -Control the unreeling speed with a suitable braking arrangement. -Use free-running sleeves or blocks with adequate grooves for drawing/paving conductors. or similar method for lowering reels or coils from transport or ground.1 Do’s and Don’ts Do’s: -Use proper equipment for handling aluminum conductors at all times. which might damage the conductor.2 The back clamps for fixing of the “V” cross arms will have to be procured by the contractor and shall be in accordance with sketch enclosed and the clamp shall be fabricated with 75 X 8mm M. -Rotate the reel or coil while unwinding conductor. -Use proper sag charts.10. -Do not pull out excess quantity of conductor than required.S.S Flat for11 KV. -Make all splicing with the proper tools. channel of 100x50mm and MS angle of 65x65x6mm for 33 KV and 11KV respectively shall be in accordance with sketches enclosed. -Chromate or graphite conducting oxide-inhibiting grease should be applied before cleaning with wire brush. -Mark conductors with crayons or adhesive tape of such (other) material which will not damage the strand. -Use long straight. Top Cleats: The top cleat shall be got fabricated with M. before the workmen actually commence the stringing work. INSULATORS The pins for insulators shall be fixed in the holes provided in the cross arms and the pole top brackets. cracks or chips. -Use wooden guards of suitable braking arrangement.S. where strain fittings are provided for this purpose.0 STRINGING OF THE LINE CONDUCTORS: For the guidance of the contractor in handling the conductor and in stringing certain Do’s and Don’ts are given below. 12. 11. parallel jaw grip with suitable liners when pulling conductor thus avoiding nicking or kinking of the conductor. The insulators shall be mounted in their places over the pins and tightened.

flagmen should be in attendance to ensure that normal services are not unduly interrupted. Aluminum tape is to be wound over the conductor before insertion into the ferrules to have better grip. aluminum ferrules of required size. In case the length of one piece of the conductor is less than the length of the section in which conductor paving is being done. -Paving and stringing of conductors. For this purpose the drum should either be mounted on the cable drum supports or jacks or hung by means of chain pulley of suitable capacity. While paving. a trench of suitable depth slightly bigger than the conductor drum may be dug. While conductor is being paved out slowly. Clean the conductor using sand paper or wire brush. At important crossing of roads. Above the ground over night and the work shall be so arranged that before the end of the day. Shaft. The conductor should be passed over the poles on wooden or aluminum snatch pulley blocks provided with low friction bearings. -Jointing of conductors. navigable rivers. 12. it should be slowly rolled in the direction of the arrow marked on the drum. -Do not handle aluminum conductors in a rough fashion but handle it with care it deserves.12. The drum should be so supported that it can be rotated freely. the conductor shall be raised to minimum height of 5 meters above the ground by rough sagging. canals.. Wooden tussles should be used for this purpose to support the conductor. so as to facilitate free rotations of the drum when it is suspended in the trench by means of M. -Tensioning and sagging of conductors. care should be taken to see that conductor does not rub against any metallic fitting of the pole or on the bad/rocky ground.3 Mid Span Jointing of Conductors The mid span jointing of conductors should be carried out by using 2Nos. These crossings should only be carried out in conjunction with and with the approval of the proper authorities concerned.2 -Do not make jumper connections on dirty or weathered conductor. it is easy to stretch one length of all phases from one end and the remaining length from another end of the section and thereafter jointing the two ends of the conductor where they meet on no account any part of the conductor shall be left at a height of less than 5 meters. some braking arrangements should be made so that the rotation of the drum may be stopped in emergency. -The erection of conductor’s can be sub-divided into 4 separate parts as follows: -Transport of conductors to work site. Section-5 : Technical Specification 123 .S. The conductor drums shall be transported to the tension point without injuring the conductor. In case if it is not possible to raise the conductor drum by any of the above methods. railways etc. one inner and one outer ferrule and the crimping of the ferrules is to be done by using proper crimping tools. If. it is necessary to roll the drum on the ground for a small distance. Conductor Erections: -The erection of overhead line conductor is a very important phase in construction. suspended from a tripod.

12. 12. There are ways of accomplishing this. the lowest part of the conductor in the span coincides with the lineman’s line of sight. The stretch of the conductor has to be taken out before stringing in order to avoid the gradual increase in sag due to the setting down of the individual wires. When sagging is completed. Use of snatch blocks reduces the friction and chances of inequality of tension in various spans. the tension clamps shall be fixed. Conductors can be sagged correctly only when the tension is the same in each span through out the entire length of the section. The Engineer will provide the sag chart. Temporary stays will have to be provided for both the anchoring supports in the section where the stringing has to be done. A mark is made on the conductor at a Section-5 : Technical Specification 124 . The clamp can be fitted on the conductor without releasing the tension. The conductor should then be sagged in accordance with the sag-temperature chart for the particular conductor and span. The tension of the conductor is then reduced or increased.5 Pre Stressing: In this method the conductor is pulled up to a tension considerably above the correct figure. The lineman sees the sag from the next pole.6 Over tensioning: This method consists of pulling up the conductor to a tension a little above the theoretical tension for the prevailing temperature and fixed it up at that tension with correspondingly reduced sag. The targets may be light strip of wood clamped to the pole at a distance equal to the sag below the conductor when the conductor is placed in snatch block. Sagging can be accomplished by several different methods but most commonly used method is “sighting”. As this method requires more time and involves the use of stronger tackle to secure the higher tension the other method of over-tensioning is commonly adopted.4 Sagging and Tensioning On the completion of the paving of the conductors and making mid-span joints if any. After a certain time the conductor will settle down to the correct sag and tension. but never exceeding fifty percent of breaking load for a short period of say twenty minutes. The sighting sag method of measuring sag is by the use of targets placed on the supports below the cross arms. The grip to the come along clamp is attached to double sleeve pulley block or the pulley lift machine and gradually tensioned. 12. At the tensioning end. tensioning operations will commence. one of the conductors is pulled manually up to a certain point and then come along clamp is fixed to the conductor to be tensioned. A tension of five to eight percent more than the theoretical value has been found to be suitable for the sizes of ACSR and AAAC conductors standardized by REC. The sag should then be adjusted in the middle span of the section. The ambient temperature during sagging may be recorded correctly. until.

insulators. which has been used. which may result in the failure of the cross arms. assembly unit may be released gradually. scuff marks etc. The use of cutting pliers for binding the site wire should be avoided. The aluminum tapes should also be used at the tension clamp and for proper grip. The binding wire/tie wire has to be procured by the contractor and the bid price shall include the cost of this. an abnormal stress may be transferred to conductor and support.. The final conductor surface shall be clean. other accessories and conductor. Even repairing of conductor surfaces shall be done only in case of minor damages. cross arms. A good tie should provide a secure binding between the line conductor and insulator and should reinforce the conductor on either side of the insulator. He shall also be responsible for proper distribution of the conductor drums to keep number and lengths of cut pieces of the conductor to a minimum. smooth. After the conductor is clamped to insulator. without any Section-5 : Technical Specification 125 .. Come along clamp is placed on the conductor beyond the conductor clamp and attached to the pulling unit. 12. all nuts should be free. it shall be brought to the notice of the Engineer and shall not be used without his approval. The conductor is pulled insufficiently to allow the insulator assembly to be fitted to the clamp. when there is small angle of deviation the conductor is placed inside groove and binded. the conductors are run on the top of insulators. The next step is to place the conductor on the top of the pin insulator from the snatch block and removing snatch blocks. The tie wire. previously should not be re-used. Before tieing the conductor to the insulator two layers of aluminum tape should be wrapped over the conductor in the portion where it touches the insulator. Accordingly. Normally in straight runs of line. After the stringing is completed. Conductors are then fastened to insulator by the use of aluminum wires. fitting etc. all poles. The contractor shall entirely responsible for any damage to the supports. If the tension is released with a jerk.7 Conductor damage and repair: If the conductor is damaged for whatever reasons and damage is not repaired aluminum sleeves etc. which are safe from both electrical and mechanical points of view. are checked up to ensure that there have been no deformities etc. Before the insulator sets is raised to position. there are two methods of tieing the conductors to insulators. The following points should be observed: The length of tie wire should be sufficiently long for making complete tie including the end allowance for gripping with the ends.distance from the cross arms equal to the length of complete strain insulator. stay or pole in some cases. The width and thickness of aluminum tape to be used for a specific size of conductors has been specified in handbooks of aluminum conductor manufactures and the same may be preferred to.

c. clamping.0 13.9 Jumpering : The jumpering at all locations where it is required i. strain disc binding. The bolts of the T-clamps should be tightened to the required torque to prevent any loose contacts at the jumper locations.e. 13. telephone lines and power lines.P. 12. 14. Not more than one joint per conductor shall be allowed in one span. the steel and metal parts are to be earthed by pipe earthling as per the drawing of sketch enclosed to this specification. sharp points. The steel strips shall be fixed not less than 300 mm deep from the ground level. giving satisfactory corona and R.0 EXECUTION OF WORKS RELATING TO POWER LINE CROSSINGS AND RAILWAY CROSSINGS: Section-5 : Technical Specification 126 . small rivers or in tension spans. Wherever necessary ground clearance have to be measured to ensure obtaining adequate line clearance as per I.projections. enclosed for Railways. excavation and back-filling. The top edge of the pipe shall be at least 200 mm below the ground level. stringing. jointing. b.8 Stringing rate: The stringing rate for stringing of the conductor per route length of line shall include paving.1 EARTHING Pipe Earthing At D.I performance.E. Duly filling the pits with bentonite compound and black cotton soil (in1:6 ratio) and shall be maintained up-to a distance of 300 mm from the pipe in all sides. clamping and fitting of all necessary accessories. Pole Earthing: All supports shall be properly earthed with coil earthing. rule 77 (I).. The earthing of DP structures should be done in the presence of Asst. Location pits are to be excavated. Should be done by using aluminum T-Clamps of suitable size required for the conductor. and using aluminum tape over the conductor at the T-clamp location to have a better grip. cut or abrasion etc. tensioning. The strength of the joint shall confirm to I. Divisional Engineer/Construction only. cut points and tapping points etc. No joint or splice be made in spans crossing over main roads.E rule 75. 12. railways. The tenders shall quote the charges for earthing inclusive of the cost of bentonite compound and block cotton soil. CROSSINGS Guarding shall be erected as per standards and as per sketch a.

Hence. acids and alkali. For such locations an adhoc reduction of Rs. It shall also be as far as possible cube like preferably angular. The mould should be made watertight so that cement cream will not come out leaving only sand and jelly consequently forming honeycombing in the concrete. but not flaky. The sand used for the concrete shall be composed of hard silicon materials and well sieved. The rate for concrete should be made so that the works are not held up on this account. His rates for line erection and stringing shall take into consideration such contingencies also. These copings and muffing should be done after the stringing is completed in respect of tension locations and the Engineer at site may decide such other locations as.0 CONCRETING: Note: All DP structures. The water used for mixing concrete shall be fresh and conform to ISI it should be clean and free from oil.per location will be made while billing for concrete and this will be released after the coping and muffing are completed. the top surface should be finished smooth. the contractor shall execute such works as and when approvals are received. In such cases. the site must be kept completely dewatered both during the placing of the concrete and for 24 hours after completion. close grained quality. Section-5 : Technical Specification 127 . It shall be clear and a sharp angular grit type of and free from earthy or organic matter and deleterious salts. Proper forms of moulds adequately braced to retain proper shape while concreting should be used. In wet locations. single pole cut points and Angle locations should be concreted. The aggregate shall be of clean broken hard granite or other stone specified or approved by the Engineer. the concreted surface. vertical formations. may not match with program of the contractor. with slight slope towards the outer edge to drain off the rainwater falling on the copings. will have to be done only after receipt of line clear form APEPDCL authorities and approval from the concerned officer. After concerting to the required height. It shall be hard. the quantity of water used should not be too much. The cement concrete used for the foundation shall be of ratio 1:3:6 using 40mm HBG metal. After removal of the form moulds. No extra rate will be paid for the dewatering and the rate for concrete shall be inclusive of dewatering charges. which some times.100/. There should be no disturbance of concrete by water during this period. The concrete should be mixed as stiff as the requirements of placing the concrete in the forms or moulds with as and the degree to which the concrete resists segregation will permit. Saltiest or brackish water should not be used. 15. The forms of moulds shall not be removed before a lapse of about 24 hours after the completion of concreting.Work such as erection of support underneath an existing power line and paving out of conductors and earth-wire and stringing the power line crossing span or a railway crossing span. perfectly clean and free from the earth organic or other deleterious matter. 40 mm aggregate shall be of size as will pass through 40 mm square mesh measured in the clear.

In case. and their correct setting and alignment. For all points double jumpers shall be provided to each phase.6X1. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) Sufficient back filled earth is lying over each foundation pit and it is adequately compacted. WORKMANSHIP The contractor shall entirely be responsible for the correct erection of all support as per the approved drawings. If augur is used for making pole pits. TESTING AND COMMISSIONING After the completion of the works final patrolling and checking of the line shall be done by the contractor to ensure that all the foundation works. as approved by the Engineer.wherever required. shall be repaired with a rich cement and sand motor in the shortest possible time. All the bolts and nuts should be hot dip G. ramming shall be done after erection of pole. If the supports and D. minor or major to the conductor. No extra charges shall be admissible even though separate gangs may have to be sent by the contractor for fitting these accessories and attachments on the support at the appropriate time. the contractor shall dismantle and re-erect them correctly at his own cost without extension of time. Verticality of each support shall be measured by the contractor and furnished to the Engineer. All works shall be thoroughly inspected keeping in view of the following main points. pole erection and stringing have been done as approved by the Engineer. Anti-climbing devices. and also to ensure that they are complete in all respects. The jumpers provided at the cut points are connected rigidly to the tension hardware utilizing all the jointing bolts provided for the purpose. Concreting and coping of poles are in good and finally shaped conditions.I. Contractor shall prepare pole schedules and hand it over to the Engineer. The supports must be truly vertical and in plumb after erection and so straining will be permitted to bring them to vertical position. 16. structures after the erection are found to differ from approved route maps and drawings or to be out of alignment. and danger boards are to be provided at all railway crossings and road crossings and DP locations. it is noticed later that some or any of the above are not fulfilled the engineer will get such items rectified through other agencies and recover the cost of such works from the bills Section-5 : Technical Specification 128 . 17. All the accessories and insulators are strictly as per the drawings and are free from any defects or damages.5Mts up to ground level including base concreting of 75mm thick with 1:3:6 CC mix. FINAL CHECKING. No damage. P. accessories and insulator strings will unattended are noticed. The full concreting for the poles if erected in excavated pit shall be done so that the complete block will be of the dimensions 0. 18. what so ever. The contractor shall submit a report to the above effect to the Engineer. The stringing of the conductor has been done as per the approved sag and desired clearances are available. material and as per contractual provisions. earth wire. Location numbers for each pole shall be painted on the pole.6X0.

payable to the contractor against that contract or any other contract executed by him for the APEPDCL After final checking. where tests are not specified in this specification. and shall comply strictly with the tests. All materials to be supplied should fully conform to provisions under clause 3 of Instructions to Bidders. Such tests shall be carried out at selected points along the route as required by the Engineer and the contractor shall provide all necessary equipment and labour to enable the test to be carried out. the contractor shall be responsible for the payment of applicable duties and taxes.) or other approved National Standards authorized by the Engineer. if he chooses to procure these from imports. supply and use of materials and compliance of the following should be ensured. The materials for which advance is given by APEPDCL is to be insured by the contractor at his cost from the date of payment of advance to the date stated in the certificate of completion for the whole of the works. transport and testing equipment shall be provided by him. The contractor has got the obligation of showing the proof of source of any material procured by him.. shall rectify any. He shall guarantee the materials so supplied by the contractor for satisfactory performance up to the end of the maintenance and defects liability period. These materials should conform to the relevant Indian Standard specification. The contractor defects found out as a result of such tests. These materials shall be supplied at least one month in advance of their requirement manufactures test certificate for these materials shall be submitted and got approved by Engineer before utilization. they should conform to the requirements of the latest issue of the relevant Indian standards herein after abbreviated to as (I. In procurement of these items the contractor shall follow all regulations of the APEPDCL/Government of India in respect of import license etc. Material & Quality: All the material used in the works shall be of the best quality of their respective kinds as specified herein. Section-5 : Technical Specification 129 . Further. to the APEPDCL on demand. the lines shall be tested for insulation in accordance with tests prescribed by the Engineer. Supply of materials by the contractor: The contractor has to make his own arrangements for procurement. port clearance inland transportation etc. After satisfactory tests on the line and approval by the Engineer the line shall be energized at full operating voltage before handling over. shall be done by the contractor and necessary labour. They shall be obtained from sources and suppliers approved by the Engineer or his representatives.S. forthwith. without any extra charges to the APEPDCL In addition to the above. specified herein after or. All arrangements for such testing or any other test desired by the Engineer. 19. the contractor shall be responsible for testing and ensuring that the total and relative sags of the conductors are within the specified tolerance.

21 CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS Cement: The contractor has to make his own arrangements for the procurement of cement to required specifications required for the works subjected to the followings: The contractor shall procure cement. required for the works only from reputed cement factories (Main producer) acceptable to the Engineer –in-Charge. a) Section-5 : Technical Specification 130 . Failure by the Bidder to have done all the timings. maps. The information have been produced as found.Inspection and Testing: Any materials used in the works shall be subject to inspection and tests if required by the Engineer. Approvals: No material shall be used in the works unless the Engineer or his representative has first approved it. The contractor shall make his own arrangement for adequate storage of cement. communicated to ascertained or otherwise learned by the APEPDCL It will be the Bidder’s responsibility to satisfy himself from the “Reference Information” supplied and/or inspection of the site that sufficient quantities of construction materials required for the works shall exists in the designated borrow areas or quarry sites. 20 INFORMATION AND DATA: The information furnished is the best available however. which is in accordance with this condition he is deemed to have done. The APEPDCL does not accept any responsibility either in handing over the quarries or procuring the materials or any other facilities. the APEPDCL does not guarantee the correctness or interpretations. may be rejected if the Engineer considers that his inspection was necessary during the process of manufacture of such material. The Tenders will not be entitled for any extra rate or claim for the misjudgment on his part for the quantity and quality of materials available in the quarries. which is prepared or manufactured without notice having been given in writing to the Engineer. deductions or conclusions which are given as supplementary information in the Bid Documents or in any reports. shall not relieve the successful Bidder of the responsibility for satisfactorily completing the works as required at the rates quoted by him. The contractor shall be required to furnish to the Engineer –in-Charge bills of payment and test certificates issued by the manufactures to authenticate procurement of quality cement from the approved cement factory. diagrams or in other reference information available to the bidder from the APEPDCL of or otherwise. drawings. the costs of all tests required by this specification shall be deemed to be included in the rates and prices named by the contractor in the bill (schedule) of quantities. Unless otherwise stated. Any material.

high yield strength deformed (HYSD) bars. rods and structural steel etc. However. 21. The Contractor shall forthwith remove from the works area any cement that the Engineer-in-Charge may disallow for use. Necessary ISI list certificates are to be produced to Engineer-in-Charge before use on works.E. The contractor shall further.C. keep his records up to date enable the Engineer-in-charge to apply such checks as he may desire. any cement the Engineer-in-charge may disallow for use on work and replace it by cement complying with the relevant Indian Standards. The contractor shall make necessary arrangement at his own cost to the satisfaction of Engineer-in-Charge for actual weighment of random sample from the available stock and shall conform with the specification laid down by the Indian Standard Institution or other standard foreign institutions as the case may be. The Contractor free of cost shall supply cement bags required for testing. The Contractor shall forthwith remove from the work area. Cement which has been unduly long in storage with the Contractor or alternatively has deteriorated due to in adequate storage and thus become unfit for use in the works will be rejected by the department and no claim will be entertained.. standard for the works wherever it is not specifically mentioned above. c) The Contractor should store the cement of 60 days requirement at least one month in advance to ensure the quality of cement so brought to site and shall not remove the same without the written permission of the Engineer-in-Charge. at all times satisfy the Engineer-in-charge on demand. then the charges will be borne by the Contractor.2 STEEL: The Contractor shall procure mild steel reinforcement bars. Cement shall be got tested for all the tests as directed by Engineer-in-Charge at-least one month in advance before the use of cement bags brought and kept in site Godown. The unit weight and dimensions shall be as prescribed in the relevant Indian standard specifications of steel. by production of records and books or by submission of returns and other proofs as directed. the testing charges for cement will be borne by the APEPDCL. Note: The Contractor has to follow R. If the tests prove unsatisfactory. on account of failure to meet with required quality and standard. Section-5 : Technical Specification 131 . that the cement is being used as tested and approved by Engineer-in-charge for the purpose and the Contractor shall at all times. only from the main or secondary producers manufacturing steel to the prescribed specifications of Bureau of Indian Standard or equivalent and licensed to affix ISI or other equivalent certifications marks and acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge.b) The contractor shall procure cement in standard packing of all 50Kg per bag from the authorized manufacturers. required for the works.

Equipment is the Contractor’s machinery and Vehicles brought temporarily to the site for carrying out the works. 3. 2. Materials must be tidily stored. A defect is any part of the works not completed in accordance with the contract. In particular excavations must be guarded. Testing of the equipment and handing over of the substation to the Employer (APEPDCL) as per specification. General The Contractor should be conversant with Indian Electricity Rules 1956 as amended from time to time.0 Scope The scope of the specification covers the following Cleaning the site Civil works in the switchyard Construction of control house Erection of structures. All waste material must be removed from site by the end of the working day. The Engineer is a person appointed by the Employer (APEPDCL) who is responsible for supervising the Contractor. The Employer (APEPDCL) is the party who will employ the contractor to carry out the works. equipment etc Electrification of control house.0 Definitions: Contractor: Defect:: Employer: Equipment: Engineer: Materials: The Contractor is a person or corporate body whose bid to carry out the works has been accepted by the Employer.CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS FOR ERECTION OF 33/11KV SUBSTATION WORKS 1. No dogs or other animals shall be brought on or near to the site.0 Animals: Storage: Pumping: Public Relations: Particular attention should be paid by the Contractor and his workmen to maintain public relations. The Contractor is responsible for piping or channeling all pumped water from excavations to the nearest ditch. Adequate precautions must be taken to prevent damage or injury to persons and live stock. including consumables. used by the Contractor for incorporation in the works. Materials are all supplies. to avoid damage to neighboring land and they will be held responsible for the cleaning out the ditch should this become silted up due to pumping operations. administering the Contract. Site work: All works to be carried out in a workman like manner to minimize interference to others. Bus bars. Section-5 : Technical Specification 132 .

0 The works are what the Contract requires the Contractor to construct. as mentioned below.0 Civil works in Switchyard a) Excavations for i) Foundations ii) Retaining wall iii) Leveling iv) Cable laying.0 7. 6. The illumination level to be maintained shall conform to IS : 3646 (Part II)-1966. Section-5 : Technical Specification 133 . providing brick work for walls.C slab.0 Electrification of Control House: The work involves electrification of control room. d) Peripheral fencing and security fencing as per para 18 and 29 e) Construction of cable ducts as per para 17 f) Formation of roads as per para 28. plinth beam. Any damage done to the APEPDCL by the Contractor or his Sub-Contractor shall be made good at Contractor’s expense. painting. remove or dispose off in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer in charge. the site shall be cleaned and dressed with an approved weed killer. Earthing b) Cement concrete foundations for structures. Works: 4. 5. During construction.C. Flooring with polished stone. All holes in the ground shall be filled in and the land restored to its original state and the entire premises should be kept in a neat and tidy condition of cleanliness as the Engineer may direct. the Contractor shall keep the work site and storage area used by him free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish and before completing the works. Control House: The work involves providing foundations. and hand over to the Employer as defined in the Contract Data. columns and beams for super structure. install. Cleaning up the Site: Before commencement of works. the Contractor shall at his own cost. which includes work on the site. Subcontractor A sub contractor is a person or corporate body who has a contract with the Contractor to carry out a part of the work in the Contract. sanitary arrangements etc. providing doors and windows. laying R. Bolt type foundations for other equipment such as VCB’s etc c) Leveling of substation site with borrowed gravel as per para 15 of the specification. transformers. providing water supply.Specification Specification means the specification of the works included in the Contract and any modification or addition made or approved by the Engineer. The contractor shall design the illumination details for the control room and furnish to the Engineer for approval.

8.Channel.10 mentioned below are applicable to all civil works under the specifications including control house. buildings (control room) cable trenches etc. All the bolts. 7. Limi Average Sl. retaining wall.G. Carrier room 300 3.0 Store room D.0 10. nuts and washers etc. Section-5 : Technical Specification 134 . Control Desks 300 19 Switch houses 150 25 Battery room 100 2. Crosspieces are 100x50x6. 8. Execution of Civil Works: Para 11. structural design drawings with detailed design calculations are to be furnished by the contractor for the approval of Engineer. 10. Office room 300 19 4.4 mm M.3 pins sockets required for general purpose shall be provided with the approval of Engineer. Set room Corridors Bath Room 100 150 70 100 16 - Type of substation Construction For standard substation layouts as per the drawings enclosed the structures will be of 150x150mm ‘H’ type Beams. The foundations of structures are 150 mm thick cement concrete with M150 grade at the bottom and mass concrete as per the approved drawings.1 Excavation: This clause covers excavations to be done for all the civil works such as laying foundations for structures. 6. 5.0 Site Layout: A copy of the substation site layout will be furnished to the Contractor to have an idea of the quantum of work involved. ting Particulars illumination No.S. The rate quoted is applicable for all types of soils including hard rock. equipment. 33 KV & 11 KV buses in respective bays are strung type with 200Sqmm Panther AAAC/ACSR. 9. used in erection of 33/11KV substation should be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS: 2629 and IS: 2633. For non-standard layouts.1 to 15. glare level inde Control rooms Vertical control panels 300 19 Rear of control panels 150 19 1. A control house to be constructed as per the approved drawings at location shown by the Engineer.

Anti-termite and anti-wood treatment for foundations basement and flooring shall be provided. Trucks. Cement 11. tractors or heavy equipment for depositing or compacting back fill shall not be used with in 1.Blasting shall not be permitted with in the substation site.9. Water used shall be as per APSS No 129. 11. other salts and organic matter shall be used for mixing concrete grout and mortar and curing. Precautions: Back fill shall not be dropped directly upon or against any structure or facility where there is danger of displacement or damage. In rocky soils also excavation has to be carried out by using any method other than blasting. wetted and rammed properly before another layer is deposited. 11.1 Code of Practice: All concrete and reinforced concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with IS:456.3 Consistency The quantity of water used shall be determined by slump test as per APSS No 402. The concrete shall be of nominal mix as specified in the drawings or in the schedule of quantities. care should be taken to avoid unequal pressures. Concrete: This clause is applicable for all the civil works under this specification.1 and shall be sufficient to produce a dense concrete of adequate workability for the purpose. Rate for concrete shall include cost of shoring. (code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete) and APSS No 402 and 403. Back filling includes watering and consolidating 150mm layers for all soils. While ramming around piping. and will surround and properly grip all the reinforcement. The Contractor shall provide a method statement detailing the proposal method of back filling for approval by the Engineer. 11.2 Concrete Proportion.2 Filling Foundations and Basement Backfilling of foundations is to be done with river sand. Back fill shall be done in horizontal layers not exceeding 150mm layers. Back filling shall be done with approved back fill material. The Engineer shall approve the method of excavation.5 Section-5 : Technical Specification 135 . Sulphur. leveled.5 meters of the foundation / structures. 10. 11.4 Water Potable water free from Chlorides. shuttering and de-watering wherever necessary.

binding wire and fabrication charges for all the works shall be included in the corresponding item of such schedules.6 Sand Sand used shall be composed of hard silicon materials and of sharp angular grit. 11. Final setting time: Not more than 600 minutes Minimum compressive strength of standard Mortar Cube with graded sand as per IS: 650– 1966.7 Coarse Aggregate The coarse aggregate used in the concrete shall be machine crushed hard granite metal conforming to IS: 383 – 1970 (specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete) and APSS No 108 and size shall be as mentioned in the relevant schedule of quantities and drawings. 11. The Contractor shall provide a method statement detailing the proposed method of concrete mixing for approval by the Engineer before commencement of work.8 Steel Steel used shall conform to APSS No 126 and APSS No 1101. Concrete shall be thoroughly mixed to a uniform consistency in the motor operated mixing machines of approved types. 11. The cost of reinforcement steel.9 Mixing Concrete Mixing of concrete shall conform to APSS No 402. 11. At 3 days 160 Kg / Cm2 At 7 days 220 Kg / Cm2 11.10 Samples The Engineer shall be approved samples of all materials to be used in the substation works.11 Inspections and Testing: Section-5 : Technical Specification 136 . which are likely to promote corrosion of steel. shall be used. 11. Only river sand free from Calcium Chloride or other Chlorides and Salts. The materials used in the work shall be at least equal to the approved samples No material shall be used in the works unless the Engineer or his representative has first approved it. Hand mixing of concrete shall not be permitted.Cement used shall be ordinary or rapid hardening Portland cement conforming to APSS No 112 and IS: 269 with the following properties Initial setting time: Not less than 30 minutes. Sand shall be screened before use and shall conform to APSS No 110.

storms and other severe weather conditions arising. tarpaulins etc. the contractor shall always have in readiness on the site. Any material. Before commencing the work the Contractor shall provide a method statement detailing the proposed method of form work he proposes to use for approval by the Engineer before commencement of work. concreting shall be stopped and appropriate temporary stop ends vee-grooves etc. To meet such circumstances. Should any concrete be damaged due to rain. The formwork shall conform to Clause 10 of IS: 456 and APSS No 403..All materials used in the works shall be subject to inspection and tests if required by the Engineer. In no circumstances wire ties shall be used.. Form work: This clause is applicable to form work / centering etc. will not be permitted. strutting shall be of such design as to allow accurate adjustment and easy removal.. 11. for the protection of newly placed concrete. All forms shall be securely braced and supported to prevent any sagging or bulging during construction.13 Concreting in Unsuitable Weather: In the event of rain.5 The form work shall be designed and arranged so that it will not settle under the load and can be stripped and removed without causing any blemish or jar to the concrete.. for all civil works under the specification. but such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities for the sufficiency and efficiency of the work. For the guidance of the Engineer. approved framed sheeting. which is prepared or manufactured without the notice having been given in writing to the Engineer. Strutting of formwork against the sides of the structures. placed as may be necessary. All forms shall be fixed to the proper line and tightened up immediately before depositing the concrete. Section-5 : Technical Specification 137 . which is subject to movement or vibration. Form work for all exposed faces of mass concrete and for all faces of reinforced concrete shall consist of approved material so finished as to produce the concrete surface without honey combing. storms or other weather conditions the Engineer may order the cutting out / replacement of the damaged concrete at the expense of the Contractor. bulges etc. may be rejected if the Engineer considers that his inspection was necessary during the process of manufacture of such material. All joints shall be close enough to prevent leakage of water from the concrete. The cost of all such tests required by this specification shall be deemed to be included in the rates and prices quoted by the Contractor in the bill (schedule) of quantities.

The inside faces of the forms shall be treated with mould oil or other approved preparation. The treating material shall not have deteriorating effect on concrete as well as formwork. The treating material shall not come into contact with the reinforcement. 12.1 Removal of Formwork The length of time between concreting and the removal of the form is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. However the Engineer will be competent to fix a minimum length of time. For structure foundations minimum time limit specified is 24 hours for removing formwork from the time of placing concrete. Execution of concrete work Before concreting is commenced all form work shall be scrupulously cleaned and wetted and the Contractor shall adopt all necessary measures to ensure that all debris, dirt, wash water and other refuse is removed. The Engineer will then inspect the reinforcement and formwork and concreting shall not be commenced until the Engineer gives permission. Such inspection shall not however relieve the Contractor from any of his responsibilities for the correctness of the work in every respect. 13.1 Casting Programme The Contractor’s casting programme shall be such that each section of the work can be satisfactorily completed in one operation after permission has been given to proceed. No claim for overtime working for completing a casting programme will be entertained. 13.2 Conveyance of concrete The concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to its place in the works as rapidly as possible and in such a manner that there shall be no separation or loss of the ingredients. In no circumstances shall more than half an hour lapse between the time when water is added to the mix and the time when the concrete is finally consolidated in position. The use of concrete distributing chutes at an angle of more than 45 degrees from the horizontal will not be permitted. In no case shall concrete be dropped from a height of more than one and half meters. The arrangements to be adopted by the Contractor for conveying and depositing concrete shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 13.3 Depositing concrete Before any concrete is put in, the Contractor shall carry out, filling of pockets or trimming the sides where found necessary to suit the level and line of the concrete to be laid as directed by the Engineer at site. Concrete shall be placed in one operation. 13.4 Consolidating Concrete Concrete shall be consolidated by means of sufficient number of mechanical vibrators. The concrete shall be thoroughly vibrated all round the reinforcement and against shutters so that all enclosed air is duly expelled and the concrete surface when stripped be found to be good and free of the formation of air pockets, honey combing or other defects.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

138

The concrete shall be worked into position where placed and not allowed to flow. For sloping beams, the work of depositing concrete shall start from the lower end and work upwards. The area on which concrete is to be deposited shall be kept free from standing water. Running water if any shall also be brought under control before concreting is commenced. 13.5 Finish of concrete surface: Soon after the formwork is removed the Contractor shall remove all form marks and other imperfections in order to give uniform appearance. The faces of the concrete work shall be sound and solid, free from honey combing. “No Patching” of any concrete facing will be allowed without the approval of the Engineer. 13.6 Construction Joints Before depositing any concrete resting or abutting on work, previously carried out, the surfaces and ends of the existing work shall be thoroughly hacked to such an extent that no portion of the previous surface remains. Thus roughened surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned off, brushed and watered immediately before the succeeding operations are commenced. The roughened surface shall be coated with 1:2 cement sand mortar 12 mm thick, immediately before the concrete of the next layer is placed. 13.7 Curing The curing period shall be for a period of 14 days for switchyard structure foundations below ground level. For other civil works the curing period shall be 21 days. Top and side surfaces of the concrete shall be kept moist and be protected from the direct rays of the sun during the period by covering with Jute bags. Curing shall be done as per APSS No 402.8. 14.0 Reinforced Concrete All the steel used for reinforcement shall conform to APSS No 126. All steel reinforcement before the concrete is deposited shall be clean and free from all loose mill scale, dust and loose rust, and coatings such as paints, cement grout, mould oils etc. Cube samples shall be taken and tested in Laboratory and the results shall be furnished.

14.1

Mixes The mix of concrete shall be 1:2:4 using 20mm machine crushed hard granite metal for slab, beams, column footings, columns, lintels, sunshades and portico. The mix for leveling course shall be 1:4:8 using 40mm machine crushed hard granite metal. The thickness of concrete shall be 100 mm.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

139

The mix for flooring bed shall be 1:6:10 for 100 mm thick with 50% of 20 mm metal and 50% of 40mm machine crushed metal. For other places it shall be as shown in the drawings. 14.2 Cover to Reinforcement The reinforcement shall be covered in all cases as shown in the drawings. It shall be 15mm for slabs and 25mm for beams. Where two bars cross, the outer should have the minimum cover. All reinforcement of columns is to be extended by 930 mm over the top of slab to take up the future expansion. 14.3 Form Bolts All form bolts that are in the concrete shall be withdrawn when the forms are stripped. They shall not be placed within 50mm of any steel reinforcement, so that the holes they leave do not reduce the effective cover on the steel. 14.4 Bending Reinforcement All bends shall be made cold round. Heating of bars for any purpose what so ever will not be allowed. All bends shall have at least four times the diameter of the bars. Where straight rods are used they shall be truly straight. 14.5 Splicing Reinforcement Normally splicing in reinforcement is not permissible. In exceptional cases overlapping in reinforcement is permissible with the approval of Engineer. The spacing and over lapping measurements shall be as per the directions of the Engineer. Welding shall joint no bars. 14.6 Fixing Reinforcement The number, size, form and position of all steel reinforcement bars, stirrups and other parts of reinforcement shall be exact in accordance with the approved drawings, and such parts shall be kept in the correct positions in the forms without displacement during the process of working the concrete into place. The Contractor as directed by the Engineer shall provide Spacebars, supporting stools and distance pieces to maintain the reinforcement in the correct position, without any extra charge to the APEPDCL. All straight bars shall be fixed parallel to each other and to the sides of the forms. Any ties, links or stirrups connecting the bars shall be tied so that the bars are properly braced.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

140

The inside of the curved parts (stirrups) shall be in actual contact with the bars round which they are intended to fit. 14.7 Binding wire Bars shall be bound together with black annealed steel wire No 16, SWG size conforming to IS : 280 – 1972 and the binding shall be done tight with proper pliers or automatic binders. (The free ends of the binding wire shall be bent towards inner side of the concrete). 14.8 Scaffolding The Contractor shall provide a method statement detailing the proposed method of providing scaffolding for approval by the Engineer before commencement of work, but such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities for the sufficiency and efficiency of the work. 14.9 Depositing and Consolidation: No concrete shall be deposited until the formwork and reinforcement has been inspected and approved by the Engineer. Care shall be taken that the steel reinforcement is thoroughly surrounded by the concrete particularly in congested locations and that no voids or cavities are left. Consolidation of the concrete by mechanical vibration shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Under any circumstances there shall not be any impact on the formwork during the process of consolidation. 14.10 Defective work If, on the removal of the shuttering any honey combing or other defective workmanship is found in the face of concrete, the Engineer will decide whether, in his opinion, the strength of the member is affected and whether patching shall be permitted in which case the defective concrete shall be cut out to the extent ordered by the Engineer, and the remaining concrete thoroughly cleaned and made good. If before or during this operation any reinforcement bar is exposed, the cutting out shall continue right round the bar, to form a key. Where reinforcement bars are so exposed, care shall be taken to ensure that the tools used for cutting out the concrete do not damage them. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the defective materials or workmanship he may direct that the whole member shall be removed and a new member affect the strength of the member constructed by the Contractor without any extra charge and without asking for extension of time. If any “Patching” is discovered which has been carried out without the permission of the Engineer, the whole member affected will be liable for rejection, in which case the member shall be removed and a new member constructed by the Contractor, without charge. 15.0 Leveling of Switchyard After back filling the structure foundations, and after construction of earth pits and copings to the supports, leveling is to be done with the surplus earth suitable for back filling purposes as per specification. If surplus earth is not adequate for leveling, the

Section-5 : Technical Specification

141

When a cable has to cross a road.C. It shall be plastered neatly with cement mortar of ratio 1:5.S. Foundation for structures (R. Current Transformers (CT’s) to be erected on the VCB structures. casted with M150 mix of size 400 mm x 400 mm x 50mm thick with two hooks for lifting or MS sheets neatly painted to avoid corrosion.I. The cable trenches are to be covered with pre cast cement concrete blocks. cable duct is to be constructed to a depth of 300 mm and width of 300 mm with one brick wall over a bed concrete. Switchyard is to be spread with 20mm size machine crushed.0 Foundations: Cement concrete foundation for Power Transformer plinth should be done as per the drawing no SS 3 or as per any other drawing approved by the Engineer. The switchyard must be 300 mm high over the highest level of the adjacent area. In the substation switchyard cables shall be laid in the trench of size 300 mm depth and 300 mm width and back filling shall be done with sand.C. Consolidation is to be done in layers of 300 mm duly wetting and rolling with 2 or 3-ton capacity Roller. For taking out the cables from the control room to switchyard 150mm dia G. 17. with a suitable plugging arrangement. The measurements of 300 mm and 300 mm are clear measurements after plastering. Control cables to be laid on the sand cushioning of 50mm in the trench. Potential transformers and Lightning Arresters (Station type) erected on 11KV auxiliary bay structure. The length of the cable trench depends on the position of fixing of control panels in the control room and it will be normally 6 meters. Section-5 : Technical Specification 142 . AB Switches to be erected on the substation structures.0 Cable duct: In the control room. of 100mm thick M100 grade. 16.Pipe is to be provided in the control room wall. it has to pass through R. blue granite metal to a thickness of 75 mm. after consolidating the earth mat with roller. as per the directions of the Engineer.C pipe of 300 mm diameter.Joist) should be as per the approved drawings No SS4 Foundation for V. Finally the switchyard is to be filled with quarry dust of 25mm thickness. 900 mm below the ground level.switchyard is to be leveled by supplying red gravel or quarry dust as specified by the Engineer.B should be as shown in the drawing no SS 5 Station transformers. The length of Hume pipe shall be extended by 500 mm on either side of the road.

Rod There shall be a minimum cover of 10mm of cement concrete over reinforcement. 300.S.0 meters. 600. Section-5 : Technical Specification 143 .C base plate of size 300x300x40 mm to be provided for each strut pole as shown in the drawing. The fence posts shall be aligned in excavated pits and concreted with 1:4:8 cement concrete using 40mm granite metal. 450. including vacant land. 1050. The size of galvanized steel barbed line wire shall have nominal diameter of 2.S. 1900 mm from ground level and vertical stirrups to be provided for every 450 mm length.Rod 4 Nos 6φ Rods and 6 10 to 12 mm Intermediate 110x110x2400 Nos stirrups at 450 c/c 1:2:4 machine crushed granite with 6φ M. Precast R. Ten lines of barbed wire to be provided horizontally at the height of 150. 825. Fencing shall be provided as shown in the drawing no SS 6.Rod 4 Nos 6φ Rods and 6 10 to 12 mm Strut 110x110x 2400 mm Nos stirrups at 450 c/c 1:2:4 machine crushed granite with 6φ M.All these arrangements shall be as per the directions and approval of the Engineer.0 Peripheral Fencing: Peripheral fencing to be provided all rounds the substation site. The distance between intermediate posts is 3. 18. The tentative layout of the substation site is enclosed along with the bid document to have an idea of the quantum of work involved. 1275. The fence posts shall not have any honeycombs. The surface of fence posts shall be finished smooth before erection. The wire shall be coated with zinc of grade Zn 98 of IS 209. Location of Concrete Metal Size Reinforcement Support ratio size 4 Nos 6φ Rods and 10 to 12mm Corner 150x150x2400mm 6 Nos stirrups at 450 1:2:4 machine crushed granite c/c with 6φ M. The line and point wires shall be circular in section and shall be uniformly galvanized.5 mm and weight of 115 grams per meter length.0 meters distance in straight runs. 1500. Corner posts shall be provided with two struts at all corners and at every angle points of more than 10o and at every 30.S. 1725.C. The fence posts shall be cast in cement concrete as per the specifications mentioned below. Barbed wire used shall conform to IS: 278. 16φ eyebolts to be used as shown in the drawing for tightening the barbed wire.

The specification for various items of works should conform to the relevant clauses of the APSS and shall conform to Bureau of Indian Standards.0 to 15.0 Specification for the construction of control room: The plan of the Control Room is furnished in the enclosed drawing No SS 1 For above ground level the required drawings will be furnished by APEPDCL. 20. The distance between two barbs shall be 75 + 12 mm. design of gate. Below ground level the Contractor has to design the foundations and obtain approval from the Engineer before commencement of works. Main Gate: At the entrance of the substation main entry and in line with the peripheral fence a main gate of size 4.S. The colour of the paint shall be as directed by the Engineer.C Columns and 5Nos.0 M. Fencing should be earthed at each terminal point by providing independent electrode system.C.22mx1. Lintels. The brick shall have a minimum crushing strength of 60 kg per square centimeter. size of Brick Masonry pillars and method of fixing the gate shall be as per the approval of the Engineer. On the top of M. Beams. The size of point wire shall be 2mm dia.S. materials proposed to be used and method of fixing for approval by the Engineer before commencing fabrication.0 …. The paras 11. Referred earlier are applicable to the control house construction also. the name of the substation to be painted with Radium paint in bold letters of size not less than 100 mm.5m and a wicket gate of size 1. After fixing. in the language approved by the Engineer.1 Type of construction: The building to be constructed over 6Nos. 20. Super Structure shall be in brick Masonry in cement mortar 1:6 for all walls. R.2 Foundation: For Reinforced. The location. The barbs shall have four points and shall be formed by twisting two point wires each two turns tightly around one line wire making altogether four complete turns. Refer Drawing No SS7. Second class well burnt country bricks to be used for walls. Sheet. The Contractor shall provide a method statement indicating the design of gate. Roof Slab. Cement Concrete footing a leveling course of 100 mm thick cement concrete 1:4:8 is to be provided with 40 mm HBG metal. The Contractor has to execute accordingly.5mx1. 20. Portico and sunshades shall be of R. Section-5 : Technical Specification 144 .The type of barbed wire shall be of glidden type. the gate to be painted with two coats of red oxide paint and two coats of enamel paint. Minimum of 2m clearances to be maintained between the fencing and the earth grid of the substation. 19.5m to be provided.C.C.

20. R. Bath Section-5 : Technical Specification 145 . In the front elevation of the control house.C.C.3 Basement: Basement with R.Masonry granite stones shall be used.C.Masonry in C.C columns and beams to be provided are indicated in the drawings enclosed. C. Size of each stone shall not be less than 250x250 mm. Anti-termite and antiweed treatment to be provided for flooring. The joints shall not exceed 3mm in width. 20.7 Control room. (Refer Drawing No SS8) All R. with 20 mm thick Shahabad / Bethemcharle polished stone. 150 mm thick leveling course in cement concrete 1:4:8 using 40 mm HBG metal to be provided.Masonry and C. Masonry shall conform to APSS 601.M (1:6) shall be provided for internal walls. For R.8 W.C. office room and Store room: Flooring to be provided with double polished stones 25mm thick over cement concrete bed. The polished stone shall be fixed over cement mortar bed of 25 to 40 mm thick of proportion 1:8.R. The colour of the stone and quarry shall be as approved by the Engineer. 20. 20.C work shall conform to IS : 456.R. C. The pointing material shall be cement sebara putty 1:3 The stone to be used shall be “Bethemcharle” or “Shahabad” variety double polished stone.For walls. Stones shall be fixed over a bed of CM 1:2.Masonry shall conform to APSS 601 and 615.5 Filling foundation and Basement: The work of refilling of foundations and basement is to be done with river sand as per clause 11. 20.R masonry first sort in CM 1:6 shall be constructed for external walls and the exposed faces shall be pointed with cement mortar (1:3). name of the sub-station is to be painted as specified by the Engineer.4 R. Random Rubble Masonry in CM 1:6 to be constructed over the leveling course cement concrete.6 Flooring: Flooring to be provided with 1:4:8 cement concrete with granite metal of 50% of 40 mm and 50% of 20mm size to a thickness of 100mm for all the rooms.R. 20.S. 609 & 611.R.R.2 of the specification. Skirting to be provided with polished stone to 150mm height all round the walls in side the rooms.C Columns and Beams: The details of R.

2 mm at 0. 7. The tiles shall be fixed by using white cement. 3.S. machine made phenol formal dehyde bonded prelaminated on both sides and teak wood lipped conforming to IS : 2191 & IS : 202 of approved quality. 3. conforming to APSS No 1609. The ceramic tiles shall be commercial type (next to class I).10 Door for W.5 mm width. 2.Ceramic tiles of size not less than 200mm x 150 mm x 6mm thick of reputed make. 8. the shutter frame section shall be extruded plastic section of 59x24 mm in the configuration of ‘A’ section. 20. The fixtures and fittings shall be as mentioned below. providing 4.73 kg / RM. 4. 5. make and shade including polishing the door frame and lipping with two coats of polish of approved quality. make and shade along with Aluminum fixtures and fittings such as tower bolts.V. 2.C / Bath P. 20. The door frame shall be made from extruded PVC section of 60x24 mm size with multi chamber cross section with a wall thickness of 25 mm duly reinforced with steel. Aluminum butt hinges Aluminum aldrop Aluminum tower bolts Aluminum door handles Hold fasts 125 mm long 3 Nos 300 mm long 1 No 300 mm long 1 No 150 mm long 2 Nos 6 Nos 20.0 mm thick plain glass fixed to the frame with beeding gasket and glazing chips with all accessories. M.12 Ventilators Aluminum swing ventilators with fixed glass panels using anodised aluminum extruded sections of mat finish for frames and mullions made from approved aluminum sections Section-5 : Technical Specification 146 . 1.9 Doors and windows All doors except WC/Bath shall be with best quality teak wood door frames of 100x75 mm section and shutter of 30mm thick solid core.11 Windows Aluminum Alloy sliding windows with fixed glass panels using anodized aluminum extruded sections of finish for frames and mullions made from approved aluminum sections 62x32x1. Oxidised butt hinges 125 mm long Aluminum aldrop 300 mm long Aluminum top tower bolts 300 mm long Aluminum bottom tower bolts 150 mm long 1 No Aluminum door handles 150 mm long Aluminum door stoppers Rubber silencer Hold fasts 3 Nos 1 No 1 No 2 Nos 1 No 1 No 8 Nos 20. aldrops. 6. uniformly glazed shall be fixed over the cement concrete bed. The paneling section shall be multi chamber hollow plastic section of 20x200mm with tongue and groove. 5. The joints shall be less than 1. The colour and make of the tiles shall be as approved by the Engineer. locking arrangements etc. 4. mild steel butt hinges as mentioned below: 1.C door (Sintex or equivalent) for toilet of approved shade and quality.

the approximate details of the reinforcement are furnished in the enclosed drawings.2 Sun shades: R. curing. 23.61 meters and average thickness of sun shade will be 75mm.Cement plaster with 1:5 mix is to be provided to the exposed faces of the sun shades. vibrating. Machine mixed concrete mix to be used. They shall be finished neatly and cured as per standards.1 Lintels: R.C. 21. centering. 21.0 RCC Roof Slab The Engineer will provide the details of reinforcement.0 Bed blocks under lintels: Bed blocks to be provided under the lintels as per the APSS with cement concrete ratio of 1:3:6 using 20mm HBG Metal with necessary form work. The rate is inclusive of cost of steel. 1:2:4 nominal mix using 12mm to 20mm size machine crushed hard granite metal to be used. scaffolding.C. Required slopes along with lip at the bottom ends are to be provided while plastering the sunshades. including of cement.38x63mm and shutter frame from sections 35x40mm and providing 4. curing including cost of cement.0 The rate is inclusive of materials. all leads.C. Painting The Paints used shall conform to IS : 5-1961. lifts and curing complete.1 Plastering Plastering to walls and roof ceiling is to be done with cement mortar 1:5 proportion 12mm thick on even surface side and 20mm thick on uneven surface side. conforming to APSS No. centering. centering and labour charges. plastering. 1609.C 1:2:4 proportions nominal mix using 12mm to 20mm size machine crushed hard granite metal. binding wire. 22. The rate includes scaffolding. The rate includes.0 mm plain glass fitted to frame with beeding. R.C roof slab shall be plastered immediately after laying with 1:2 cement mix 20mm thick using water proof cement compound at 1 Kg per bag of cement complying to IS:2645 duly forming necessary slopes towards rain water pipes. steel etc. The size of the lintels shall be as per the directions of the Engineer. To have knowledge about the quantum of work involved. The width of the sun shade from the outer edge of the lintel is 0. 22. Woodwork: Two coats of synthetic Enamel paint first grade of approved make and colour over one coat of primary (total 3 coats) Section-5 : Technical Specification 147 . steel etc. 21.C 1:2:4 proportion nominal mix to be used. vibrating. gasket and glazing chips of size 17x19mm and with all accessories.

Approval of specimen paint by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of his full and entire liability as to the life and quality of paints. The paints used shall conform to relevant IS and samples shall be submitted and got approved by the Engineer. Roof slab of 100 mm thick in R. Battery Room:Two coats of rubber based acid resisting Enamel paint to the walls and ceiling preferably Asian Panits/Nerolac Paints Outside Walls: Two coats of cement paint snowcem / durocem or other paint of identical or better quality of approved colour and make over a primary coat (total 3 coats).6 x 0.9x2.Steel work: Two coats of synthetic Enamel paint of approved make and colour. Brick Masonry with cement mortar 1:6 to be constructed on all 4 side of the tank to a thickness of 230 mm. cost and conveyance of paints and sundries. The rate quoted for each item is inclusive of scaffolding. The Contractor is responsible upto the time of final inspection and acceptance.5 meters long 100mm dia A. Two-way reinforcement for roof slab is to be provided with 10mm and 8mm ribbed steel rods at 150mm centre to centre. over one coat of red oxide paint of approved make.C. Baffle walls as required from the inlet pipe level towards floor of the septic tank to be constructed with 115mm thick brick wall in CM 1:6. Ventilating pipe with cowl.3 meters (inner dimensions) is to be constructed. inner sides.C. 24.6 meters for manhole shall be provided. lifts etc. The floor. Internal Walls: Two coats of oil bound distemper of approved make and colour. top and up to 600 mm below ground level on the outside walls shall be plastered with 1:3 cement mortar to a thickness of 20mm. At the bottom of the pit. Section-5 : Technical Specification 148 .C 1:2:4 with 12 to 20 mm machine crushed metal. with an opening of 0. over one coat of cement primer paint. Only ready mixed paints in sealed containers to be used. The center of the outlet pipe should be 150mm below the center of the inlet. including all leads.0 Septic Tank: Septic tank of size 2x0. The outlet from the septic tank should be standard “T” fitting of glazed earthen wear pipe. sand filling is to be done to a height of 150 mm. Over the sand filling 150 mm thick cement concrete 1:3:6 mix to be provided with 20mm granite metal. and labour charges. Septic tanks to be provided with 4. The Contractor shall take into account the conditions of the surfaces to be painted (for Ex: aging of plasters etc). Painted surfaces shall appear absolutely even and free from any trace of brush marks.

25. 26. The Contractor shall also establish the suitability of water for drinking purpose by carrying out necessary laboratory tests on water samples from a laboratory approved by the Engineer. devices and appliances to be furnished and installed hereunder.1 Specification for drilling and installation of Bore wells Section-5 : Technical Specification 149 . Providing 1000-liter PVC water storage tank sintex or equivalent approved quality and providing distribution main from this tank to control building. All plumbing fixtures and accessories. The tank should be provided with 0. From the toilet room line connection to flush tank to be provided. Laying. stopped ends etc wherever required. shoes. pipes and special shall conform to IS:651.I. All rain water pipes shall be fixed 40mm clear of extreme outer face of walls with strong galvanized malleable steel holder bats having 125 mm long ragged tail and circled strap in two pieces with galvanized bolted connections. The Stone Ware Glazed pipe line with 150mm dia shall be laid from the toilet to the septic tank.The floor of the tank should slope at 1 in 30 towards one end to facilitate cleaning of deposits and the manhole should be above this. Any surplus putty shall be neatly cleaned off. The Contractor shall provide proper purpose made swan neck bends.C. shall include the following: Investigation for and subsequently drilling a bore well.6m sizes C. 26. plinth bends. The rain water pipes shall be fixed in positions shown by the Engineer. The pipe joints shall be filled in with cement paste. equipment. installing necessary pump. and materials. jointing and testing shall be carried out in accordance with IS specifications to the satisfaction of Engineer. Principal Items: Principal items of work to be performed. frame and cover for manhole. providing and laying of supply pipe line.W. The upper part of the 100mm long shoulder shall be wrapped in hemp or yarn and coated with linseed oil putty to form a tight sealed joint with the length below. The rain water pipes shall have beaded shoulders 100 mm distant from the lower ends and fitted so that each length rests on the pipe section below. Rain Water Pipes: Asbestos Cement Rain Water down take pipes of 100 mm dia to be provided with required specials such as bends.6 m x 0. The S.0 A.0 Water supply: The Contractor shall drill and install bore well for source of water. Water supply piping is required to the building and to all earth pits in switchyard. shoes and fixed with clamps on teak wood gutties with screws etc.

A 20 mm dia GI pipe shall be supplied and line laid from the bore well and connected to the PVC water storage tank installed over control building. It shall have an inlet horn for connecting flush pipe. The pan shall have integral flushing of suitable type.0 Water closet One number Indian type (Orissa pattern) of size 580mm in white colour. 27. Unions. The bore of 150 mm dia shall be drilled into the soil with a rotary rig up to required depth into the water bearing strata.50 m with minimum of 0. Contractor’s scope of supply also includes. The required total yield is approximately 40 litres per minute. The flushing inlet shall be in the Section-5 : Technical Specification 150 . After drilling of bore well a casing pipe of PVC to suit the 150 mm dia bore shall be lowered to a depth of 12M.2 Power supply to pump set Power supply feeder for the pump is to be provided in the control building. supply. subject to a maximum of 75 m depth in alluvium. suitable starter shall also be provided. Two separate 12mm dia GI pipelines from the water tank shall be laid. Necessary brass taps 12mm dia of ISI standard shall be supplied and fixed. termination of power and control cables. are encountered before reaching the desired depth.The work involves investigation for drilling and installation of tube wells as per specifications given below at the substation site.3 Piping Work All pipes shall be buried underground. bends. 26. GI specials (viz. parry ware or equivalent quality as approved by the Engineer to be provided. The scope of the Contractor includes cost of pipes. The PVC rigid (HDPE) pipes of 32mm dia and 25mm dia of approved make as per ISI standard shall be provided in the bore well to the required depth including assembly of gunmetal foot valve. In case. the hole drilled shall be encased provided strata samples indicate presence of some water bearing formations. The other ends of the HDPE pipes shall be connected to an electric pump of sufficient capacity to lift the water from the bottom of the borehole to the storage tank. laying. the casing shall be sunk as fast as the drilling proceeds. boulder formations. tees. One connection shall lead to the toilet and the other line shall be laid up to the switchyard. Otherwise it shall be abandoned at the discretion of the Engineer. not penetrable by the rig in use. Where caving material is encountered. 26. nipples GM wheel valves etc) final scheme will be subject to approval of drawing by the Engineer at site. It shall have weep hole at the flushing inlet of the pan. The Contractor shall take suitable precautions to guard against caving in of soil into the borehole. The flushing sim and inlet shall be of the self-draining type. For outdoor pipes the minimum depth under finished surface shall be 0. It is emphasized that the tube well will be the sole source of water for the substation and hence a continuous and adequate supply must be ensured. couplings.20m of sand cover over the pipe.

front. The inside of the bottom of the pan shall have sufficient slope from the front towards the outlet and the surface shall be uniform and smooth to unable easy and quick disposal while flushing. Pan shall be provided with 100 mm ‘P’ trap with approximately 50mm effective water seal and 50mm dia vent horn. The pan shall conform to IS : 2556. 28.0 Roads The roads shall be 6 meters wide with kerbs on either side The cutting and embarkment to be done for a top width of 10 meters to get the road to be formed to even level and required gradient. 150mm thick metal base to be formed for 5.0 meters width using 63mm granite metal and red gravel. Over this 75mm thick top smooth surface to be formed using 40mm HBG metal and red gravel. Each layer to be well consolidated duly wetting and using 8 to 10 tonne power roller. Road formation shall conform to APSS 1501 and APSS 1506. 29.0 Security Fence Security fence to be provided by the Contractor as per the drawing enclosed with the prior approval of Engineer. [Refer SS9] 29.1 Retaining Wall: Retaining wall round the switchyard to be provided as shown in the drawing (SS9). The retaining wall to be constructed over a bed of CC (1:4;8) mix 150mm thick, using 20mm size granite metal. R.R. Masonry in CM (1:6) shall be constructed below the ground level. The Engineer depending upon the soils will decide the height of R.R. Masonry. Above the ground level C.R Masonry first sort in CM (1:6) to be constructed. The faces of C.R Masonry shall be pointed in CM (1:3). Granite stone to be used for RR Masonry and C.R.. Masonry. 29.2 Security Fencing: drawing enclosed. The Security fencing shall be constructed as per the details in the

29.3

1.22m Wide Gate For security fencing a gate of 1.22mtr wide and 1.5m high to be provided at the location approved by the Engineer. This shall be galvanized tubular construction with well-arranged framework to ensure stiffness and rigidity combined with lightweight. This shall be single leaf with necessary pillars and hinges. The gate shall be provided with suitable locking arrangement and welded to R.S. Joists, fixed at both ends and concreted firmly in the retaining wall.

Section-5 : Technical Specification

151

30.0

The location, design of gate and method of fixing the gate shall be as per the approval of the Engineer. Electrification of Control House: The Contractor shall provide a drawing for electrification of control house detailing the various points to be provided for the approval of the Engineer. The wiring work is to be done with PVC unsheathed aluminum cable in surface PVC conduit. At least one switchboard in each room is to be provided at the location approved by the Engineer. All switch boards to be provided on suitable size teakwood boxes, covered with white decolam sheet. PVC conduits are to be fixed in the walls and roof slab by suitable arrangement and to be concealed neatly. G.I. Wire No 14 to be left over in conduct pipes to draw wires at a later date. Only reputable makes of fittings, switches fans etc., such as Philips, Compton Greaves, Northwest or their equivalent quality to be used. The Engineer before commencement of work must approve samples of fittings, switches and all other materials being used in the work. Holes made in the walls for fixing fittings and for taking mains are to be closed with cement mortar and neatly finished. Ceiling fans to be fixed with regulators and exhaust fan and its mounting shall be painted with acid resistance paint.

31.0

Substation Steel Structures The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for designing and detailing of the steel structures and for their satisfactory performance. [Refer drawing No SS 2 for guidance] All safety clearances to be maintained as per I.E Rules 1956. Minimum size of structure supports shall be 150x150mm BF beam. All members shall be with M.S.Channel of minimum size 100x50x6.4mm. All M.S. bolts and nuts to be hot dip galvanised. While designing the structures the following points shall be kept in view. a) 33KV Bay width shall be 4.5 meters b) 11KV Auxiliary & Feeder Bay width shall be 4.5 meters c) Minimum height of over head line take off 6.4 meters d) Type of AB switches for 33KV - 800A double break Horizontal type For 11KV LV-800A double break

Section-5 : Technical Specification

152

e) 33 KV Lightening Arrestors f) 11 KV Lightening Arrestors g) Bus conductor

Horizontal type for 11KV Feeder- 400A single break Horizontal type Bus - Station type Bus - Station type, Feeder-line type 200 Sqmm Panther AAAC/ACSR

Provision to be made for erection of Group Control Breaker on 33 KV side Provision shall be made for erection of HV & LV breakers for the Power Transformers, 33KV & 11KV station type LA’s to be erected on the structures in the respective buses. 3Nos. Single Phase P.T’s to be erected in 33 KV bay on the structure, 11KV three phase P.T to be erected on the structure in 11KV Auxiliary bay and 33KV H.G Fuse set to be erected on independent structure. Galvanised step bolts to be provided for the vertical support. Station transformer with AB Switch and HG fuse set to be erected on structure. All 33KV AB switches should be 800A double break horizontal, both at sub-station and also in the line. 11KV AB switches on LV side of PTR should be 800A double break horizontal. 11KV feeder AB switches at sub-station should be 400A single break horizontal. 31.1 Standards Structures steel shall conform to IS: 2062. High tensile structural steel shall conform to IS: 961. All materials for rolled shapes and plates shall be hot rolled structural mild steel. Fabrication of structures shall conform to IS: 802 1978 Part II. Special care to be taken with regard to straightening and punching of holes cutting may be effected by sawing. The surfaces so cut shall be clean, smooth, and free from any distortion. Holes in the members shall either be drilled or punched and shall not be formed by flame cutting process. All deforms left by punching or drilling shall be completely removed. Hot dip galvanizing shall conform to IS: 2629, IS: 2633 and IS: 6745. 31.2 Fasteners and Bolts Bolts used for erection shall preferably be 16mm diameter. In no case bolt diameter shall be less than 12mm and more than 20mm. The length of the bolt shall be such that the threaded portion does not lie in the plane of contact of members. It shall also be ensured that the threaded portion of the bolt protrudes not less than 3mm and not more than 8mm over the nut after it is fully tightened. Holes shall be cylindrical and perpendicular to the structural member. Oval or lobed forms of holes shall not be permitted. The diameter of the hole shall be equal to the diameter of the bolt plus 1.5 mm. 31.3 Spring Washers Spring washers of positive lock type of the following thickness shall be provided for insertion under all nuts. Bolt dia Thickness of spring washer

Section-5 : Technical Specification

153

12mm 16 mm 20 mm 31.4 Tolerances

2.5 mm 3.5 mm 4.0 mm

The maximum allowable difference in diameter of the holes on the two sides of the channel, Angle or plate shall be 0.8 mm, that is, the allowable taper in a punched hole shall not exceed 0.8mm on diameter. The maximum allowable tolerance cumulative and between consecutive holes shall be within +/- 0.5 mm. Tolerance on overall length of a member shall be with in +/- 1.6 mm. Tolerance on gauge distance shall be within +/- 0.5 mm. 31.5 Inspection One set of structures is to be fabricated for inspection, after approval of the drawings from Engineer and offered for inspection. Balance structures to be fabricated after receipt of approval for the first set. All gauges, templates necessary for conducting tests shall be made available at the time of inspection. 32.0 Foundation Works The details of type of foundations for structures, Power transformer plinth, V.C.B’s and Security fence are enclosed along with bid document. The Contractor shall verify these details and submit the detailed drawings along with the design details for the structures, electro mechanical equipments etc., for the approval by the Engineer. 32.1 General Requirements Safety factor of foundation for uplifting force shall not be less than two. The weight of earth may be assumed to be 1.6 Tonne / m3. The Contractor at site shall verify all the soil data after necessary geo technical investigations before final designs. The tolerance for verticality, Horizontal and bending shall be maintained with the limits as specified in IS standards. The detail drawings shall at least include Detailed dimensions of foundation Details of placing of all reinforcing steel, which shall conform to the latest I.S. Specifications. Details of type, size and length of each reinforcing steel including details of bar bending. 33.0 Installation of Equipment General

Section-5 : Technical Specification

154

such services shall be arranged by the Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer. store.. Where the instruments.. Packing cases and packing materials except for spares shall be cleared from sites at the end of the each day. relays and other delicate devices. shall be replaced at no extra cost. relays are supplied separately. All installations shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the approved drawings.All the equipment and accessories covered under this contract shall be installed in accordance with specified Indian Standard code of practice and the manufacturers instructions. Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section. suitable barriers and notices to prevent accidental injury shall cordon off which has been made alive after installation and before commissioning such equipment. 33. The Contractor shall also adjustments / alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit Switches and their operating mechanism. they shall be mounted only after the associated switchgear / control panels are erected and aligned.1 Power Transformer Erection 33.. switch gear. relevant items and accessories to the place of installation and wherever necessary assemble all parts of equipment. The Contractor shall submit a method statement detailing the method of installation. the Contractor necessary mechanical and electrical connections between sections connection between bus bars and wires. testing and commissioning of various equipment and accessories for approval by the Engineer. AB Care shall be taken in handling instruments. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to engage specialist / manufacturers Engineers to supervise installation work for plant items such as transformers.. The blocking materials / mechanism employed for the safe transit of the instruments and relays shall be removed after ensuring that the panels have been completely installed and no further movement of the same would be necessary. Battery with charger etc. shall make all including the do necessary breakers. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to supply. The Contractor shall provide consumables etc. In order to avoid hazards to personnel moving around the equipment such as switchgear etc. Any damage to relays etc shall be reported immediately to the Engineer and all damaged instruments etc. move / transport from storage yard / shed etc.1 Packing and Dispatch Section-5 : Technical Specification 155 . strictly in accordance with the specification and approved drawings.1. required for installation all tools and equipment.

This space is to be filled with pure dry air or inert gas under atmospheric pressure. All fragile parts such as temperature indicators. expulsion vent. The rollers of the transformer are to be removed before leaving the works. All openings created on the tank by the removal of components are to be blanked with identifiable blanking plates. When any internal parts like tap changers etc.e. Jacks and pull lifts chain pully block of adequate capacity are to be used to slide the transformer over a pair of rails placed on the sleeper platform bridging the trailer width in full. the detached parts are to be packed / crated and to be dispatched along with the main body of the unit so that all the parts are received at the destination with the unit.1. shall be carefully packed to avoid breakage in transit. The road system is to be examined in detail on the following points. All openings on the fittings removed are also closed with blanking plates.1. To prevent the trailer from toppling when the transformer is moved to the platform the stage end of the trailer is supported by a sleeper pack.The mode of transport i. rail or road has to be chosen depending on the transport facilities available for the route and transformer size and weight. All external fittings such as Conservator. 33.. In case the tank is filled with inert gas. Multi axel tractor driven low-platform trailers are to be used in case of road transport. The rails may be greased for easy movement. In the absence of any crane facility.3 Road Transport Generally road transport is preferred to in the case of smaller units or where rail links are not available or where well developed road systems exist. oil level gauges etc. the transformers are to be unloaded from the trailers near the railway track into a platform of adequate height built up of wooden sleepers.. Width of the road Bridges and culverts Section-5 : Technical Specification 156 . Dehydrating breather. Transformer tank is to be filled with oil or pure inert gas like nitrogen depending on the transport weight limitations.. transformers etc. a positive pressure according to manufacturer’s standard practice shall be maintained. are to be removed for transportation. radiators etc. shall be removed and packed separately. they are to be dispatched in tanks. In case the tank is filled with oil. sufficient space is to be left above the oil to take care of the expansion of oil. Mobile cranes or railway cranes are to be used for loading the units into the wagons. 33. From the platform the transformer is slid onto the wagon taking care to have the rails for the full width of wagon. which are liable to damage in transit. The tractors should have adequate hauling capacity and the trailers loading capacity. Buchholtz relay.2 Rail Transport Where transformers are transported by rail. filled with oil/inert gas so that they do not absorb moisture. While providing a sleeper stage it should slightly be at a higher level to allow for the increase in height of the trailer while the load is released due to springs getting relaxed.

In the case of night halt or stoppage of the loaded trailer for a fairly long duration. Where no crane facility is available.1. the transformer is to be unloaded on to a sleeper platform and gradually lowered to plinth level. Electric utility power lines to foul should be switched off and lifted temporarily / dismantled while the load is moved. crowbars etc and sufficient trained staff should be run in front of the vehicle. The transformer is to be leashed on all four sides by wire ropes or chain of adequate size and is tightened using turnbuckles with locking facility. Danger lights should be displayed in the front and rear of the vehicle.Encumbrances enroute Sharp bends Road worthiness Operational constraints of the tractor to be used. Transportation should be avoided during rains. The sleeper platform level is to be at a slightly higher level to allow for the increase in height of the trailer while the load is released Section-5 : Technical Specification 157 . chequer plates. The branches of avenue trees that are likely to foul the equipment should be cleared while the load is moved. Electrical lines and service wires.4 Loading and Leashing Transformers are to be loaded into the tractor-trailer preferably using the cranes. 33. Wooden props also may be used. 33. To clear up any doubts as to the feasibility of the route a rehearsal drive of the tractor trailer unit is to be performed. While running over any bridge or culvert the vehicle should be run at a low speed.1. Using lugs or shackles provided for the purpose should lift transformers and simultaneous use should be made of all such lugs or shackles in order to avoid any unbalance in lifting. Red flags and danger lamps should be exhibited at prominent places to warn the traffic on the route. sleepers. jacks on all sides thus releasing the load from the tires should support the trailer. 33. when ever available.6 Unloading Mobile cranes may be used for unloading the transformers.1. After moving the load for a short distance tightness of the lashings should be checked. The brake system on the tractor-trailer has to be operated carefully whenever the vehicle is running with load.5 Movement A pilot vehicle with all tools and tackles jacks.

Porcelain portion of bushings should be checked for any crack or chipping. All the assembly and erection drawings should be available at site at the time of installation.1. When the transformer dispatched with gas filled. 33. Winches are to be used for putting the transformer into position. wire rope slings D-Shackles etc. Where it is necessary to use Jacks for lifting or unloading. The presence of loose fibers in suspension in transformer oil can reduce materially its insulating properties. only the projections provided for the purpose of jacking should be used. When the transformer is dispatched filled with oil. temperature and pressure shall be checked up and it should be ascertained whether there was any leakage of atmospheric air into the tank. a sample of oil shall be taken from the bottom of the tank and tested to IS: 355.9. In case of leakage the transformer has to be dried. The transformer should always be handled in the normal upright position.9. Lifting equipment such as crane facility or derrick with a chain pulley block. All components dispatched separately shall be cleaned inside and outside before being fitted. In particular the following items will be required. The installation shall conform to IS: 10028 – 1981 [Reaffirmed 1993] 33. Fiber cleaning material shall not be used.2 Site Preparation All tools.1. tackles and other equipments required for the erection work to be arranged at the site before the work is started. 33.8 Installation After thorough inspection the transformer should be erected at its permanent location with radiators.1 Precautions Suitable precautions to be taken while erecting the transformers during rainy season to avoid moisture absorption by the transformer.7 Unpacking and Inspection Packages are to be opened carefully so that the tools used for opening do not cause damage to the contents. 33. conservator and breather fitted and dry oil filled to the correct level.due to springs getting relaxed. Section-5 : Technical Specification 158 . The transformer shall be erected on a level foundation. Fragile instruments are to be inspected for breakage or other damages.1.1.

When rollers are fitted and when the transformer is in the final position.1. transformer oil etc required should be readily available in good condition.Oil purifier 2000lts/hour capacity fitter to be used for purifying oil up to 20. 33. bushings.000 lts.4 Oil Oil is to be dispatched to site separately in sealed steel / HDPE drums. low power factor watt meter “AVO” meter Set of spanners and screw drivers Set of drum opener. (i) Electric strength (BDV) KV less than 72. milli-ammeter. clean and dry. The installation site shall be such that there is easy accessibility for inspecting breather. Oil used for filling and topping up must comply with IS: 355.5 KV – 145 KV class above 145 KV class Water content – PPM (Max) Less than 72. if need be through construction of raised platforms. It should also be possible to have access to the operating mechanisms of on load tap changing equipment etc. pipes.9.5 KV class 72. hammer etc.5 KV class 72. sizes etc of each item depend very much on the type and size of transformer.1. radiators. Clean cotton cloth and cotton waste Brushes for painting PVC wires for connecting meters during testing Set of tarpau lines Earth discharge rods. the wheels shall be locked to prevent accidental movement of the transformer. Oil testing apparatus conforming to IS: 335 Voltmeter. thermometers. crow bar. The capacity. 33. The oil sample from the transformer tank before commissioning should meet the following specifications. At the time of filling the drums it is to be ensured that the oil is filtered. All parts such as gaskets. oil level indicators etc with the transformer energized. The plinth shall be above the maximum flood or storm water level of the site and of the correct size to accommodate the transformer in such a way that no unauthorized person may step on the plinth.3 Unit Erection Transformer tank containing the core and coil assembly should be first placed in the position.9.5 KV – 145 KV above 145 KV : : : 40 50 60 25 PPM 20 PPM 10 PPM (ii) Section-5 : Technical Specification 159 .

some kinds of synthetic rubber hose are also suitable.9. Fire fighting equipment shall be kept near the transformer during the process of drying out.5 Oil Filling: Before filling the oil in the tank. The Contractor shall provide a method statement detailing the proposed method of drying of transformer. When filling a transformer with oil it is preferable that the oil be pumped into the bottom of the tank and that a filter press or other reliable oil drying and cleaning device should be interposed between the pump and the tank.1. he proposes for approval by the Engineer.(iii) (iv) (v) Precautions: Interfacial tension at 25o C N/m (min) Resistivity at 90o C Dielectric dissipation factor (tan delta) at 90o C Max 0.6 Drying of transformer: Before the drying out is started all fittings except coolers and associated accessories shall be fitted. c) Flexible steel hose is recommended for handling oil. Section-5 : Technical Specification 160 . Dirt from draw off value to be removed. 33. but only those known to be satisfactory should be used. But such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his responsibilities for the sufficiency and efficiency of the work.1. d) Oil must not be emptied near naked lights. Samples should not be taken unless the oil has been allowed to settle for 24 hours. Hence samples shall be taken from bottom only.4. Ordinary rubber hose should not be used as oil dissolves the sulphur from the rubber and is there by contaminated. Sampling: Water and water-saturated oil are both heavier than dry oil and sink to the bottom of any container. The process of drying out should be carried out carefully and properly without damaging the transformer insulation through over heating etc.05 a) Keep the oil free from contamination b) Equipment used when handling the oil must be cleaned and washed with transformer oil before use. For the guidance of Engineer : Various methods that can be adopted for drying out a transformer are described below. The transformer shall not be left unattended during any part of the dry out period. it should be tested to meet the requirements as laid down under clause 7. 33.9.03 1x1012 ohm-cm 0. The coolers etc can be conveniently fitted after the successful dryout of windings and insulation. To ensure this a small quantity of oil should be allowed to flow into a separate container before collecting samples for testing. as vapour released is inflammable.

The process is continued till the steady values of insulation resistance are obtained. making sure that all gasketed joints are oil tight and the pipe work is clean and free from moisture. All necessary precautions safety to the Power Transformer under draying operation should be taken. After 8 to 12 hours the cycle is reversed i. The vacuum pump of filter machine should have the capacity of creating vacuum as high as possible but not less than 710 mm of mercury. The temperature of the windings should be in no case exceed 90oC. Further circulation is to be carried out till the oil results are satisfactory. through an opening in the bottom of the tank and is allowed to escape through an opening in the tank top cover. In this case the temperature of oil should be measured at the top and bottom of the tank. The circulation is continued till the insulation resistance and oil samples test are satisfactory. On-load Tap changers: Oil filling and drying out is to be carried out simultaneously along with the transformer.9.. oil is drawn from the top and fed at the bottom.10 Important fittings & Accessories Gaskets: Gaskets: Whenever blanking plates are removed. Conservator: Conservator should be assembled with its pipe work. c) Short Circuit Heating: The transformer can be heated up by short-circuiting the low voltage winding and supplying at the high voltage terminal at reduced voltage.e. The arcing horns if any shall be in proper position. 33. It is preferable to blanket the transformer tank to prevent loss of heat.1. Section-5 : Technical Specification 161 . The temperature of the air raised gradually to 55oC in the first 8 hours. To start with oil is drawn from the bottom and let into the transformer at the top. Bushings: Bushings shall be cleaned thoroughly and checked for any damage. The supply voltage should be maintained in such a way that the current in the windings does not exceed 70 percent of normal full load current and the oil temperature about 75oC. values will be low till the moisture come out of insulation and start raising before steadying. 65oC in the second 8 hours and 75o – 80oC in the third 8 hours.7 Circulation of oil in Radiators and Tap Changers: Oil samples are to be taken out and tested. The speed of the air shall not exceed 600m per minute. The oil temperature should be of the order of 60oC and in no case it should exceed 70oC. Sufficient flexibility in the connecting leads should be provided to avoid mechanical stress on the bushing. b) Hot air circulation: Hot air from external heaters is blown into the transformer after draining the oil.1.The bushings shall be lifted or using soft manila ropes.a) By using Filter Machine The most practicable method of drying out is by circulation of hot oil through a streamline filter machine. 33.R. It will be observed that I. a new gasket shall be used.

v. The angle of inclination should be between 3o and 7o.T.C. and the expulsion vent pipe fitted with suitable gaskets. should be removed.L.Supply as per manufacturers instruction manual. O. The thermometer pocket should be filled with transformer oil. iv. polarity and phase relationship. viii. Checking of ratio. ii. Completion of Erection work: Final topping of oil is to be done in conservator to commensurate with filling oil temperature and wiring work of alarm / trip contacts. iii.Oil to be filled to a level indicated by the oil gauge on the conservator to commensurate with the filling oil temperature. Breathers: Transformer oil should be filled to the correct level in the bottom oil chamber. General Checks: a) b) c) d) All valves are in correct position All air pockets are cleared. 33.C motor is to be connected with A. Resistance measurement of winding Insulation resistance Magnetizing current and iron loss Tap changer operation shall be checked for a) Manual operation b) Local electrical operation c) Remote electrical operation d) Parallel operation Beholds relay test by injecting air through the test petcock. Section-5 : Technical Specification 162 . vii. the silica gel shall be blue in colour. vi. tanks of tap changer and radiator banks. It is to be ensured that breathing holes at the bottom of the seal is not blocked by dirt etc. Temperature Indicators: The accuracy of all thermal indicators shall be checked by hot oil or water bath.1. Thermometer pockets are filled with oil Oil is at correct level in the conservator tank etc.11 Testing and Commissioning: The following pre-commissioning tests to be carried out i. Tank surface is retouched with paint wherever required and transformer is made ready for the commissioning tests. Buchholtz Relay: Buchholtz to be tested for correct functioning by injecting air through the test petcock when full of oil. earthing of neutral and transformer tank to be completed. Protection for Thermal indicators shall be tested for accuracy at various temperatures and set at required temperatures depending on ambient temperature and loading condition. Expulsion Vent: The temporary cover. Oil samples to be checked from top and bottom of tanks. which is provided over expulsion vent flange on the tank cover.

Each cell shall be filled with electrolyte in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. the transformer to be switched off. 33. The transformer can now be recharged and loaded gradually. Arcing horn gaps on bushings are properly adjusted. The steel structure shall be as per the manufacturers drawing details. hum etc. Battery shall be set upon racks as soon as possible after receipt utilizing lifting devices. control and relay panels shall be installed in accordance with specified code or practice and manufacturers instructions.e) f) g) h) Earthing connections are done The colour of the silica gel (Blue) and oil in the breather cup at the bottom. All protective relays should be reset to normal values. Each cell shall be inspected for breakage and condition of cover seals as soon as received at site.2 Switchgear. The height of the plinth and structures to be designed to maintain minimum safety ground clearances as per I.2metres height above the ground level. Section-5 : Technical Specification 163 . coated with protective grease and assembled. if no abnormality is observed switch off the L. Contact surfaces of battery terminals and inter cell connectors shall be cleaned. Each cell shall be tested with hydrometer and results recorded.I wire closely wound in the spring shape. If all the above tests / checks are found satisfactory. Abnormalities noticed should be corrected. Handle shall be earthed through No. The arcing horns shall be adjusted in such a way that they close first and open later simultaneously in all the three phases. if necessary. the transformer is to be connected on both HV and LV sides by using Bimetallic clamps. Freshening charge. The operation of AB Switches shall be checked for simultaneous opening and closing of contacts in all the three phases.E Rules.3 Battery and Battery Charger Installation and testing of Battery and Battery charger shall be done in strict compliance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Cells shall not be lifted by the terminals.8. Operating handle shall be rigidly fixed to the structure at 1. Each connection shall be properly tightened. Now the transformer can be connected to source on LV side and watched for any abnormality such as vibration of radiator parts. The rocks shall be of approved design by the Engineer. G. 33. The panels shall be installed on concrete finished surfaces or steel frame. All protective relays to be set at minimum to the extent possible. The Buchholtz relay should be checked for collection of air/gas. Control / Relays: Switchgear. All breakers along with CT are to be erected on concrete foundations. shall be added. After 3 to 4 hours. Alarm / trip contacts shall be checked for correct function.V Source and the transformer to be charged from HV side at no load.

The details of information to be punched to the tags and method of tying shall be finalized in consultation with the Engineer. Resistance test is to be carried out at each joint. 33. comprising of three phases.g. cable jointing termination at both ends and testing of the complete cable installation. cuts or abrasions etc. Cable identification tags shall be fabricated from aluminum sheet.5 Control Cables: This section covers laying of cables in cable ducts. Insulators with cracks or chips or those having glazing defects exceeding 0. Damaged conductor shall not be used. post type insulator stacks and other accessories along with tensioning of conductors and clamping.5 Sq cm shall not be used. clamp and terminal after installation. The stringing of bus conductors covers hoisting of insulator strings. charge and discharge test of battery is to be done. Section-5 : Technical Specification 164 . A test from a conductor to a clamp will count as one interface A test from a jumper two a bus bar via a clamp will count as two interfaces.The battery shall be fully charged and electrolyte shall be at full level and of specified specific gravity.. sharp points. No joints are to be made. and the conductor shall be continuous in the span. The sag of bus conductor shall not be more than 2%. All clamps and lugs shall be of approved quality by the Engineer. The conductor surface shall be clean and smooth without any projections. Aluminum Alloy or Bimetallic clamps and lugs shall be used for all connections between bus and equipment and between equipments. The maximum allowable resistance shall be 10 micro ohms per contact interface. Insulators shall be cleaned and examined before hoisting. All cable ducts laid in Switch Yard and Control Room shall be covered with suitable galvanised MS grills welded to frames. Cable Tags shall be attached to both ends of each cable and at every 5 meters apart. 33. A contact interface is defined as the electrical connection between one component and another.4 Stringing of Bus bar: 33 KV & 11 KV bus in 33 KV substations shall be formed with 200Sqmm Panther AAAC/ACSR to a tension of 250 KG. All clamps and conductors must be wire brushed through contact grease to remove all oxidation before assembly. The jumpering to the equipment shall be arranged properly as per the directions of Engineer. e.

cable compound flux. trenches. Metal sheath and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station. The contractor for passage of cables shall provide rows of 150mm dia AC pipes in a concrete block at road crossings. Control cable terminations shall be made using colour codes as per the directions of Engineer. 33. cable trays. as necessary and shall include supply of accessories in the quoted rates for cable laying. Fuse Set (33KV): Section-5 : Technical Specification 165 . showing the colour codes to be adopted. cable clamps.8 Kg Co2 fire extinguishers shall be provided with first filling conforming to IS: 2878. sand buckets painted with portal red and billed with sand should be provided along with the bucket stand. detailing the method of cable laying and end termination for approval by the Engineer before commencement of the work. LV cables shall be buried at a depth of minimum 750 mm while HV cables shall be buried at a depth of minimum 1000 mm The contractor shall provide cable lugs. twisting and kinking of cables shall be avoided. tapes etc. cable grips. Wherever lugs are compressed. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed layout drawing for cable trenches. ladders and all necessary accessories and fittings are to be provided to complete the installation as per specifications and to the approval of the Engineer.8 H. and long enough to over pass the conductor insulation and shall be of correct size of the conductor used. b) 4Nos.6 Fire Extinguishers: a) 4 Nos.There shall be no joints in between point-to-point termination of the cable. cable tray layouts. and other terminating accessories like jointing ferrules. Cable glands of suitable size to be provided at all such holes for all armoured Cables double compression cable glands shall be used. Trolley type 6.G. 33. the bear ends of the connections shall be covered with insulating sleeves so as to prevent accidental contact with ground or with the adjacent terminals.7 Danger Boards Danger boards of approved size shall be provided at places specified by Engineer 33. Statutory test certificate issued by the Chief Controller of Explosives Department and Cylinder manufacturing test certificate shall be furnished. The Contractor shall drill holes suitable for the cables in cable gland plate wherever necessary. The insulating sleeves shall be fire resistant. Cables are to be laid in cable ducts.. Sharp bending. The bending radius for various types of cables shall not be less than those specified by cable manufacturer.

Drawing No SS11. Confirm that at all points. 22 KV post type insulators to be provided for each stack of insulator (Total 12Nos.if applicable. The finalised design will provide the following: a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) The Grid Resistance and Overall Earth Return Impedance values. Confirm that at the fence. This will enable the resistance of any design to be determined. 2Nos. Specify whether the substation is hot or “cold”. 35. for a maximum value of ground current. 34. Where the design makes significant use of vertical rods. Soil resistivity and corrosion data shall either accompany the design specification or the specification will require soil resistivity measurements to be undertaken as part of the design process.0 REQUIREMENTS OF THE FINALISED DESIGN. and whether advantage can be taken from underlying low resistivity soil layers.G. Ensure that there is earth electrode reasonably close to each item of plant which requires connection to it.H. how extensive the design work will be. the fault current distribution within the grid is required to ensure that the rods can carry their proportion of current without damage.) Tinned Coated Copper flat of 25x6mm to be used for horns Bimetallic connectors to be provided for giving connection to AAAC/ACSR conductor at both ends. It will also give an early indication as to if the site will be hot.Fuse set to be provided by the Contractor on the independent structures as per the drawing enclosed. Earthing: Requirements The substation earthing system shall be designed in accordance with the following specifications and IEEE 80 regulations and relevant IS Standards where there is conflict the higher standard shall prevail.0 SOIL RESISTIVITY MEASUREMENTS: Prior to designing the earth grid a soil resistivity test needs to be carried out.0 36. the internal maximum touch and step potentials are below the safe acceptable value. Show the limits of the hot zone . Confirm that the maximum external step potentials are below the safe acceptable value. The earth potential rise (Equipment Potential Rise). the maximum touch potentials are below the safe acceptable value. Section-5 : Technical Specification 166 .

For example. The design will include the following features:• The perimeter of the earth grid will extend for 1m or more outside any metallic fencing. the grid boundary conductor should be shown installed 1.It is important to ensure that site measurements are taken prior to any construction work. Great care must be taken when planning the grid layout to ensure that critical components such as transformer neutral connection points. are provided with direct and duplicated routes to the electrode. in two directions at 900 to each other. Each pipe is to be backfilled with Bentonite or loamy soil (black top soil) with added Gypsum. (iii) Some of the cross members should be laid in rows alongside plant to facilitate the connection of exposed metalwork to the grid. each flat being parallel to the outer conductor where practicable. and normally situated 1.2 seconds 0. • The metallic fencing will be connected to the earth grid in those areas where the perimeter conductor is beyond it.. metallic services should preferably not be used and if possible they should be plastic type from 2m beyond the substation perimeter. Coke and salt are not to be used as backfill as they are corrosive. The cross-members should form squares or oblongs. install one 3m x 150 mm galvanised pipe. to a diameter of 300mm. (ii) Convert the outer ring to a mesh by plotting standard tape across the site. The soil resistivity data should then be used to produce a soil model using a computer modelling tool.6 metres. Ideally services (such as water) should have arrangements to avoid possible transfer potentials.7 seconds Section-5 : Technical Specification 167 .0Mtr deep using standard M. should be spaced a nominal 10 metres apart and laid to a depth of 0. (v) Metal fencing should be connected to the grid at each corner and at points long its length not exceeding 50 metres. This design is similar to the ‘cold’ design with the following exceptions: (i) In cases where it is clear that the substation will require an extended earthing system. For a quick estimation of the Equipment Potential Rise prior to creating a soil model see section 5 below. The permissible limits of step potential and touch potential shall be Maximum Acceptable Step Potential Fault Clearance Times Fault Clearance Times 0.35 seconds 0. The measurement should: • be duplicated in different directions to provide an average • cover the whole site area plus peripheries • determine the likely layering of soil down to a minimum of 20 metres depth. switchgear earth bars etc. Flat electrode.S.0Mtr outside any metallic fencing. They will be bonded to the outer ring and at each crossing point. (iv) At or near to the connection point of each cross member to the perimeter ring electrode.

35 seconds On Soil 3200 V 1800 V On chippings (150 mm) 4600 V 2600 V 195 V 250 V 0. personnel safety and should facilitate proper operation of protective system during the earth fault in the system. 3.No 1. Item Grounding electrodes Earth grid Connection to between electrodes and earth grid Connection between earth grid and equipment (Top connections) Back filling around the electrodes Material to be used 150mm φ (inner dia) 2.75 meters long CI pipe with a flange at the top. Sl. The Contractor shall measure the soil resistivity of the soil in the substation premises. The earth grid shall extend over the entire switchyard. Back fill shall be placed in layers of 150mm. Provision shall be made for thermal expansion of steel flats by giving smooth circular bends. MS flats shall be touched up with zinc-rich paint where holes are drilled at site for bolting to equipment or structures. All junctions and risers in the earth flat shall be properly welded by providing suitable angle pieces for contact between two flats. The earthing system of the substation shall be designed accordingly to ensure equipment safety. uniformly spread along the ditch. After welding. 4. the joints and tap off shall be given a coat of Bitumen paint and then covered with Hessian tape to avoid rusting. design the earthing system of the Substation and furnish the earthing layout along with the materials to be used for approval of the Engineer. 2. Back filling of earth grid trench to be done with good earth. The earth mat should be laid in the presence of the Engineer only.7 seconds 535 V 815 V The short circuit rating of the 33 kV Sub-station is 25 kA for 1 Sec.On Soil 1050 V 600 V On chippings (150 mm) 1400 V 800 V Maximum Acceptable Touch Potential Fault Clearance Times Fault Clearance Times 0. free of stones and other harmful mixtures. Bending shall not cause any fatigue in the material. Section-5 : Technical Specification 168 . The combined earth grid resistance shall be less than 1 Ohm. and tampered by approved means.2 seconds 0. 75x8mm MS Flat 75x8mm MS Flat 50 x 6mm MS Flat Bentonite The size of trench for burying earth grid shall be 300 mm x 500 mm. 5. The earth mat shall be buried in the ground at a depth of 500mm.

L) PSCC poles with necessary Cantilever arrangement utilising 40mm dia G.No Particulars illumination level Vertical control panels 300 1. Outdoor switch yard 20 5. Store room 100 9. c) An earthing pad shall be provided under each operating handle of the isolator and operating mechanism of the circuit breakers. MCCB. The lights shall be fixed on 8. Approach roads 20 7.I. The rate is inclusive of all accessories such as G.B. Carrier room 300 4. The following are the recommended values of intensity of illumination: Average S. Operating handle of the isolator and supporting structures shall be bonded together by a flexible connection and connected to the earthing grid. The lighting system of a particular area.G. d) All equipment and switchgear etc.E Rules 1956. erected shall be earthed as per I..0 Work details: a) Transformer Neutral connection earth electrode shall never be used for the equipment earthing.0Mtrs/200 Kg (W. Battery room 100 3. clamps. Earth connection shall be as short and as straight as practicable.Set room 150 Limiting 19 19 19 16 - 6A capacity MCCB to be provided for each light in an enclosed junction box at the bottom of pole.Pipe. Cable etc required for the lights.0 Illumination of Switchyard: Philips or equivalent quality 125W (Outdoor type) Sodium Vapour lamps shall be provided for yard lighting at locations indicated by the Engineer. Corridors 70 6.G Metal The work involves spreading of quarry dust to a thickness of 25mm after consolidation of the earth work with a roller and also supply and spreading of 20mm size machine Section-5 : Technical Specification 169 .37. Path ways 20 8. 39. 38. b) A separate earth electrode shall be provided adjacent to the structures supporting lightning arrestors.Pipe. Rear of control panels 150 Control Desks 300 2. whether outdoor or indoor should be designed in such a way that uniform illumination is achieved.I. For arrestors protecting transformers the earth conductors shall be connected directly to the transformer tank. Dark spots should be avoided. D.0 Spreading of H.

The kerbstones shall be buried in the ground up to 100 mm deep. The HBG metal shall be brought from the approved quarry as directed by the Engineer in charge and samples of the HBG metal to be used may be shown to the Engineer in charge and prior approval of the Engineer shall be taken before use. Higher size metal may be separated and removed from the stacks. The trimming of the earth surface for perfect level ground should be carried out and the surface should be watered and rammed for consolidation with suitable means and the earth surface should be given chemical treatment for anti vegetation growth. Spreading of the metal carried out by dumping at lower heights. Required metal quantity may be stacked at suitable area for easy handling for pre measurement. The joints between the kerbstones shall be done in CM 1:6 and plastering the kerbstones shall be done in CM 1:2. Section-5 : Technical Specification 170 . The crushed metal dust or quarry dust should not be allowed to be used. Accompanying notes in the sections that follow supports the steps of the flow chart. 40.0 Earth-grid Design: INTRODUCTION These guidance notes are intended to guide you through the process of designing an effective earth system for a 33/11kV substation installation in accordance with European industry standards. The process is set out below in the form of a flow chart.crushed blue granite metal to a thickness of 75mm over the above quarry dust in the switchyard. Before spreading the HBG metal care shall be taken to remove all the vegetation and roots of the plant. Kerbstones of size 200x200 mm shall be provided in the switchyard to retain the metal all along the periphery of the metal spreading wherever it is required.

S c a l e p la n o 2 . Normally items of plant will be connected to the earth grid via copper or aluminium conductor.e B e n t o 3 . Y b e l o w 5 k V w i t h s o f t w a r e t o d e t e r m in e g G r e s i s t a n c e s & ( i . If concrete supports are to be specified. Z e r o s e q u e n c e ( l e s s T x n e u t r a l c u r c u r r e n t i n e a r t h w s h e a t h s ) 3 . K . This can be achieved by a hollow duct/ channel or incorporating the copper tape within the concrete during production. EARTH DESIGN PROCESS 41.1. e R u s i n g f a u lt c u r r e n t Dgis I e s ? ) S t e p c u s s c l ie n t & t o u c h w it h in li m i t s p o t e n t ia l s 'C o ld ' S it e Y e s S D t e p 7 & t o u c h s o f t w a r e e t e r m in e s t e p p o t e n t ia l s u s in g Y e s N o N o D e s ig n O . Steel structures can be used in a similar way to aluminium to provide the connection between the earth grid and equipment on the top and that shunts are required at each Section-5 : Technical Specification 171 . However. i d R a t 'H o t ' t e O . Y e s 'C o ld ' S i t e D U s e s o f t w a r e t o d e t e r m in e g r i d e t e r m i n e t o w e r c h a i n im p e d a n c e r e s is t a n c e if a p p li c a b l e & c a l c u la t e r e d u c e d & f a u l t c u r r e n t I g G P R u s i n g m o d if ie d f a u l t c u r r e n t S t e p 5 S t e p 6 I g FIG.S t e p 1 s i t e f a u l t c u r r e n t r e n t & i n d u c t io n i r e o r c a b le u r a t i o n f O b t a in : 1 . it is preferable (to avoid theft) for the above ground bond to be accommodated within a support. e x t e n d e N o t e p 7 b u s in g i g n e a r t h g r i d e n d e d g r i d a n g e m e n t N o S U s e G P t e p 4 r P i . K . in many cases it is possible to use the aluminium or steel support structure. C ir c u i t c o n f ig S M t e p 2 e a s u r e s it e s o il r e s is t iv i t y & c r e a t e s u i t a b le s o i l m o d e l u s in g s o f t w a r e S S t e p 3 l a y o u t s t a n d a a v a i la b le s it e C r e a t e m o d e t e p n r 8 g r i d p le : S e a r t h R e d e s s e x t n it e b a c k f i ll d d e e p e a r t h inagr r e a r t h e x a m r p o is e R e d e s i g U s in g f o r d e a r t h g 1r i .0 CONNECTION OF ABOVE GROUND PLANT AND USE OF METALLIC STRUCTURES. d c t o o u n t e w i r e d im e n s i o n s l in s o f t w a 2 r .

which run out radially. BS 7430 provides the following formula to calculate the area required.0 Low Voltage Cables. it is normal to have a number of parallel earth down leads near the base of the structure. Electrodes. as it will help disperse the energy associated with this. This reduces the overall impedance. a different earthing grid design is required. specialist advice should be sought.0 COMMUNICATION FACILITIES Because of the high frequencies involved. based on a starting temperature of 30°C: Mild steel current carrying rating for 1 second Assume current density = 64 A/mm2 = K amps (R.V. For similar reasons. For further details. which increases in thickness with age and could create a high resistance at steel . Above a temperature of 419°C damage will be caused to the protective zinc. The mast itself will normally carry most of the fault/lightning current down to the base. 44.0 APPENDIX A . This attempts to maximize the amount of conductor in the immediate vicinity of the structure. A calculation is required to ensure that the steel has sufficient cross-section area and that the final temperature will not exceed 250°C for a bolted joint. The overall design should seek to minimize any potential difference across the earthing system during the strike. Particular attention is required to the bonding/termination of pilot and communication cables and the earthing arrangement for the LV supply.85x10-6 Kg/mm³ 42.e. Where (as is usually the case). Galvanizing (zinc coating) of the steel forms an oxide.bolted joint position. 43. The sheaths of these cables must be bonded to the substation grid. are relatively close together and arranged symmetrically may be used in addition to rods. BS 7430) i. are not suitable for supplying customers outside if there is any possibility of the Equipment Potential Rise exceeding 430V/650V (as appropriate).EARTH GRID RESISTANCE GRAPH Section-5 : Technical Specification 172 . each of which terminate in an earth rod. cables for which the neutral/earth connection is within the substation. house supplies to a substation should not be provided direct from an adjacent L. The substation earthing system will be especially important in the event of a lightning strike to the communication tower. even if down leads are fitted. (i) (ii) Cables used exclusively for “in house” supplies.steel jointing surfaces.V.S) per mm2 Minimum cross-section area for 3 seconds duration is : If × t 3 = Kg/cm³/m 64 k Where k is 64 (see table 8. Cables used for supplying external loads. L. the density of mild steel = 7. network. the communication facility shares the same site as a substation. For example. and then the two earthing systems would normally be well interconnected.M. at a microwave dish or large aerial.

10 25 ohm/m 10000 22500 Area Of Grid ( sqm) 25 50 100 150 300 500 1000 3000 5000 10000 Soil Resistivity (ohm/m) PRECOMMISSIONING CHECKS AND TESTS The Contractor shall provide a statement of pre-commissioning checks / tests he proposes to do for various lines and equipment he has erected / proposed to erect atleast one month in advance before commissioning along with the test procedures and formats. in which the test results will be recorded for approval. The Contractor shall be required to conduct tests and checks in accordance with but not limited to those listed below to the satisfaction of the Engineer before commissioning.00 100.00 1. In particular the Contractor shall conduct the following checks / tests before commissioning.01 4 9 173 . This can be used as a quick guide as to determine the value of Equipment Potential Rise of the grid. Having established an equivalent soil resistivity from the site measurements the grid resistance can be read off the y-axis for the grid area under consideration along the x-axis. The resistance can then be multiplied by the fault current to give the Equipment Potential rise Minimum Theoretical Resistance For Various Soil Resistivities Of Earth Grid 10000. Section-5 : Technical Specification 40000 1600 2500 3600 4900 6400 8100 100 144 196 256 324 400 484 576 676 784 900 16 25 36 49 64 81 0.00 10k ohm/m Resistance Grid (ohm/m) Of 10.The graph below shows the minimum theoretical resistance of a mesh grid for different soil resistivities and grid area.00 1000.00 0.

Oil samples from top and bottom tanks. 8. Thermal indicators shall be calibrated and contacts set for WTI and OTI for alarm and trip depending upon ambient temperatures and loading conditions. Magnetic oil level gauge: The low level alarm of the oil gauge shall be checked.V. polarity and phase relationship. 13. test certificates. Battery with charger is erected conforming to specification. Insulation of the cables to be checked.G. danger boards and name boards are provided at all required locations. 33/11 kV Substations: Before commissioning ensure that: 1.A. Complete set of drawings. In case of OLTC continuity during tap change is to be ensured. 5. Protection is to be checked. Yard is clean and drainage is proper. 2. B. Earthing is provided as per the approved drawings and earth resistance is with in allowable limits. 1. Resistance measurement of winding to be done at all tap positions. 3. Magnetizing current and iron losses 5. The oil in the bottom cup of silica gel Section-5 : Technical Specification 174 . 7.Fuse is correct gauge and shape.. peripheral fence. earthing connections are made properly. 10.A. Insulation resistance 4. 9. H. 8. security fence. Test have been performed as mentioned in para K and L. 6. control house construction. A check of the relevant inspection forms is necessary. 2. 12. Control cables are laid and terminated as per the approved drawing / methods. Buchottlz Relay operation for alarm and trip are checked by injecting air through the test petcock. bore well construction. 11. All civil works including yard leveling.C panel and D. tap changer and radiators shall be checked. Power Transformers The following preliminary tests shall be carried out and test results recorded.C annunciation panels are erected as per the specification. are as per the technical specification / technical standards. wicket gate. Loss angle measurement of transformer winding to be measured. Yard lighting and control room lighting are provided as per the specification and level of illumination is not less than the minimum required. laying of pipeline etc. L. Colour of silica gel is blue in the breather. instruction manual and complete erection log are all available at site for reference as and when required. 4. 3. Checking of ratio. Turns ratio meter should be used. Fans and Pumps: Check the rotation of fans and pumps wherever they are provided. oil is at correct level and all bushings are cleaned properly.s. Fire extinguishers.parts are hot dip galvanised. main gate. 9. Tap changer: The sequence of operation of the tap changers shall be checked for a) Manual operation b) Local electrical operation c) Remote electrical operation d) Parallel operation 7. Structures are erected as per the approved drawings and all m. The wiring from various accessories to marshalling box shall be checked. All valves are in correct position. 6.

Magnetization curve to be checked. to be checked. 12. 11. 10. Operate the breaker from local control panel. 15. 3. 4. 8.PTR’s existing in the Sub-station. 5. D. 11. Oil is upto the mark and conforms to IS : 335 (oil sample to be tested) There are no oil leaks Measure and record the insulation resistance between control cable and earth. D. 8. Body and structure are grounded at two places. Contact resistance for interrupters is to be measured and recorded by passing 100 amps current through each pole from a primary injection set. H. 17. 14. 5. breather to be ensured. 6. Neutral of PTR should be connected to a separate earth pit other than station earth and not to be connected to the earth mat. connections have been made properly. Tan delta test for EHV bushings also shall be conducted and satisfactory test results are ensured. Check whether All bolts and hard wares are tightened properly. Current Transformers Check whether CT is securely bolted to structure. from control room and then by operating relevant relays for its satisfactory operation. Gas leakage’s etc. DC supply to trip / close circuit to be checked. 10. 7. Wherever there are 2 Nos.T leads are connected properly Independent cables are laid for each CT terminated and ferruled as per the approved drawings. Measure and record IR Values of control wiring between different phases and between each phase to earth..E.C terminals is as per the drawing Breaker mechanism is adjusted as per the manufacturer’s instructions. All alarms to be checked Eg. 16. Measure and record the insulation resistance of CT. 12. Primary injection tests and secondary injection tests are done on all protection relays.C control supply are available Polarity of D. Circuit Breakers 1. 9. Space heaters are in service. 2. If auto reclosing is provided its function also shall be checked. 1. and installed as per approved drawing. Inter locks and anunciators are to be checked for correct operation. All ground clearances to the bushings conform to I. C. Earthing of body and PTR neutral are as per standards / specification. Independent Section-5 : Technical Specification 175 . Control cables are laid and connected as per the approved drawings. Local operating mechanism is in perfect working condition.C and A. 6. Operate the breaker with electrical command and measure the time of opening and closing by graphic recorder or similar equipment (By operating for 5 times). The value of time should be as stipulated by the manufacturers. 9. H. Bushings are clean and no damages observed by visual examination. 3. Rules. 15.V. Breaker body and structure are properly earthed at two places. 4.14. 7. 13. 1 No. 16. 2. Healthy trip circuit bulbs.

2.neutral earth is to be provided for each PTR and a 3rd pit for neutral earthing is to be provided and the above 3 Nos. All tests and checks similar to that of CTs from items No 1 to 3 and 5 to 8 are to be conducted. Protection Relays 1. Polarity test to be conducted to confirm the marking on the CTs. E. Primary Current Secondary Current Calculated ratio Name ratio plate Error Remarks 11. earth pits are to be interconnected in triangular shape. Section-5 : Technical Specification 176 . Measured between IR Temperature Primary – Earth Secondary – Earth Primary – Secondary Secondary resistance of CT as well as its lead resistance to be measured with a wheat stone bridge and values to be recorded. Manufacturer’s test procedures approved by the Engineer are to be checked for each relay. Hence factory test certificates also to be furnished by the Contractor. Insulation resistance test to be conducted and results recorded separately on primary and secondary side. 12 13. a) Primary: Phase – R Measured between Phase – Y Measured between Phase – B Measured between Temperature IR Remarks IR IR b) Secondary: Phase R Y B Polarity Test Ratio Test Resistance Temperature Remarks Above two tests are included in standard tests also. Ratio test to be conducted with a primary injection set and values recorded and Verified with guaranteed technical particulars. Potential Transformers 1. F.

Voltage and specific gravity of each cell is correct. 7. The main distribution is correctly connected. Different current and time setting of relays are to be checked with relay testing set. Check polarity of outgoing system and to ensure that the outgoing leads are properly connected. All cells are in position on wooden stand and insulators 2. 4. 10. 3. 4. Battery and D. a) Relay picking current b) Relay dropout current Surge Arresters Check whether Surge arresters are securely bolted to structure Surge arrester body and structure are earthed at two places HV terminal is properly connected LV terminal is properly earthed Outside porcelain is properly cleaned and no defect is noticed on visual inspection. 7. 3. 3. The battery room is well ventilated and exhaust fans provided. Cells are filled with electrolyte of recommended strength upto the required level. To check insulation resistance of the panel wiring. 1. 6. Battery Charger 1. 4. Insulation resistance is appropriate.2.C System G. To test the functioning of AVR by applying 3 phase AC voltage through a variac and measuring AC input and DC output voltages.C distribution board is satisfactory. If lower values are obtained. 5. 5. 2. H. 6. 6. Relay characteristics are to be tested. The following secondary injection tests are also to be carried out at site. I. Initial charging and discharging cycles were carried out as per manufacturers recommendations. To check and ensure that panel wiring is done as per approved drawing. Before being put into commercial operation ensure that: 1. 2. recharging of the battery till correct values are obtained is to be done. 12. To ensure that under voltage relay has been tested in a standard laboratory. To test the transformer for IR value and voltage ratio. 5. 3. single phase preventer and Section-5 : Technical Specification 177 . Check the insulation between arrestor mounting and structure. All cell connections and end take off connections are made and polarity is clearly marked in each cell. 8. no smoking signs etc are installed. 10 hr capacity rating of the battery by discharging process is as per IS : 1652 – 1981. Surge counter if available is properly connected. 4. To ensure that erection is complete in all respects and that the panel has been earthed at two places. Insulation resistance of the cable connecting the battery to the main D. 11. 9. Other distribution boards have been tested as per requirements before charging. 8. To restore AC supply and check operation of contactor. 7. Ensure that mid point earthing is provided.

5. Conductors are properly laid on insulators. 11. 9. Bus-Bars Section-5 : Technical Specification 178 . Structures are earthed at two places 4. 2. To check and ensure auto adjustment of charging current by putting the float charger in auto position. Operational checks to be made by a) Manual closing and opening b) Local closing and opening. c) Remote closing and opening d) Semaphore and lamp indications. A healthy insulator would show no hot spot. 3. where isolator is pneumatically operated. To check all annunciators. This test is to be done by a AGA Thermo vision Camera after the substation is charged. A current around 100 amps is to be passed through each contact from a primary injection set and the current as well milli volt drop measured across each contact from which contact resistance is calculated. K. 2.8. Substation Earth The earth resistance is to be measured and the value thus obtained should be compared with the required value. 10. interlock between contactors. 8. If the actual value is more than the designed value. Contact resistance measurement. Earth switch operation if any 11. Isolators Ensure that 1. Insulators are clean and there is no damage such as hair line cracks etc. To ensure uninterrupted power supply to DC bus by switching off AC supply one by one to boost and float charger. 7. Individual pole units are securely bolted to structure. for 8 hrs. To load the charger with battery and record AC voltage and current and DC voltage and current. Contacts make properly and simultaneously in all three phases. Interlock checks: a) Inter lock with earth switch. Connections are made properly on both sides 3. L. J. Insulators are clean and that there are no damages etc. 4. 10. if any b) Inter lock with circuit breaker M. steps are to be taken to reach the desired value. All post and strain insulators are securely bolted to structure. Insulation resistance to be measured and recorded between poles and between each pole and earth. Insulators Ensure that 1. Rotating bearing and mechanism are lubricated 6. IR values of insulators are to be measured and recorded. 9.

Over all alarm test shall be conducted. 6.T (33KV & 11KV) ELECTRONIC TRIVECTOR METERS 1. 4.0 SCOPE: Section-5 : Technical Specification 179 . 3. 1.Ensure that all insulators are cleaned and there are defects noticed. 5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR H. All structures are earthed at two places and the connections to the ground mat are made. Torque of each connection shall be Resistance of each joint to be measured All control cables shall be tested Complete sub-station trip tests. 2.

salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specific standards shall be clearly brought out in relevant schedule. 3.88 (with latest Energy Meters.T. 1.111. consumers installations / Feeders . who will interpret the meanings of drawings and specification and shall have the power to reject any work or material which. However the material shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering.2 & 0.This specification covers design. engineering. 1997 Reading Instrument IS-5133/1969 Specification for Boxes for the IEC 0687/1992 Enclosure of electrical accessories Static watt hour meters for (part-II Boxes made of Insulating classes 0.5 accuracy and 33KV/110V.1. inspection and testing before supply and delivery free at destination of 11KV/110V. The offered material shall be complete with all components necessary for their effective and trouble free operation. CBIP Technical Report Specification for Common Meter No.5 AC Static Watthour Meters for active IS 14697.2. watt hour meters for amendments) classes 0. Four copies of such standards with authentic English Translations. stage testing. assemble.2 accuracy capable of performing the functions of metering for tariff purpose in all 4 quadrants energy audit. components shall be deemed to be within the scope of Bidder’s supply irrespective of whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and/or the commercial order or not. In case the Bidder who wish to offer material conforming to the other standards. 1999 energy Meters of Class 0.0 Section-5 : Technical Specification 180 .5 material) Equipment conforming to other internationally accepted standards.5 & 0.2 & 0.1 It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of the design & construction of material. 3 element 4wire CT & PT Operated HT Electronic Trivector Meters of class 0. STANDARDS: The equipment shall conform in all respects to the relevant Indian Standard Specification with latest amendments thereto. design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial operation in a manner acceptable to the purchaser. shall be furnished along with the offer. 200/1A.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS: The equipment to be supplied against this Specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions. load survey at various H. All the meters should have suitable in built network interface hardware for RMR (Remote Meter Reading) compatibility to read data through Dial – up modems and also through GSM modems. International & Indian Standard Title Internationally recognized standard CBIP Technical Report Specification for AC Static Electrical IEC 687/1992 –Static No. May.1 2. 200/1A/ (-/5A) 3 element 4wire CT & PT Operated HT Electronic Trivector Meters of class 0. in his judgment is not in accordance therewith. manufacture. 2. Such. Which ensure equal or higher quality than the standards mentioned above would also be acceptable.

conducive to rust and fungus growth.10. Item Specification 1. Heavy lightning also occurs during June to October 4.C) Min.C) Max. 5. of phases System of earthing To be installed in VCB panels.) 50 Hz +/-5% Three Solidly grounded TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS: MATERIAL USED: The meter shall be made out of high quality materials to ensure higher reliability and long life with self extinguishable type polycarbonate meter casing.m) Isoceraunic level (days per year) Seismic level (Horizontal accn. altitude above mean sea level (m) Average Annual rainfall (mm) Max. ambient air temperature in a closed (deg. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) Location Max. independently to ensure that the internal parts are not accessible for tampering etc.Sl.1 Type of Installation System voltage System frequency No. 45 Db Moderately hot and humid tropical climate. It should be compact and of reliable design to make it immune to vibrations and shocks in normal transportation and should be capable of withstanding severest stresses likely to occur in actual service. wind pressure (kg/sq.g. 5. without breaking the seals. 4. terminal cover etc. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. may be used for the purpose. Primary Voltage 11 kV to 220KV for meter specified Secondary voltage 110V phase to phase Primary current 10A and above Secondary current 1A /5A for meter specified 181 Section-5 : Technical Specification . 2. No.0 PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS: The material shall conform to the following specific parameters: SI. 3. Relative Humidity (%) Max.) Noise Level At various Sub-stations in the state of Andhra Pradesh 50 60 7. Ambient air temperature (deg.0 5.. 5.C) Average daily ambient air temperature (deg. 110 V phase to phase (+20%. The soldering if any shall be perfect without dry solders. No.C) Max.-30%. ambient air temperature (deg. The climatic conditions are prone to wide variations in the ambient conditions. The construction of the meter shall be such as to permit sealing of the meter cover.2 SUPPLY SYSTEM: The HT Trivector meters should be suitable on HV & EHV system by using necessary CT and PTs of. The latest state of the art technology of surface mounting of components etc.5 35 100 1000 925 200 50 0.

range -30% to + 20% +/-5% Zero lag-unity-zero lead However manufacturer can offer meters which can withstand higher variations 5.e. Reactive energy kVARH/ (lag & lead) 4. But active energy and reactive measurements should have the class of accuracy 0. The accuracy should not drift with time. B. MD values with 10. ii) Current Circuit: The apparent power taken by each current circuit of the meter shall not exceed 1.5 POWER CONSUMPTION: i) Voltage Circuits: The active and apparent power consumption in each voltage circuit including power supply of the meter at reference voltage reference temperature and reference frequency shall not exceed 1. For 11KV TVR meter: Class of accuracy of meter shall be 0. For 33KV TVR meter: Class of accuracy of meter shall be 0.5 and 1.2.5 Watts and 8 VA per phase. 5.4 ACCURACY: A. Max. LED test/Anomaly indicator of LCD 2.0 VA/phase at basic current and reference frequency. MD reset count 9.6 MEASURING PARAMETERS: The meter should be capable of measuring the following electric parameters of polyphase supplies in all the four quadrants at all power factors lagging or leading. Cumulative MD Previous 11Nos. The accuracy should not drift with time 5. 5. Active energy kWH 3. 88 with latest amendments. of MD resets date & time and source of reset Section-5 : Technical Specification 182 . 1. Elapsed time and rising demand 8.3 POWER SUPPLY VARIATION: The extreme power supply variation which an operating meter should withstand without damage and without degradation of its meteorological characteristics when it is subsequently operated under its operating conditions: Voltage Frequency PF..The meter shall be suitable for balanced and as well as unbalanced loads at all power factors i. Zero lag-Unity-Zero lead..5 as per CBIP technical report No. Zero lag-Unity-Zero lead. Apparent energy kVAH 5. demand with date and time kVA 6. The meter shall be suitable for three phase four wire systems for balanced and as well as unbalanced loads at all power factors i.5. Power factor 7. Display of No. 88 with latest amendments.0 as per CBIP technical report No. But active energy and reactive measurements should have the class of accuracy 0.e.2 and 0.

5. Recording of missing potential & reversal of current with date and time Real time date CT Ratio. 7. M. 4. 19. 1. 5. 20.. demand and raising demand with elapsed time shall be displayed continuously in cyclic order on the meter to enable the EPDCL/consumer to know the above parameters at any instant. 9. kVARH. 3) The meters shall be capable of delivering load survey data for selected days and for selected duration and should be user programmable either through CMRI or from remote metering data terminal PC. 13. 16. 2) At the start of each sequence of display LED/LCD healthiness anomaly shall be displayed.2 Display Parameter (Auto display): The meter should be capable of displaying the following parameters automatically: Sl. 6. Active Energy 2. 18. 17.6. 15. 12. 3. 14.D. No. 2. 12.11. kVAH. date. No. max. 11. 13.D Date of last month M. 10.D Instantaneous Power Factor Line Frequency Self Diagnostic (LCD/ LED segment check & battery check) Real time.D Reset Count Last month M. 5. Reactive Energy Section-5 : Technical Specification 183 .6.3 Parameter Active Energy Reactive Energy Apparent Energy Maximum Demand(Occurrence. 8. PT Ratio TOD register Phase voltage (instantaneous) Phase current (instantaneous) Tamper and fraud details Self diagnostics Frequency Internal multiplying factor of CTs and PTs NOTE: 1) The parameters kWH. Parameter 1. Display Parameter (Push Button): The meter should be capable of displaying the following parameters using push button: Sl. Date & Time) Rising Demand with elapsed time. reset Cumulative M.

5. PT Ratio Self Diagnostics (LCD/ LED segment check & battery check) Read out Parameters with CMRI/ RMR: The following Read out parameters with CMRI/ RMR should be present in the meter: Sl. The meter should have facility of auto display mode where all parameters automatically scroll with in the specified time. 11. 7. 3.D Registers Load Survey Data Temper & Fraud (all event details with date & time) Self diagnostic details (real time calendar. 8.D Values with Date & Time and Source of reset Instantaneous Power Factor Line Frequency Real Time & Date Phase Voltages (Instantaneous) Phase Current (Instantaneous) Number of Tamper events. Provision shall be made to read consumption in either whole units of decimal multiples or sub-multiples of one unit. 10. The meter should start registration of energy at 0. M.D Previous 11 Nos. The number of parameters and the scrolling period shall be field programmable. 12. 2. 8. 13.3 Energy Registers Billing Registers T. All parameters at clause 5.3. 9. 5. It shall be possible to display contents of relevant display with another digit displaying legend for identification of display. with another digit for legend the minimum character height shall be 9 mm. 15. No. through the meter cover without Section-5 : Technical Specification 184 . 4. 4.6.6. 1. The display shall be digital type with non destructive read out.D Reset Count Cumulative M.7 MAXIMUM CURRENT: The maximum current of the meter is 120% Ib at which the meter purports to meet the accuracy requirements. 6. CT Ratio. 5.4 Apparent Energy Maximum Demand (Occurrence.O. 6. 5.1% of basic current (Ib). 16. low battery) 5. Parameter Meter Serial Number. A provision shall be made to read the meter parameters such as MD and consumption etc. Date & Time) Elapsed Time & Rise in Demand M. 7. 14.8 DISPLAY: The meter shall have a minimum 7 digit display of liquid crystal display (LCD) or light emission diode display (LED). Model & Make. so that the registered parameters will not be affected by loss of power. The meter should have non volatile memory.

5. Initially TOD registers are not operated and it should be possible for the Board to invoke them through the use of a CMRI with 2 level pass word protection and necessary software should be loaded by the meter supplier into the Base computer station of the Board for this purpose. Section-5 : Technical Specification 185 .12 TIME OF DAY TARIFF/DEMAND: The meter offered shall contain provisions for multiple tariff metering (time of day metering/demand) and details of the same may be indicated in the tender separately. The meter offered should have a real time clock based on a quartz crystal with a battery totally independent of power supply. 5. The nonvolatile memory should have a minimum retention time of 12 years. The meter shall be capable of being set in to minimum of 8 time zones (optionally more time zones can be offered) in 24 hours cycle to cover morning and evening on and off peak periods separately. reactive energy (lag & lead) and demand data as per CBIP technical report No. and max. Whenever MD is reset the maximum MD value so registered shall be stored along with date and time and source of reset. The registered demand and the number of times the MD is reset shall also be displayed and the information stored. demand with 30/15min. b) Resetting shall also be possible through hand held common meter reading instrument (CMRI) capable of communicating with the meter.9 MAXIMUM DEMAND REGISTRATION: The maximum demand is to be monitored during each demand interval set (30/15 minutes) and the maximum of these in a month shall be stored. Necessary software for invoking the base computer station should be provided.11(b) QUALITY OF SUPPLY: The meter shall provide date & time stamped profiles of each interruptions along with duration. c) Provision for automatic resetting at the end of certain period may be made available and it should be possible to invoke this through CMRI with date and time. 5. 88 (with latest amendments). TOD register shall be provided for active energy. demand data for last 35 days in its memory and it should be possible to transfer this data on to a base computer station through a DOS based hand held CMRI/ through P&T lines.actually opening the meter box cover. 5. 5.10 MD RESET: The meter should have provision of maximum demand resetting. a) Manually by operation of a button which is to be covered and sealing provision available for such cover. KVRH lag & lead. the rising demand should be displayed continuously along with the elapsed time. For this minimum 30 years calendar shall be programmed by the manufacturer. Under the current integration period.11 (a)LOAD SURVEY CAPABILITY: The meter should log any six parameters depending upon the EPDCLs requirements which are selectable from KWH. The base computer shall give complete details of load survey particulars both in numeric data form and in graphic form.

The meter shall be site programmable in case of necessity to use these meters in Import/ Export mode and also TOD features. Dial up software and protocal software for accepting the data from the meter through P&T lines to the base computer station / central computer station. 3. The meter shall also have the following technical features 1. respectively.5. processing and generating appropriate reports. 5. KVA H2 = KWH2 . It is the responsibility of the meter manufacturer to provide the software and all the facilities required by the APEPDCL to use the DOS based hand held CMRI for reading the meter and generating appropriate reports required by the APEPDCL. As and when required TOD parameters must be field invocable.13. In case of lagging load. (c) (iii)DATA SECURITY: The meter manufacturers are responsible for maintaining the security of the data extracted from the meters using manufacturer specific algorithms in the software upto down loading to the base computer station. ANSI Port. processing. Base computer station software for accepting data from hand held terminal/CMRI. 2. (ii) For remote read out there should be two RS 485 ports convertible to RS 232 port / separately one RS -485 and RS-232 port as per the requirement. so that it can be easily connected to a CMRI for data transfer or subsequently hooked to remote metering device such as modem etc. Companies may adopt protocol of their choice but should load the software and the protocol software into base computer station of the APEPDCL. generating reports and down loading instructions from the Base computer station to CMRI. etc. KVA H 2 = KWH2 + RKVA H2 and with leading load. The meter should record and continue to display so long as two potentials are available. of the system and current transformer of suitable ratio. The optical communication port shall also have sealing provision. The RKVA H load contribution shall be blocked. 4.13 REMOTE READ OUT FACILITY/COMMUNICATION CAPABILITY: (i) The meter shall be provided with a galvanically isolated optical communication port (such as IEC-1107 PACT port. The data element size and its over head speed of transmission shall be such that the entire billing data can be transferred within maximum time of 3 minutes. (a) (b) Software to be resident in hand held terminal/CMRI for the purpose of reading and programming the specific make(s) of static meters. with open MOD BUS compatibility. (iii)Software: The following software shall be made available by each meter manufacturer whose meters are to interface with hand held meter reading instrument/CMRI. Voltage and current sources will be available from star-star connected P. The display and recording should have no relevance with reference to the availability of departmental neutral.T. Section-5 : Technical Specification 186 . The meter shall be suitable for lag only tariff.1.

The phase indicators should flicker only on load but not on no loads which is presently available.17 5. Section-5 : Technical Specification 187 . R.Y & B currents for 35 days shall be available for the meters. 7. Sealing arrangement for optical port to be used for communication to CMRI should also be provided. A diagram of connections should be provided inside the cover of terminal block. The live parts and current terminals shall not be accessible from the rear of TTB to prevent tampering. Average Three Phase voltage.8V for Three Phase 4 Wire meters .14 TERMINAL ARRANGEMENTS: The terminals shall be marked properly on terminal block for giving external connections. 9. Each parameter shall be on display for a minimum period of 6 seconds.5. The terminal cover shall be extended such that when it is placed in position it is not possible to approach the connections or connecting wires. The meter should be designed and constructed in such a manner to make it pilfer proof once it is sealed 5. One number separate sealing arrangement to the MD Reset push button. 6.17 ENVIRONMENTAL ASPECTS: Meter shall be designed and constructed to be capable of withstanding all severe stresses and vibration and dust environments likely to be encountered in actual practice as the meter will be installed outdoor in boxes. The terminal block and test terminal block (TTB) with minimum 1 No.mm size. if the voltage falls below 50. each sealing screw. 5. The TTB shall be of good quality and standard make).16 SEALING OF METER: Proper sealing arrangements should be provided on meter to make it tamper proof and avoid mishandling by unauthorised persons . The meter has to record potential missing only when phase voltage is less than 80% of Vn ( nominal voltage) i. The test terminal block shall also have extended terminal cover such that when it is placed in position it is not possible to approach the connections or connecting wires. additional seals by the purchaser. 5. The test terminal block shall have provision for isolating the meter from the instrument transformer secondary connections.15 TEST TERMINAL BLOCK WITH COVER: A separate TTB is to be provided. The manufacturer shall provide minimum two seals for the meter at the factory after calibration and testing. Proper arrangements for sealing of test terminal blocks cover are to be made.e. The terminals and the screws shall be suitable to carry up to 150% of Imax safely. 8. The meter cover shall have provision for placing minimum 2 Nos. 5. integration for KWH.5 Sq. The terminals shall have a suitable construction with barriers and covers to provide secure and safe connections of Current Transformers and Voltage Transformers leads of stranded copper conductors of 2. Suitable provision shall be made in the test terminal block for disconnecting the meter for testing purposes and for the purposes of testing the meter. Load survey with 30/15 min. MD button and MD display should be labeled preferably in different colours.

magnetic disturbance as well as electrostatic discharge do not damage or substantially influence the meter. The test report from any standard lab conducting the test as prescribed in the CBIP technical report No. are required as the meters are supposed to be installed in outdoor you may please specify them. fuse blowing or due to internal disconnections of a potential lead and its restoration with date and time along with total number of such occurrences during the above period. All these information should be available in simple and easily understandable format. 5.21 TAMPER AND FRAUD PROTECTION: The meter should have the following features to prevent/detect common ways of tamper and fraud: i) Phase sequence reversal: The meter should work accurately irrespective of phase sequence of the supply. ii) CT shorting/bypassing: The meter must have capability to record shorting/bypassing of one or any phases of the meter with date. 5. vi) External magnetic influence: The meter shall not get influenced by any external permanent / electromagnet(s). month and year of manufacture etc. The continuous Magnetic induction of external origin: The value of magneto motive force to be applied as per the stipulations of CBIP Report No.If any special precautions etc.T. 88 read with amendments for Static Electronic Energy Meters.18 NAME PLATE MARKING: The name plate shall be clearly marked etched embossed as per relevant Standards. 5.20 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS: The technical particulars as detailed in the specification shall be guaranteed and a statement of guaranteed technical particulars shall be furnished in format along with the tender. iv) Missing Potential : The meter shall be capable of recording occurrences of missing potential phase wise which can happen either owing to a P. Section-5 : Technical Specification 188 . The word “APEPDCL – JBIC-II” must be etched on the nameplate. The name plate shall be provided in such a manner that it is not exposed to the open and is secured against removal.88 (with latest amendments) and test results submitted. time and duration. vii) Tamper information: Minimum 50 events (occurrences and restoration) with date and time for all tampers individually. iii) CT Polarity reversal: The meter should register energy consumption correctly even though the CT polarities are reversed with date and time along with total number of such occurrences for all phases during the above period. 5. v) Missing Neutral: The meter shall continue to record accurately even if the neutral of PT supply is accidentally or incidentally disconnected.19 IMMUNITY TO ELECTRO MAGNETIC DISTURBANCE: The meter shall be designed in such a way that conducted or radiated electro. The name plate shall indicate purchaser’s name purchase order number & date. The information shall be logged on first in first out basis and total number of tamper events during the period.

The details of the self-diagnostic features shall be furnished by the Bidder. it should be possible to check the correctness of Current Transformer. For this purpose suitable software for field diagnosis of the meter connections with the help of meter and meter reading instruments should be supplied.2 While installing the meter. v) The meter should continue to record accurately as per prevailing electrical conditions even if the neutral of potential supply gets disconnected. Interface between meter and CMRI: Meter optical sensor terminating into RS 232 C.10mm with electrical circuit as illustrated a Appendix. 5.1 The bidder should furnish with detail explanation how their meters are able to detect/protect recording the above tamper and fraud features with sketches phasor diagrams if required. The current vector direction shall always be considered as positive (import) for the computation of 3 phase active energy which shall be added in the main active energy (import) register.21. iii) iii) The meter should work accurately irrespective of phase sequence of the mains supply. Section-5 : Technical Specification 189 .22.23. Bids without these details shall be treated as Non-responsive. 5.1 The meter shall have indications for unsatisfactory/ non functioning of the following: i) Time and Calendar ii) Real Time Clock Battery All Display segments iv) Non volatile memory (NVM) failure indication at BCS v) And any thing else as necessary.1. The two ends of the cable shall be stress relieved. Potential Transformer connections to the meter and their polarity from the functioning of the meter for different voltage injections. SALIENT FEATURES: The meter shall have the following additional salient features: i) It should be possible to check the healthiness of phase voltages by displaying all the voltages on the meter display. ii) The meter shall have provision to be read through communication port in the absence of power through an external source. This cable shall be supplied along with every Meter.5. iv) The meter should remain powered up and functional even when either of any two phases or any one phase along with neutral is available to the meter. The meter should power up using an external battery pack only in absence of power supply to the meter to enable taking of meter readings through display and communication port.22.23 FLEXIBLE SHIELDED CABLES: 5. An inductive coupling arrangement shall be provided so that it should not be possible to damage the circuitry of the meter by applying excess voltage directly in the meter. 5.22 Self diagnostics features: 5.23. 5. 9 Pin D-type male connector with a flexible shielded cable of length 1500 mm + / . vi) a) The meter shall record active energy in forward direction even if one or more CT’s are reversed.2.

The successful bidder shall submit the test reports for box within two weeks of clear purchase order. 88.( with latest amendments) IEC-687. or in any other place in addition 6. Compatibility of the box for housing the meter. After supplying of meters the random inspection will be conducted in the presence of bidder and the same will be sent for testing at 3rd party Government laboratory for all the type tests as per IS 13779/1999 at your cost. at site. c) The maximum demand shall be computed from the main active and apparent energy registers.1 TESTS: TYPE TESTS: As per the specification. TTB where applicable and ensuring ease of connecting and reading the meter. Tests for boxes: As per IS 5133 (Part II) 1969 and in addition the box material will be tested for withstanding temperatures of boiling water for 5 minutes continuously for non distortion or softening of the material. the metes shall be supplied for JBIC Ph-II works.b) The meter shall record apparent energy in forward direction even if one or more CT’s are reversed. All routine tests as in the relevant standards shall be carried out and routine test certificates shall be submitted to each consignee while dispatching the material.3 Physical verification of dimensions of the box. 6.2. The employer reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing.1 6. 6.2 Tests for Trivector Meters : As per CBIP Technical Report No. If any meter fails in the above tests the entire lot will be rejected. 6.2 ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS: All acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried out by the supplier in presence of employer’s representative.2.88 (with latest amendments) The following shall constitute acceptance test for box: i) ii) 6.3 6.3. Tests during manufacture: The Bidder shall furnish details of tests carried out during the process of manufacture and end inspection by the bidder to ensure the desired quality of the equipment to be supplied. The test certificates not more than two years old on the date of awarding of work from the recognized accredited national test laboratory as per the relevant standards shall be submitted along with the meters.1 Section-5 : Technical Specification 190 .0 6. ADDITIONAL TESTS: The purchaser reserves the right of having at suppliers expenses any other tests(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Bidders premises.1 6.2 Tests for Trivector Meters: As per CBIP Technical Report No.1.2. 6.1.

5 7.to the aforesaid type. by the purchaser in writing. The Bidder shall keep the purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the progress of manufacture of the offered equipment in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for inspection.4. and manufactured and the representative shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the bidder’s works. NOTE: The Meters used for conducting tests shall be calibrated periodically at reputed Government accredited Test Laboratories and test certificates shall be available at works for verification by employer representative.3. Test certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the Bidder. acceptance and routine tests. 6.0 7.2 7.5 7.4. These shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the purchaser. and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be defective. TEST REPORTS / TEST CERTIFICATES: Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Bidder at his works for periodic inspection by the purchaser’s representative. NOTE FOR FOREIGN BIDDERS: The bidder shall indicate the name(s) of reputed inspection agencies and the inspection charges clearly for each lot.4 7. raw materials and process of manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein. No delivery extension shall be given for this additional testing. The inspection charges shall be borne by the supplier.1 INSPECTION: The purchaser’s representative shall. The Bidder shall indicate the details of the equipment available with him for carrying out the various tests as per relevant Standards.4 6.2 In case of failure in any type test. The bidder shall indicate the sources of all materials. be entitled to have access to the works and at all places of manufacture where equipment is offered. unless the inspection is waived off. The supplier shall give 15 days advance intimation to enable the purchaser to depute his representative for witnessing acceptance and routine tests. at all times.3 7.2 6. TEST FACILITIES: The tests shall be carried out as per relevant Standards and test certificates shall be furnished for approval. to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications. without any extra cost to the purchaser.6 Section-5 : Technical Specification 191 . No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily inspected and tested. the supplier is required to modify the design of the material and the material shall be type tested again for the modified design.1 6. The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Bidder of any of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification. 6. 7.

These limitations shall be very clearly brought out in schedule of deviations from specified test requirements. copies of test certificates.. Section-5 : Technical Specification 192 . iv) The system for ensuring quality of workmanship. v) The quality assurance arrangements shall conform to be relevant requirements of ISO 9001 or ISO 9002 as appropriate.However the purchaser reserves the right to appoint at its cost any inspection agency to carry out the inspection. special acceptance and routine tests specified in the relevant standards. viii) List of manufacturing facilities available. iii. x) List of areas in manufacturing process. If any. vi) Statement giving list of important raw materials names of sub-suppliers for the raw materials. ix) Level of automation achieved and list of areas where manual procession exists. taking delivery and verification of materials. i. vii) Information and copies of test certificates as in (vi) above in respect of bought out accessories. xi) Lists of testing equipment available with the bidder for final testing of equipment specified and test plant limitation. The successful Contractor shall within 30 days of placement of order. submit following information to the employer. list of standards according to which the raw materials are tested. The Contractor shall submit the routine test certificates of bought out accessories and central excise asses for raw material at the time of routine testing if required by the purchaser and ensure that the quality assurance requirements of specification are followed by the sub-contractor. ii. Quality assurance plan (QAP) with hold points for employer’s inspection. failing which his bid shall be liable for rejection. The quality assurance programme shall give a description of the quality system and quality plans with the following details. List of test normally carried out on raw materials in presence of Bidder’s representative. 8. The quality assurance plan and purchasers hold points shall be discussed between the employer and Contractor before the QAP is finalized. i) ii) iii) The system of purchasing.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN: The bidder shall invariably furnish the following information along with his bid. The structure of organization. vis-a-vis the type. where stage inspections are normally carried out for quality control and details of such tests and inspections. The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work. Information shall be separately given for individual type of material offered. List of raw materials as well as bought out accessories and the names of sub suppliers selected from those furnished along with offers. Type test certificates of the raw materials and bought out accessories if required by the employer.

taking delivery and verification of materials.I. B) 9. Quality Plans:  An outline of the proposed work and programme sequence.  The system for the retention of records.  A list of administration and work procedures required to achieve and verify contract’s quality requirements. Section-5 : Technical Specification 193 . LIST OF DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS: The bidder shall furnish the followings along with bid: i) ii) iii) Two sets of drawings showing clearly the general arrangements.  The inspection of materials and components on receipt.  Final inspection and test.  Hold and Notification points. workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or materials which.4 Approval of drawings/work by purchaser shall not relieve the supplier of his responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the drawings for meeting the requirements of the latest revision of application standards.0 9. 9.) Dimensional drawings of the box for each quoted item. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for micro filming. in his judgment is not in full accordance therewith. fitting details. electrical connections etc.3 The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser.  The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work.  The system for ensuring quality workmanship.  Inspection during fabrication/Construction. These procedures shall be made readily available to the purchaser for inspection on request.A) Quality System:  The structure of the organisation. Units. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier’s risk.  Reference to the contractors work procedures appropriate to each activity.  The duties and responsibilities assigned to staff ensuring quality of work.  The system for control of documentation.  Submission of Engineering documents required by the Specification. All dimensions and data shall be in S.2 9.1 9. rules and codes of practices.  The arrangement for the contractor’s internal auditing. design. Technical leaflets (users manual giving operating instructions.  The structure of the contractors organisation for the contract. DOCUMENTATION: All drawings shall conform to International Standards Organisation (ISO) ‘A’ series of drawings sheet/India Standards Specifications IS :656.  The system for purchasing. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering.

due to improper and inadequate packing. CDs containing protocol Software and RMR enabling software in 2 sheets shall be furnished. 10. Each consignment shall be accompanied with a detailed packing list containing the following information.7.5 The successful Bidder shall.. submit three sets of final versions of all the drawings as stipulated in the purchase order for purchaser’s approval. c) Destination. The supplier shall. 10. proper arrangement for lifting. within 2 weeks of placement of order.. The supplier shall be responsible for any damage to the equipment during transit.2 10. e) Handling and packing instructions. a) Name of the consignee.2 9. The marking on each package shall be as per the relevant Standards and shall also contain “APEPDCL-JBIC-II”. are approved by the employer before dispatch.7. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within two weeks.3 10.1. Name of the supplier. Any material found short inside the packing cases shall be supplied immediately by supplier without any extra cost.1.3. test certificates in cases where inspection is waived shall be got approved by the purchaser. Wherever necessary. QUANTITY AND DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS: 9. TTB where applicable within two weeks of clear purchase order along with type tests certificates as per Clause 6.6 9.0 Section-5 : Technical Specification 194 . he should ensure the packing is such that. However.7. the material should not get damaged during transit by Rail/Road. PACKING & FORWARDING: The equipment shall be packed in crates suitable for vertical/horizontal transport as the case may be and suitable to withstand handling during transport and outdoor storage during transit. shall be provided. Supplies shall commence only after approval of these. The successful bidder shall furnish a sample of box duly mounting the meter. The acceptance test certificates in case pre-dispatch inspection is routine. such as lifting hooks etc. meter type and meter serial No. Eight sets of operating manuals/technical leaflets shall be supplied to each consignee for the first instance of supply.0 10. 9. b) Details of consignment. One set of routine test certificates shall accompany each dispatch consignment.1 9. d) Total weight of consignment.3. The easily damageable material shall be carefully packed and marked with the appropriate caution symbol. f) Bill of Material indicating contents of each package. if necessary. PO reference . The supplier shall ensure that the packing list and bill of materials.7. make.4 10. modify the drawings and resubmit three copies of the modified drawings for their approval.9. The packing shall be done as per the manufacturer’s standard practice.5 11.

If the tenderer does not replace within 180 days the cost of the meter(s) will be recovered from the existing bills/ future bills/ Bank Guarantees available APEPDCL.2 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS The Bidder shall furnish the guaranteed Technical Particulars as per enclosed Annexure-I-A for HT ELECTRONIC TRIVECTOR METERS used in meters. The samples shall comply with the specification. interfacing cables in India and also mention the service agencies. For the purpose of ensuring 5 years guarantee meter may be sealed at manufacturer’s premises and despatch in sealed condition after inspection by the APEPDCL representative.0 SUPERVISION SERVICES: NIL The purchaser will arrange for unloading of the consignments.1 MANDATORY SPARES & TOOLS: The bidder shall give the list of spares required for the equipment along with price list for them & shall keep a reasonable stock of the same during the warranty period. This sample may be subjected to various tests as per CBIP Technical Report No. The material should be guaranteed for satisfactory operation for a period of 5 years from the date of receipt of material at destination stores by the consignee in good condition. GUARANTEE: 15.0 TECHNICAL DEVIATIONS: Any deviation in Technical Specification as indicated in Section-V shall be specifically and clearly indicated in the enclosed Technical deviation format as per Section – VII.1. Annexure – I –B for BOX used for meter and submit the same with the Tender.IV.5 accuracy and 2Nos. 15.0 15. it shall be replaced by the supplier with a new meter free of cost with in 15 days.3 GENERAL: a) Principle of operation of the meter. sample meters of HT Static TVR meters for 33KV of class 0. During the guarantee period if the meter while in its normal operation is found defective. outlining the methods and stages of computation of various parameters starting from input voltage and current signals including the sampling rate if applicable shall be furnished by the bidder. 88 (with latest amendments) IEC 687 / IS wherever applicable & tamper and fraud protection tests. sample meters of HT Static TVR meters for 11KV of class 0. If the meter is not replaced within 30 days of intimation the supplier should note that the guarantee period will be extended to that extent by the number of days delayed beyond 30 days. 12. 14. 13. 15.2 accuracy shall be selected at random in the presence of bidder. Section-5 : Technical Specification 195 . In the event of the testing of the sample meter as above would at the cost of the bidder.The quantity and delivery requirements are indicated in Section.0 SAMPLE: After supply of meters 2Nos. 12. The bidder shall indicate the sources of spares like battery packs.

They must have computerized standard power source and standard equipment calibrated not later than a year (or as per standard practice). The details of testing facilities available for conducting (a) The routine tests and (b) Acceptance tests shall be furnished in a statement. Bids without these details will be treated as Non responsive. c) The bidder shall furnish details of memory used in the meter.b) The bidder shall indicate the method adopted to transform the voltage and current to the desired low values with explanation on devices used such as CT. APPENDIX DIAGRAM SHOWING THE 9 PIN CONNECTOR 9 PIN MALE CONNECTOR 500 mm 1 500 mm RS 232C 9 PIN D TYPE MALE CONNECTOR *5 *9 *4 *8 *3 *7 *2 *6 *1 PIN FUNCTION LISTING: Section-5 : Technical Specification 196 . VT or Potential divider as to how they can be considered superior in maintaining ratio and phase angle for variation of influence quantities during its service period. d) Details of testing facilities: The manufacturer laboratory must be well equipped for testing of the meters.

Central Board of Irrigation and Power. Indian Standard Bureau of Indian Standards Nanak Bhavan. Current Transformer Potential Transformer Degrees centigrade Maximum Acceleration Decibels Maximum Demand Time off day Minimum Common Meter Reading Instrument For the purpose of ensuring 5 years guarantee meter may be sealed at manufacturer’s premises and despatch in sealed condition after inspection by the APEPDCL representative. NEW DELHI – 110021. NEW DELHI – 110002.PIN 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 SIGNAL NAME NC ( Not Connected) Transmit Data TXD Receive Data RXD NC Signal Ground (SG) NC NC NC Power supply ( +4. 3. Chankyapuri. INDIA. International Organization for Standardization. 9. DENMARK. Danish Board of Standardization Aurehoegyej – 12. Heel prup. CMRI Name and Address International Electro Technical Commission Bureau Central de la Commission Electro Technique International. INDIA.75 V to +12. C Max Accn. DK – 2900. Switzerland. Bhadur Shah Zafar Marg. 2.5 V) ACRONYMS Reference Abbreviations IEC ISO ISS CBIP CT PT Deg. 5 Characteristics Marker’s name and country Type of meter/model Standards to which the meter conform Accuracy class Power consumption for phase i) Voltage circuit Section-5 : Technical Specification 197 . No. Rue de verembe Geneva. Malcha Marg. 1. db MD TOD Min. 4. ANNEXURE – I –A GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FORHT ELECTRONIC TRIVECTOR METERS Sl.

unity. 18. 21.F. 20.10% iii) -10% to -20% iv) .20% to . 19. ii) Current circuit Parameters measured P. and height of character Particulars of readout a) Continuous display b) Manually on display c) Auto display i) Parameters ii) Scrolling period iii) Display of period between two Cycles d) With MRI a) Meter terminal block having sealable extended terminal corner b) Test terminal block (TTB) with sealable extended cover c) Connection diagram inside the terminal cover d) Maximum safe current the terminals and screws shall carry Non volatile memory retention time in absence of power Details capacity (KB) Details of ratings/capacities a) Current ratings b) Integration period a) Remote readout facility provision b)Communication protocol used c) Sealing provision for optical port d) Baud rate of data transmission e) Required software to be resident in CMRI and BCS f) Data security Change in errors ( accuracy) due to variation in a) Voltage variation ii i) + 20% to + 10% ii) + 10% to .6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16. of digits of display. 17.30% b) Frequency variation 22 i) 50+10% Hz ii) 50+ / -5% Hz iii) 50-10% Hz c) Temperature Basic current i) <5% Ib ii) 5%Ib to 120% iii) > 120% Ib PF ( zero lagging. Range Overload capacity Variation of voltage at which meter functions normally Minimum starting current Dynamic range MD reset provisions Display of cumulative MD Display of MD resets along with date and time No. zero lead) Section-5 : Technical Specification 198 .

23 24 25 Details of tamper and fraud provisions a) On display b) With meter reading instrument and data transfer Detailed explanation how the tamper detection made is furnished or not Import / Export features Whether the meter is four quadrant meter Sealing of the meter ( Nos. if any No. of TOD registers Whether meter carries any certification mark Self diagnostics features ( Provide details) Principle of operation ( Provide details) Guarantee for satisfactory operation of meter 26 27 28 29 30 31 Section-5 : Technical Specification 199 . of seals) Meter cover Terminal block cover MD reset push button Communication port Test terminal block Others.

the relevant reference documents and standards acceptance norms. source inspection. components and selection of sub vendors service including vendors analysis. as necessary such programme shall be out lined by the contractor and shall be finally accepted by owner/authorized representative after discussions before the award of contract. components and equipment covered under the specification shall be procedure manufactured and tested at all the stages. The QA programme shall be generally in line with ISO-9000/IS-14000. Schedule for finalization of such quality plans will be finalized before award. System for shop manufacturing control including process controls.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAME To ensure that the equipment are in accordance with the specifications the contractor shall adopt suitable quality assurance programme to control such activities at all points. 2.2 Manufacturing quality plan shall detail out for all the components and equipments. System for quality audit System for authorities’ release of manufactured product to owner.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENS – QUALITY ASSURANCE All materials. Design control System Documentation control system Qualification data for bidder’s key personnel The procedure for purchase of material. to be carried out as per the requirements to this specification and standards mentioned therein and quality practices and procedures followed by contractor’s Quality Control Organization. 2. The detailed quality plans for the manufacturing activities should be drawn up by the bidder and will be submitted to Owner for approval. i) ii) iii) iv) v) vi) vii) viii) ix) x) xi) xii) xiii) xiv) xv) xvi) His organization structure for the management and implementation of the proposed quality assurance programme Quality system manual. inspection documents Section-5 : Technical Specification 200 .QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1. as per a comprehensive quality programme. inspection. System for maintenance of records System for handling storage and delivery All the plant standard/written down practices followed by the manufacturer/contractor against the manufacturing activities in their works will be submitted in electronic media preferably in at least one set of compact discs. not intended to form a comprehensive programme as it is the contractor’s responsibility to draw up and implement such programme duly approved by the Owner. A quality assurance programme of the contractor shall generally cover the following. Inspection and test procedure Control of calibration and testing of measuring and testing equipment. System for indication and appraisal of inspection status. incoming raw material inspection.0 2. verification of materials purchased etc. various tests. parts. fabrication and assembly controls Control of non-conforming items and systems for corrective actions. An indicative programme of inspection/tests to be carried out by the contractor for some of the major items is given in this specification. This is however.

3 The Bidder shall also furnish copies of the reference documents/Plant Standard/Acceptance norms/Test and inspection procedure etc.8 2. All materials used for equipment manufacture including casting and forging etc. All materials used and supplied shall be accompanied by valid and approved materials certificates and tests and inspection reports.10 Section-5 : Technical Specification 201 . shall be of tested quality as per relevant codes standard. Test results of qualification tests and specimen testing shall be furnished to the Owner for approval. No material shall be dispatched from the manufacture’s works before the same is accepted subsequent to pre-dispatch final inspection including verification of records of all previous tests/inspections by Owner’s Project manager/authorized representative. will be subject to Owner’s approval and will form a part of the contract in these approved Quality Plan. welders and welding operations employed on any part of the contract either in Contract’s/his Sub-contractors works or at site elsewhere shall be qualified as per ASME Section IX or BS 4871 or other equivalent international Standards acceptable to the Owner.9 2. All deviation to this specifications approved quality plans and applicable standard must be documented and referred to Owner along with technical justification for approval and disposition. Details of results of the tests conducted to determine the mechanical properties chemical analysis and details of heat treatment procedure recommended and actually followed shall be recorded on certificates and time temperature chart. Owner shall identify customer hold points (CHP) which shall be carried out in presence of the Owner’s Project Manager and beyond which work shall not proceed without written consent of Owner’s Project Manager/Authorized representative in writing.5 2. All welding/brazing procedure shall be submitted to the Owner authorized representative for approval prior to carrying out the welding/brazing. as referred in Quality Plan along with Quality Plans . and duly authorized for dispatch issuance of MDCC. during all stages of material procurement manufacture. Section IX/BS-4870 or other international equivalent standard acceptable to the Owner. These certificates and reports shall indicate the heat numbers or other such acceptance identical numbers of the material. All brazers.7 2.6 2. Tests shall be carried out as per applicable material standards and/or agreed details All welding and brazing shall be carried out as per procedure drawn and qualified in accordance with requirements of ASME.4 2. 2. However where required by the Owner.the Quality Plans and reference documents/standards etc. tests shall be conducted in presence of Owner/Authorized representative. assembly and final testing/performance testing.raised etc. The material certified shall also have the identification details stamped on it. 2.

etc along with his own technical evaluation and shall be submitted to approval shall not relieve the contractor from any obligation duty or responsibility under the contract.2.14 2. during the various stages of manufacture. after obtaining the written approval of the Owner.18 Section-5 : Technical Specification 202 . For components/equipment procured by the Contractors for the purpose of the Contract.12 2.11 2.17 2.15 2. QC Systems followed experience list. All the sub-vendors proposed by the Contractor for procurement of major bought out item including castings. Components. He shall carry out all tests/inspections required to establish that the items/equipments conform to requirements of the specifications and the relevant codes/standards specified in the specifications. The quality plans called for from the vendors shall set out. semi-finished and finished components/equipment. forgings. Owner reserves the right to carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the systems and procedures of the Contractor’s or their sub-vendor’s quality management and control activities.13 All the heat treatment results shall be recorded on time temperature charts and verified with recommended regimes. 2. within three weeks of the release of the purchase order/contract for such bought out items. the process capability process stabilization. The contractor proposal shall include vendors facilities established at the respective works. the Contractor’s purchase specifications and enquiries shall call for quality plans to be submitted by the suppliers along with their proposals. The Contractors shall carry out an inspection and testing programme during manufacture in his works and that of his sub-contractors and at site to ensure the mechanical accuracy of components compliance with drawings. The contractor shall provide all necessary assistance to enable the Owner carry out such audit and surveillance. list of which shall be drawn up by the Contractor and finalized with the Owner shall be furnished to the Owner for comments and subsequent approval before orders are placed. a copy of the same without price details but together with the detailed purchase specifications. Such quality plans of the successful vendors shall be finalized with the owner and such approved Quality Plans shall form a part of the purchase order/contracts between the contractor and the vendor. identity and acceptability of all materials parts and equipment. list of which shall be drawn up by the Contractor and finalized with the Owner shall be subject to owner approval. the quality practices and procedures followed by the vendor’s quality control organization. the relevant reference documents/standards used acceptance level. in addition to carrying out tests as per the approved Quality Plan. conformance to functional and performance requirements. The purchase specifications for the major bought out items. Results of all non-destructive testing shall be record on certificate. inspection of documentation raised etc. quality plans and delivery conditions shall be furnished to the Owner by the Contractor.16 2.

the following will also be recorded: a) When some important repair work is involved to make the job acceptable and b) The repair work remains part of the accepted product quality iv) All the accepted deviations shall be included with complete technical details. which are supplied as a part of the contractor for executing the works.20 2. Section-5 : Technical Specification 203 .21 3. v) The contractor shall transfer all the guarantees/warranties of the equipment purchased by him to the employer. During the course of inspection. standard data sheet. if used and methods used to verify that the inspection and testing points in the inspection plan were performed satisfactorily.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS : 3. the quality requirements as agreed for the main equipment supply shall be applicable.1 The Contractor shall be required to submit two sets of compact discs of the following Quality Assurance documents within three weeks after dispatch of the equipment. Repair/rectification procedures to be adopted to make the job acceptable shall be subject to the approval of the Owner/authorized representative. For all spares and replacement items. i) The inspection plan with verification.19 Quality audit/surveillance/approval of the results of the tests and inspection will not. 2. however. ii) Factory tests results for testing required as per applicable codes and standard referred in the specification. drawings etc.2. verification sketches. prejudice the right of the Owner to reject the equipment if it does not comply with the specification when installed or does not comply with the specification in service and the above shall in no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in ensuring complete conformance of the materials/equipment supplied to relevant specification. iii) Inspection reports duly signed by QA personnel of the Owner and Contractor for the agreed inspection hold points. inspection plan check points.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful